A-LEVEL BIOLOGY

STUDY GUIDE

P530/1

VOLUME 1

NAME:...........................................................................................................................................................

SCHOOL:........................................................................................................................................................

CLASS:...........................................................................................................................................................

AUTHORS

Gingo David (H. 0. D) Kato Maxmillian

SEROMA CHS SEROMA CHS
+256 703928700/+256 787541885 +256706688630/+256778054614
[email protected] [email protected]
A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

Contents

1 PREFACE 6

2 ACKNOWLDEGEMENT 7

3 INTRODUCTION 8

3.1 The purpose of writing the A-level Biology Study Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

3.2 Format of the book. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

3.3 How to use the book. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

3.4 Format of A-level Biology paper one (UACE P530/1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

3.5 Inside the paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

4 ORGANISATION IN CELLS AND ORGANISMS 51

4.1 Cell structure and cell functioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

4.2 Cell physiology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

4.3 Histology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

5 THE CHEMICALS OF LIFE 106

5.1 Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

5.2 Carbohydrates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

5.3 Lipids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

5.4 Proteins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

5.5 Vitamins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

6 CHEMICAL REACTIONS IN A CELL 133

Kato Maxmillian 2 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

6.1 Enzymes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

7 CLASSIFICATION AND DIVERSITY OF LIVING ORGANISMS. 140

7.1 The taxonomic heirarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

7.2 Viruses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

7.3 Kingdom Monera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

7.4 Kingdom Fungi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

7.5 Kingdom Animalia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

7.6 Kingdom Plantae . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

8 THE ORGANISM AND ITS ENVIRONMENT 164

8.1 Biosphere, ecological niche and biotic environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

8.2 Estimating population and population growth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

8.3 Associations between organisms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

8.4 Effects of humans on ecosystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

9 HEREDITY 204

9.1 The structure of nucleic acids and nature of the gene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

9.2 Cell division . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

9.3 Protein synthesis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

9.4 Mendel’s monohybrid and dihybrid inheritance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

9.5 Gene interactions, linkage, lethal genes etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

10 EVOLUTION 250

10.1 Mutation and Variation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Kato Maxmillian 3 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

10.2 Application of Hardy-Weinberg principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

10.3 Darwin and Lamark’s theories of evolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

10.4 Evidences of evolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

10.5 The origin and emergency of new species, types of selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

11 THE MAINTENANCE OF LIFE 282

11.1 Autotrophic nutrition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

11.2 Heterotrophic nutrition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

11.3 Gas exchange in plants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

11.4 Gas exchange in animals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

11.5 The release of energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

11.6 Transport in animals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

11.7 Defence and Immunity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

11.8 Transport in plants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

12 ADJUSTMENT AND CONTROL 384

12.1 Principles of homeostasis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

12.2 Glucose regulation in the body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387

12.3 Temperature regulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392

12.4 Excretion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401

12.5 Osmoregulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410

13 RESPONSE AND COORDINATION 424

13.1 Plant response and growth substances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424

Kato Maxmillian 4 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

13.2 Reception of stimuli . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434

13.3 Nervous communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448

13.4 Hormonal communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465

13.5 Behaviour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472

13.6 Effectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482

13.7 Locomotion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488

14 REPRODUCTION 493

14.1 Asexual reproduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493

14.2 Sexual reproduction in animals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497

14.3 Sexual reproduction lower organisms and flowering plants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515

15 DEVELOPMENT 523

15.1 Growth and development in plants and animals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523

Kato Maxmillian 5 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

1 PREFACE

As the authors of the A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE we have fundamentally written this book
having been stimulated to redeem the continuous poor performance in such an essential subject on which
everyone depends to maintain life. We have discovered where the problem is and our response is to
present to you this book as the exact solution.
The book consists of learning objectives and the exhaustive examination questions per subtopic. The
questions assess the extent to which the student has achieved each of the learning objectives in every
subtopic before rushing for another topic.
The questions have been organized following the most recent NCDC advanced level Biology syllabus
handling all the topics.
To instill essential skills of advanced biology paper1 P530/1. No answers have been suggested to foster
scientific research and analysis among students, and allow teachers guide their students in line with the
most up-to-date approaches to the questions therein.
However, whenever need arises users are more than welcome to consult the authors on possible lines of
argument and approach to the questions.
This book is designed to be used throughout the A-level course and not as a last minute revision aid.
It should be used in conjunction with the textbooks, lesson explanations, studies from field work, study
trips and any other study relevant to the advanced level Biology syllabus.
Although the book is primarily designed as a student study guide, it is envisaged that teachers will find
it useful.
We trust you will find this book informative and helpful and that it will stimulate further interest in
Biology. We hope it will support your studies and so contribute to a satisfactory outcome at the end of
your course. We wish you well in your efforts to achieve A-level success.
. Gingo David and Kato Maxmillian.

Copyright c 2020:
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced in whole or in part in any form
or by any means, mechanical, electrical, recording, photocopying or otherwise without prior written
permission by the authors.
. First edition 2020

Kato Maxmillian 6 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

2 ACKNOWLDEGEMENT

We thank the almighty God for the gift of wisdom that has enabled us to compile this book.
We acknowledge the following biology experts for their technical advice and support in the lay down of
this book;
Mr. Magala Dan (Lecturer Makerere University), Mr. Kiguwa Anthony (Head of Biology Department
Ndejje Secondary School), Mr. Nakibinge Alex (Head of Biology Department Uganda Martyrs SS
Namugongo), Mr. G.K Kiwanuka (Head of Biology Namilyango College), Mrs Sheila Bwogere (Head of
Biology Department Kings College Budo, Mr. Mukuye Augustine (Head of Biology Department Budo
SS), Mr. Mayega Deogratius (Head of Biology Department Mengo SS), Mr. Kinene George William
(Head of Biology Department Katikamu SDA Secondary School), Dagula Dominic (Senior teacher of
Biology Katikamu SDA Secondary School), Mr. Kiwanuka (Senior teacher of Biology Mengo SS),
Mr. JB Rubahamya (Senior teacher of Biology Mengo SS), Mr. Ntambi (Head of Biology Department
St.Josephs SS Naggalama), Mr. Kayongo Allan (Head of Biology Department Merryland High School,
Mrs. Rose Semakula (Head of Biology Department Trinity College Nabbingo), Mr. Kiryoowa (Head
of Biology Department Seeta Mukono Campus), Barasa Gerald (seroma christian high school), Sevume
Fred (Seroma Christian High School), Mrs. Mwanje Flavia Seroma Christian High School, Mr.Kibonde
Henry (Seroma Christian High School), Mr. Musame Gerald Head of Biology Department Mt. St.
Henrys SS Mukono), Mr. Habib (Gombe SS), Mr. Erenyu John (Seeta High School Main Campus),
Mr. Alagai Charles (Seeta High School Main campus), Mr.Naabye Wilson (Hilton High School, St
Balikudembe SS Kisoga), Mr.Sekandi Isa (Kawempe Muslim SS, Director Atom Science Maganjo),
Mr. Sisye Samuel (Midland High School and Brilliant High School Kawempe), Mr. Semanda William
(Trinity College Nabbingo), Mr. Wambi Jonathan (Mt. St Marys Namagunga), Mr. Mpaata Ernest (DOS
Elite High School Entebbe), Wasswa (Head of Biology Department Kyadondo Secondary School), and
many others.

Kato Maxmillian 7 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

3 INTRODUCTION

3.1 The purpose of writing the A-level Biology Study Guide

The A-level Biology Study Guide has been written to answer the following four
fundamental questions asked by a student who has the zeal to excel;
1. How is the A-level Biology paper one (UACE P530/1) set?
2. How should I prepare in order to excel in the UACE P530/1 examination?
3. How should I answer the questions in the UACE P530/1 examination?
4. How is the UACE P530/1 examination marked?

3.2 Format of the book.

The A-level Biology Study guide has been designed systematically to respond to the above questions by
presenting to you the following four main features;
1. The format of A-level Biology paper 1 (UACE P530/1).
2. The learning objectives of the sub-topics of each topic.
3. Exhaustive examination questions (both multiple choice/objective and structured questions) for each
sub-topic of A-level Biology.
4. Each learning objective of each sub-topic has exhaustive examination questions that assess the level
at which the student has achieved each learning objective for each sub-topic before rushing for another
sub-topic and topic at large.

3.3 How to use the book.

This book is designed to be used throughout the A-level course and not as a last minute revision aid.
It should be used in conjunction with the textbooks, lesson explanations, studies from field work, study
trips and any other study relevant to the advanced level Biology syllabus.
You should know that every question in this book was set from a particular text book of A-level biology.

Kato Maxmillian 8 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

Therefore, follow the following five steps while using this book.
1. Read the question thoroughly while underlining the key terms and words of emphasis.
2. Study various text books one by one in search for the answer.
3. Write your answer in the spaces provided.
4. Take to your teacher for marking.
5. Make corrections where applicable as guided by the teacher.
You remember that this is a study guide, therefore instead of answering the questions directly using your
brain, it is better to use each question even if it is one objective question as an opportunity for you to
open various text books and do thorough reading about that area.

Kato Maxmillian 9 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

3.4 Format of A-level Biology paper one (UACE P530/1)

Doing an exam is like facing an opponent in a contest. If you are preparing wisely for the contest one of
the things you will not miss to do is to find out and study the style of play or operation of the opponent:
After seeing his/her style, you train to acquire the necessary skills to counteract his style. In that way
you defeat him.
If you are not aware of your opponents style, then all your preparation is just a gamble. Our opponent
here is the UNEB Biology paper 1 (P530/1) question paper. We get its style of play by looking at the
format of this paper.
So follow keenly as we explore through this sample paper (UNEB 2017 Biology P530/1)
Read the front page of the paper and note down the key aspects there.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
Also read through the inside of the paper from page 2 onwards and note down the key aspects there,
look at the sections there, types of questions, marks allocated and the space for writing the answers.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
Then compare your findings with the detailed analysis following after this paper.

Kato Maxmillian 10 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

Candidates Name:................................................................ Signature:........................................................................

(Do not write your School/Centre Name or Number anywhere on this booklet.)
P530/1
BIOLOGY
Nov./Dec.2017
21/2 hours

UGANDA NATIONAL EXAMINATIONS BOARD

Uganda Advanced Certificate of Education
BIOLOGY (THEORY)
Paper 1
2 hours 30 minutes

INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES:
This paper consists of sections A and B
Answer all questions in both sections.

SECTION A
Write answers to this section in the boxes provided.
SECTION B
Write answers to this section in the spaces provided.
No additional sheets of paper should be inserted in this booklet.

Kato Maxmillian 11 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

SECTION A (40 MARKS)

Write the letter to the correct answer in the corresponding box.

Each question in this section carries one mark.

1. Which one of the following pairs of hormones when released increase the level blood sugar in the

body?

A. Secretin and insulin. C. Insulin and anti-diuretic hormone.

B. Adrenaline and glucagon. D. Secretin and thyroxine.

2. The inheritance of comb shape in fowls is controlled by two dominant alleles P and R. What is the
probability of producing a homozygous double recessive fowl with no comb, from parents of ge-

netic constitution PpRr and PpRR?

A. 0%. B. 25%. C. 50%. D. 100%.

3. The surface area and volume of four animals A, B, C and D are given in Table 1. Which one of them

would experience the highest rate of heat loss when cold?

4. Which one of the following genetic abnormalities does not result from non-disjunction?

A. Klinefelters syndrome. C. Haemophilia.

B. Turners syndrome. D. Downs syndrome.

5. The earth worm does not require a special respiratory organ because
A. it is not very active metabolically.
B. its moist cuticle allows gases to dissolve and diffuse easily.
C. its surface lacks a cuticle.
D. it has a large surface area to volume ratio.

Kato Maxmillian 12 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

6. Variation among organisms which reproduce by fission can be due to

A. crossing over. C. random fertilisation.

B. mutation. D. independent assortment.

7. Which one of the following types of plants is likely to have the thinnest leaf cuticle?

A. Mesophytes. B. Halophytes. C. Hydrophytes. D. Xerophytes.

8. The cutting of a plant apex encourages the growth of many side branches because
A. it encourages the interaction of auxins and gibberellins.
B. secondary growth increases in the stem.
C. auxins transfer downwards along the stem.
D. apical dominance is removed.

9. Dioeciuos plants are rare because.

A. they have separate male and female flowers on the same plant.
B. there is self-incompatibility of the gametes.
C. the male and female plants rarely mature at the same time.
D. part of each species of dioeciuos plants does not bear fruits.

10. During protein synthesis, the anticodon base sequence on tRNA is AUG.
What is the base sequence on the template DNA strand?

A. UAC. B. ATG. C. AUG. D. TAC.

11. Figure 1 shows changes in dry mass of a growing seedling with time.

Kato Maxmillian 13 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

Which part of the curve indicates growth where respiration in higher than photosynthesis?

A. R. B. S. C. P. D. Q.

12. Cones have better visual acuity than rods because cones.
A. have little retinal convergence.
B. are more sensitive to light.
C. connect with a single optic nerve fibre.
D. are more concentrated at the fovea.

13. Figure 2 shows parallel flow across a gill plate in a fish.

Which one of the points indicated on the figure would have the highest diffusion gradient?

A. R. B. P. C. Q. D. S

14. A common aspect between photosynthesis and chemosynthetic bacteria is that they both
A. use water as a source of hydrogen.
B. release oxygen during the synthesis of organic compounds.
C. contain energy absorbing compounds.
D. use carbon dioxide as a raw material.

15. A plant which is not lignified, has poorly developed xylem tissue with large airspaces in stem and

leaves belongs to the group of

A. Mesophytes. B. hydrophytes. C. halophytes. D. xerophytes.

Kato Maxmillian 14 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

16. Which one of the following organisms possesses a heart which pumps out only deoxygenated

blood?

A. Birds. B. Mammals. C. Amphibians. D. Fish.

17. Which one of the following cells is formed by mitosis?

A. Ovum. C. Primary spermatocytes.

B. Secondary spermatocytes. D. Secondary oocyte.

18. Which one of the following changes in the guard cells lead to the opening of the stomata?

A. Increase in the pressure potential. C. Increase in the water potential.

B. Increase in the hydrogen ion concentration. D. Reduction in the sugar level.

19. Which one of the following groups comprises of organisms with least common features?

A. Species. B. Family. C. Genus. D. Order.

20. The purpose of immunizing an individual against a disease is to.

A. stop the disease-causing organisms from attacking the individual.
B. enable the individual produce antigens to combat pathogens.
C. ensure that individuals body is strong.
D. induce the production of antibodies to combat disease causing organisms.

21. Sucrose is a major transport solute in plant because it

A. is highly solute so can be in high concentration in the trap.
B. can be easily converted into glucose and fructose.
C. is insoluble so it cannot be used in chemical reactions.
D. can be oxidized by the living parts of the phloem.

Kato Maxmillian 15 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

22. Which one of the following is the tidal volume in an individual whose ventilation rate is 2000dm3 /mm

and takes 10 breaths per minute?

A. 0.2 dm3 B. 2.0 dm3 C. 200 dm3 D. 20 dm3

23. Imprinting can be described as

A. a behavior that involves recognizing a prink mark.
B. an innate behaviour that requires practice.
C. learning that occurs at a critical period in early development.
D. learning that requires a sign stimulus.

24. The following equation summarises aerobic respiration of glucose. C6 H12 O6 + 6CO2 → 6H2 O +
38ATP If the energy released on complete oxidation of one mole of glucose is 2880KJ and one ATP
contains 30.6 KJ of energy, what is the percentage efficiency of aerobic respiration of glucose in

the equation.

A. 40% B. 38% C. 68.6% D. 94.1%

25. Which one of the following cell types provides strength with flexibility in plant tissues?

A. Parenchyma. B. Collenchyma. C. Tracheids D. Sieve tubes

26. If a plant cell is placed in a hypertonic solution, its water potential becomes.

A. zero. B. more negative. C. positive. D. one.

27. Figure 3 shows the frequency of a trait among a group of students.

The difference in the phenotypes is due to

A. the altitudes where individuals live.

Kato Maxmillian 16 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

B. genetic makeup.
C. frequency of disease among individuals.
D. different diet among individuals.

28. A specimen observed under an electron microscope measures 50mm and the actual specimen

measures 5.0µm. The magnification of the specimen under the microscope is

A. 10. B. 55. C. 250. D. 10x103 .

29. Saturated fatty acids and unsaturated fatty acids are similar in
A. the number of carbon to carbon bonds they possess.
B. their consistence at room temperature.
C. the number of oxygen atoms present.
D. the number of hydrogen atoms they contain.

30. What would be the estimated fish population in a lake if 350 fish were captured, marked and

released, and later 450 fish including 150 marked fish were captured?

A. 116. B. 1050. C. 650. D. 250.

31. Which one of the following substances is not transported by the blood circulatory system in arthro-

pods?

A. Nutrients. B. Hormones. C. Respiratory gas. D. Nitrogenous wastes

32. Figure 4 represents a pair of homologous chromosomes during meiosis.

If crossing over occurs at appoint marked Q, genotypes in the gametes formed would be

Kato Maxmillian 17 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

A. AA, BB. B. AA, aa, BB, bb. C. Ab, AB, Ab, ab. D. AB, ab.

33. Promotion of cell division by cytokinins only in the presence of auxins is an interaction known as

A. synergistic. B. antagonistic. C. summative. D. complementary.

34. Which one of the following activities results into release of nitrogen into the atmosphere?

A. Water logging of soils. C. Growing of legumes.

B. Over grazing of pasture. D. Uptake of mineral salts by the plant.

35. Which one of the following is true of what occurs at the excitatory synapse when an impulse ar-

rives?
A. Chloride ion channels close.
B. Receptor sites close.
C. Post synaptic membrane becomes impermeable to calcium ions.
D. Sodium ion channels open.

36. Stretching of the urinary bladder is made possible by the presence of

A. squamous epithelium. C. columnar epithelium.

B. transitional epithelium. D. stratified epithelium.

37. Figure 5 shows the rate of photosynthesis of a plant at varying conditions.

Which factor is limiting photosynthesis in curve 2?

Kato Maxmillian 18 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

A. Carbon dioxide concentration. C. Light intensity.

B. pH. D. Temperature.

38. The desert frog has solved the problem of osmoregulation by

A. having unique nocturnal habits. C. having a water proof skin.

B. possessing few glomeruli. D. possessing a long loop of Henle.

39. Which one of the following is true of a fully contracted muscle fibre?

A. The H-zone disappears. C. The I band widens.

B. The filaments shorten. D. The sarcomere widens.

40. Which one of the following is a function of the autonomic sympathetic nervous system?

A. Constriction of bronchioles. C. Acceleration of heart beat.

B. Stimulation of tear glands. D. Speeding up of gut movements.

SECTION B (60 MARKS)

Write answers in the spaces provided.

41. (a) Explain the role of consumers and producers in the recycling of carbon in nature.
(i) Consumers (03 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Producers (02 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Give five reasons why all the carbon in plants is not accessible to herbivores. (05 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 19 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

42. Figure 6 shows the effect of temperature on the rates of photosynthesis and respiration in well
illuminated leaves.

(a) Compare the effect of temperature on the rate of photosynthesis and respiration. (04 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Explain the shapes of the curves. (06 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

43. (a) Give one function of synapses in the nervous system. (01 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) When an action potential arrives at a synapse, calcium ions enter the neurone through presy-
naptic membranes.
(i) Explain how the calcium ions enter the neurone. (02 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 20 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(ii) Describe the events which occur as a result of the entry of the calcium ions to cause depolar-
ization of the post synaptic membrane. (05 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Explain the role of cholinesterase at synapses. (02 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

44. Figure 7 shows a relationship between a pest and a biological control agent.

(a) Giving a reason sate which curve represents the

(i) pest (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) control agent (01 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Explain the changes in population of the pest and the control agent. (05 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 21 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

(c) Suggest what would happen if the pest was completely wiped out. (02 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(d) Explain the characteristic of a good biological control agent. (01 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

45. (a) Explain how changes in the solute potential of a cell affects its turgidity. (04 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) A plant cell with a solute potential of -1240 kPa and a pressure potential of 250kPa was im-
mersed in a sucrose solution whose water potential was -530 kPa. (i) Calculate the water potential
gradient between the cell and the sucrose solution. (03 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) State the direction in which the water will flow. (01 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Outline the differences between plasmolysis and wilting. (02 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 22 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

46. Figure 8 show the oxygen dissociation curves for two species of fish, the Carp and the Mackerel.
The Carp lives in a pond with decomposing vegetation while the Mackerel lives in the surface
water of the sea.

(a) Describe how the percentage saturation of haemoglobin with oxygen changes with change in
partial pressure of oxygen in the two species.
(i) Carp (01 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Mackerel (01 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Explain the changes in percentage saturation of haemoglobin with partial pressure of oxygen
in the two species.
Carp (04 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Mackerel (04 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 23 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

The front page of the paper.

To get inside the paper we must go through the front page. You should realise that everything on
the paper counts and should be taken seriously. It is there for a cause. This page shows that;
i) your identity is required and ensured. This is by three things. The name, personal number and
signature.
ii) marking of your paper is not subject to the whims of an individual examiner. Several examiners
are handling your paper and are held accountable for whatever is done. This is by indication of
their identity by their number and signatures.
iii) there are specific rules (instructions) to follow to answer this question paper. All this means
that one gets fair assessment and receives what he/she deserves. Just work hard. There are no
tricks you get what you work for.

3.5 Inside the paper.

The paper is made up of two sections A and B to be answered as follows;

SECTION A
Section A is made up of 40 objective questions (multiple choice questions).
An objective question is a one which has only one potential correct answer. This is opposite to a
subjective question which has more than one potential correct answer.
A multiple choice question is a question with many choices for you to pick as your answer but
only one of the offered answers is correct.
In Biology paper 1 (P530/1), each objective question (multiple choice question) is made up of two
main parts; the stem and four alternative answers labelled A, B, C and D. These four alternative
answers seemingly look similar but only one of them is the correct answer while the remaining
three are destructors.

Kato Maxmillian 24 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

The stem of every multiple choice question is extracted from any of the common textbooks and
thus the correct answer is exactly in that same portion of the textbook where the stem is extracted
from. This is confirmed by taking a look at the 40 multiple choice questions in section A of our
sample paper (UNEB P530/1, 2017) as shown in table 1.
Table 1.

Kato Maxmillian 25 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

Kato Maxmillian 26 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

Kato Maxmillian 27 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

Kato Maxmillian 28 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

Advise on how to use textbooks to search for answers.

Table 1 confirms that every objective question is set from a particular textbook.
Some questions are modified from the questions in particular textbooks for example question 9,30
and 34 of our sample paper (UNEB P530/1 2017)
Table 1 also shows that every question is set from a particular subtopic.
Therefore, whenever you come across any objective question, you are advised to;
(i) Identify the subtopic and topic from where it was set.
(ii) Study that subtopic in various text books until you find out the particular
text book from where the question was set. That is where the correct answer is.
During your study you will discover that there is a particular question that is set from

Kato Maxmillian 29 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(i) only one particular text book e.g. questions 38, 24,34,9 and 13. The answer for any of such
questions can only be found in only a particular text book and thus it is harder to discover unless
by chance you open that text book as the first one during your study.
(ii) from more than one text book e.g. question 7, 3, etc. The answer for such questions can be
found in more than one text book and thus is easier to discover.
Now this book has many objective questions already organized into their corresponding subtopics.
This implies that you are left with only one task i.e.
To read the question and open various text books until you discover where that question was set
from and that is where the correct answer is. You can note the reference text book and page on
that question after the discovery to ease the study in a few days/hours to the examination.
Such a study will enrich you with the content of the whole topic. Therefore, objective questions
should be used as tools for studying Biology rather than just guessing the answer.
Open text books and study even if you are capable of giving the answer directly because there is
no question that will ever reappear in UNEB but studying Biology using the already set questions
can make you ready for any fresh questions to come.
This study will make you familiar with various textbooks to the extent that you can be in your
final UNEB exam and tell the text book and page where a particular question was set from and of
course you cannot fail such a question.
The following are the text books recommended to be used during your study;
1. Chapman.J.L. and Reiss, MJ., (1995). Ecology: Principles and Application. Cambridge:
Cambridge University Press.
2. Clegg, C.J. and Mackean. D.G, (2000). Advanced Biology Principles and Applications. 2nd
Edition, London: Hodder Education.
3. Clegg, C.J. Mackean .D.G, (1996). Advanced Biology Principles and Applications: Study
guide, London Hodder Education.
4. Freeman, W.H. and Bracegirdle, B, (1983): An atlas of Histology, Michighan: Heinmann
Educational.
5. Toole, G. and Toole,S, (1999). New Understanding Biology for Advanced Level, 4th Edition,
UK: Nelson Thornes.
6. Nigel G.P.O. et al (1990); Biology Science, 3rd Edition, Cambridge University Press, Cam-
bridge.
7. Roberts, M.B.V, (1986). Biology: A functional approach, 4th edition, Kong Thornes. 8. Kent,

Kato Maxmillian 30 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

M, (2000). Advanced Biology. 1st edition, oxford, New York.

9. Vines, A, E and Rees, (1977). Plant and Animal biology. Volume 1, London: Pitman Pub-
lishing.
10. Vines, A, E and Rees, (1977). Plant and Animal biology. Volume 2, London: Pitman Pub-
lishing.
The 40 objective questions of this section are such that they are spread almost over all the topics.
They are spread uniformly in all the 6 main blocks. This can be confirmed by taking a look at table
2.
Table 2

Kato Maxmillian 31 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

Kato Maxmillian 32 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

The 40 objective questions are also set in such a way that they are distributed in the following
branches of biology
(i) Animal biology (Zoology)
(ii) Plant biology (Botany)
(iii) Both Plant and Animal Biology
(iv) Microbiology (the biology of microscopic organisms)
(v) Universal biology (the biology concepts that cut across all living things)

Kato Maxmillian 33 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

Check table 3 to see how the 40 objectives are distributed in the different branches of biology.

The 40 objective questions cover the various abilities of the brain i.e. recall, comprehension, ap-
plication
If it is a boxing contest these are now the various styles of play. The upper cuts, cross cuts, and
hooks of the game. For football it would be the different ways of dodging, passing on the ball and
kicks.

Kato Maxmillian 34 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

These brain abilities are precisely of three kinds and degrees of difficult. Listed in order of in-
creasing difficulty are;
(i) Recall (knowledge).
(ii) Comprehension.
(iii) Application.
For any topic, a question may be set requiring you to exercise your brain in any of the above areas.
(i) Recall (Knowledge) questions.
These are questions that do not require any reasoning but just remembering. There is no reasoning
to get the answer. You either remember on not. They are the type of questions where you can get
the answer directly from the textbook.
The recall/knowledge questions have the following action verbs if they are to be perceived as or
converted into structured questions;
List, state, define, and outline

Check examples of such questions in our sample paper using table 4.

Though the simplest, memory is necessary, it is the basis for further brain work. Without memory
of facts there will be nothing to comprehend or apply.
Memory of facts is therefore tested and not completely ignored.
Answering such questions requires less thoughts and time than that required for comprehension
and application questions though they all carry one mark.

(ii) Comprehension questions.

These are questions that require reasoning based on some knowledge to get the answer. You may
even read the textbook and find the answer directly written.
The compression questions have the following action verbs if they are to be perceived as or con-
verted into structured questions;
Describe (structure/process), explain, compare, differentiate, distinguish and relate.
Check examples of such questions in our sample paper using table 4.
Answering comprehension questions requires more thoughts and time than knowledge questions
and less thoughts and time than the application questions.

Kato Maxmillian 35 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(iii) Application questions.

This involves getting facts or principles and putting them to use in a given situation.
The application questions are those you will find involving;
calculations, interpretation of data and graphs.
Check examples of such questions in our sample paper using table 4.
Answering application questions requires more thoughts and time than comprehension and knowl-
edge questions though they all carry one mark.

Ordinary level questions set in UNEB A-level Biology P530/1

When you look at the questions as guided by the row of O-level content in table 4, you will dis-
cover that every year, UNEB sets over 10 such O-level questions in this advanced level paper that
can be passed by even an ordinary level student. These being out 40 questions contributes over a
quarter of the total questions in section A.

In case a comprehension question can be answered by an ordinary level student (i.e. is part of the
Ordinary level content) it is taken as a recall/knowledge question because it requires less thoughts
and time to be answered since you have prior knowledge about it.
And if an application question can be answered by an ordinary level student (i.e. is part of the
Ordinary level content) it is taken as a comprehension question because it requires less thoughts
and time to be answered since you have prior knowledge about it.

Check examples of such questions in our sample papers using table 4 in the row of O-level content.

Kato Maxmillian 36 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

HOW TO ANSWER OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS AND EXCEL IN SECTION A DURING AN

EXAMINATION
If you are to stand higher chances of scoring a distinction in Biology paper 1 you should ensure that you
score above 35 marks out 40 in section A. The steps that follow guide you about how you can behave
during the examination in order to excel in section A.
In approaching multiple choice questions;
a) You should read through the whole question and all the alternatives before making your choice be-
cause often more than one will be correct to some degree.

Kato Maxmillian 37 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

b) The reading should be aimed at analysing the details of the question which enables you to discover
the idea or concept of the question.
c) Analysing the question requires you to look for two things;
(i) Key words.
(ii) Emphasis.
d) Underline the key words and the emphasis as you read the question

e) On reading again, reject those responses you feel are clearly incorrect. Always reject on a sound
biological basis and never because it doesnt sound right or because it cant be C for the fifth time on the
trot.
f) Should you still be left with more than one answer try to find a good reason why one response is better
than the other.
g) Answer all the forty questions.

SECTION B (60 MARKS)

Section B is made up of six compulsory structured questions each out of 10 marks. A structured question
is a question which has a dictated space for writing answers to the question. This implies that once the
answers are written elsewhere instead of that space, they are not marked. Parts of a structured question
Any structured question is made up of three parts; 1. The stem of the question. 2. The marks allocated.
3. The space provided.

There is something to learn from each of these three parts.

1. The stem of the question
The stem of every structured question is set from a particular A-level Biology Textbook and the answer
to that question is exactly on that page. For example, considering our sample paper UACE P530/1 2017,
Table 5 shows where each of the questions 41 to 46 was set from and that is where the correct answer is.
Check in those text books and prove.

Kato Maxmillian 38 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

2. The marks allocated.

The marks allocated guide you on what and how much content to write in your answer.
3. The space provided
The space provided guide you on how precise you are supposed to be while presenting your answer.
Being precise means being strait to the point i.e. avoid using unnecessary words /extra words that do not
earn you any mark. Avoid doubting the answer (may be/could be)
Answering structured questions requires short, precise, clear and complete answers. The question design
incorporates an emphasis on which answers are based.
How is the space provided determined by the setter?
During the setting of this section, the setter budgets for only the correct answer.
They dont budget for your mistakes. After setting any structured question, the setter proposes his/her
answers using his handwriting. Then he/she presents the space for the answer in the question paper
equivalent to the space he/she has used plus an allowance of about 2 lines to cater for the differences in
the handwritings of the different students.
Therefore, you should first read the question carefully, underline the key words and words of emphasis,
organize your answers and then present them precisely and logically.
Once you see that the space is not enough for your answer just know that you are gambling rather than
giving the correct answer budgeted for or just know that you have misfired the question.
Once the space is too big for you to use beyond a half of it, just know that your brain has less than

Kato Maxmillian 39 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

the required content. Thus you will score less than the marks allocated. Or you may have misfired the
question.
Leaving less than half of the space unused is okay because in most cases the examiner gives slightly
more space from his/hers to cater for the individual differences in handwritings.
When the question asks for a certain number of answers for example state three similarities and gives a
space of 6 lines and then you present 6 similarities in the struggle to utilise the whole space provided,
the examiner will mark only the first three presented answers. So in case the first three similarities are
correct, you score 3 marks out 3 while in case the first three similarities are wrong but the last three are
correct, you score 0 because they mark the first three answers presented.

Consider the example of our sample paper UACE P530/1 2017.

41. Nigel G.P.O. et al (1990); Biology Science, 3rd Edition, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge
page 311-312
(a)
(i) Respire to release carbon dioxide to the atmosphere
Decomposition of their excreta and remains release carbon compounds which are absorbed by plants
Through feeding, carbon in form of organic compounds is obtained from producers and transferred to
consumers
(ii) Fix carbon dioxide during photosynthesis
(b)Some plant parts are not edible.
Some plants are not accessible e.g. roots, stems
Some plant parts are not easily digested due to presence of hard cellulose material. Some carbon is lost
as carbon dioxide during respiration.
Some plants or parts die before being eaten
Herbivores are selective in their feeding so do not eat some plants.

42. Toole, G. and Toole,S, (1999). New Understanding Biology for Advanced Level, 4th Edition, UK:
Nelson Thornes page 286 (Modified question)
(a) Similarities:
Increase in temperature causes both rates to increase up to the peak.
Temperature beyond (45-50) leads to a decrease in both rates.
Both have same peaks at 52oC and 60o C.

Kato Maxmillian 40 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

Differences
Rate of photosynthesis attains the peak at a lower temperature.
Beyond 45oC increase in temperature causes a more rapid decrease in the rate of photosynthesis.
Rate of photosynthesis is higher than that of respiration.
Beyond 52oC, rate of transpiration is higher.
Rate of photosynthesis starts to increase at a lower temperature.

(b) Increase in temperature increases enzymes activity for both.

The curve for respiration is more gradual because photosynthetic enzymes are more sensitive to temper-
ature changes than respiratory enzymes.
Both curves attain their peak at maximum enzyme activity.
Beyond the peak, both rates decrease due to denaturation of enzymes.
Further increase in temperature leads to increased transpiration which causes closure of stomata or re-
duces uptake of carbon dioxide and oxygen reducing photosynthesis more than respiration.

43. Clegg, C.J. and Mackean. D.G, (2000). Advanced Biology Principles and Applications. 2nd Edition,
London: Hodder Education page 448-449
(a) Transmit information between neurons.
Pass impulses in one direction.
Increases the sensitivity of the nervous system through amplification of weak stimuli. Filter out low level
stimuli.
Enables integration of information from different parts.
Acts as a switch/junction that allows nerve impulses pass along one of the several discrete pathways.
Allows adaptation to intense stimuli.
Aids in learning and memory.

(b) (i) Arrival of an impulse leads to opening of calcium ion channels. So calcium ions diffuse into the
presynaptic knob from the synaptic cleft.

Kato Maxmillian 41 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(ii) Calcium ions induce vesicles containing the transmitter substance to fuse with the presynaptic mem-
brane and release the transmitter substance into the synaptic cleft. The transmitter substance diffuses
across the synaptic cleft and binds with a specific receptor on the post-synaptic neurone causing opening
of the sodium ion channels.
(c) Cholinesterase hydrolyses acetylcholine so as to prevent continuous firing of impulses.

44. Toole, G. and Toole,S, (1999). New Understanding Biology for Advanced Level, 4th Edition, UK:
Nelson Thornes page 260
(a) A-Pest: Because it is more abundant initially.
B-Control agent: because it initially begins with minimal numbers.
(b) The high population of the pest leads to a rapid increase in the pollution of the control agent because
there is plenty of food.
The population of the pest organism decreases due to predation by control agent. The population of the
control agent then decreases because of food shortage due to reduction in pest population.
The population of both organisms stabilizes due to a dynamic equilibrium between them being estab-
lished.
(c) The control agent would die due to lack of food or may also turn to feed on some non-target organ-
isms in the environment.
45. Roberts, M.B.V, (1986). Biology: A functional approach, 4th edition, Kong Thornes page 53-54
(a) Increase in solute potential (more negative) of the cell causes water to enter it by osmosis and the cell
becomes turgid.
Decrease in solute potential (less negative) causes the cell to lose water by osmosis thereby becoming
plasmolysed/flaccid.
46. Toole, G. and Toole,S, (1999). New Understanding Biology for Advanced Level, 4th Edition, UK:
Nelson Thornes page 442 (Modified question)
(i) Percentage saturation increases rapidly reaching maximum saturation at low oxygen partial pressure.
(ii) Percentage saturation increases gradually reaching maximum saturation at higher oxygen partial
pressure.
b) Carp
Lives in a habitat of low oxygen partial pressure as a result of decomposition by aerobic bacteria, so its
haemoglobin has a higher affinity for oxygen in order to pick up oxygen from a limited oxygen environ-
ment.

Kato Maxmillian 42 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

Mackerel
Lives where there is sufficient oxygen supply as it leaves near the surface of sea water. Its haemoglobin
has a lowered affinity in order to release oxygen readily to the active tissues.

Every structured question tests three abilities of the brain;

(i) Recall (knowledge)
(ii) Comprehension.
(iii) Application.
These are tested using certain action verbs which dictate the task of the brain in order to qualify for the
marks.
An action to be taken (verb) and the emphasis/task are most important to answer any section B question
in paper 1.
(i) Recall (Knowledge) questions.
These are questions that do not require any reasoning but just remembering. There is no reasoning to get
the answer. You either remember on not. They are the type of questions where you can get the answer
directly from the textbook.
The recall/knowledge questions have the following action verbs.
Define, what is, what is meant by, give, state, name, list.
Define/what is
Give the meaning of.
What is meant by
Give the meaning of plus some relevant comment of on the terms used in the definition. Name
Write the full name. Do not abbreviate e.g. write oxygen not O2 , Deoxyribonucleic acid not DNA.

Give/State/list
Restrictions
If the question requires 3 answers, marking will only look for the first 3. E.g. UACE P530/1 2017
question 45b(ii)

(ii) Comprehension questions.

These are questions that require reasoning based on some knowledge to get the answer. You may even
read the textbook and find the answer directly written.
The compression questions have the following action verbs;
Describe/Give an account of (structure/process), explain/account for, compare, differentiate, distinguish

Kato Maxmillian 43 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

and relate.

1. Describe/Give an account of
Mark out the main points with the aid of diagrams where appropriate.
The word describe may be used in: a particular situation or phenomenon; a particular experiment; or
graphical situations to describe their nature.
In particular phenomenon: - in this case, a candidate is expected to state in words all the observations
made and use diagrams where appropriate. For the cases where processes are asked, a candidate is
expected to be systematic i.e. state the main points in a stepwise manner. For example; UACE P530/1
2017 question 43b(ii)
2. Explain/Account for
- State what is and how or why
- Explain the role; first state the role. .(UACE P530/1 2017 question 41(a),43c
- Explain the changes; state the change first.(UACE P530/1 2017 question 43b(ii)
- Explain the factors; first state the factors.
- Explain the relationship; first state the relationship.
- Explain the position; first state the position. UACE P530/1 2012 question 45

3. Comment
Using your own words, bring out the facts shown on the graph.

4. Distinguish
in case the marks allocated are (1 or 2), Give only one main point. Use the word whereas or while.
In case the marks allocated are more than 2, use a table to give the differences.

5. Relate:
Tell how one relates with another.

6. Compare
-Similarity (in both or both)

E.g. UACE P530/1 2017 question 45c

Kato Maxmillian 44 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

7. Suggest
Give an answer in your words according to the context.
E.g. UACE P530/1 2017 question 44c

NB: Comprehension questions are usually biological processes

You should pay attention the following about biological processes;
1. Describe
Bring out the stages in their logical natural order.

2. The control/regulation process

Enzyme, hormones, nervous, negative feedback.

3. Comparison between alternative processes.

4. Terminologies.

5. Movement of substance.
- Absorption
- Exchange
- Axoplasm.
- Nephrone.
- Name.
- Direction.
- Process.

NB
For all hormones;
-where it is produced (source)
-when it is produced. (what triggers its secretion)
-where it goes. (target organ)
-what it does. (effect)
Emphasize the biological terms.

Kato Maxmillian 45 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(iii) Application questions.

This involves getting facts or principles and putting them to use in a given situation.
The application questions are those you will find involving;
calculations, interpretation of data and graphs.
Calculations
Calculations marks
1. Correct formula used.
2. Correct substitution.
3. Final answer with correct units.
For example, UACE P530/1 2017 question 45(b)

Interpretation of data and graphs

For example, UACE P530/1 2017 question 42, 44 and 46

Compare/Describe/explain the;
- Shape of the graph. E.g. UACE P530/1 2017 question 42 (b)
- Change/trend/pattern. E.g. UACE P530/1 2017 question 45(b), 44(b)
- Effect. E.g. UACE P530/1 2017 question 42 (a)
- Relationship. E.g. UACE P530/1 2013 question 45 (a)
- Distribution. E.g. UACE P530/1 2000 question 45
Every year has at least one graph. The A-level Biology study guide for Paper 2 has a detailed guidance
about the skills of handling data analysis. The same skills are required in paper one.
Balancing the branches of biology
Section B questions (structured questions) are also set in such a way that they are distributed in the fol-
lowing branches of biology
(i) Animal biology (Zoology)
(ii) Plant biology (Botany)
(iii) Both Plant and Animal Biology
(iv) Universal biology (the biology concepts that cut across all living things) Check table 6 to see how
the 40 objectives are distributed in the different branches of biology.

Kato Maxmillian 46 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

The section B questions (structured questions) are spread uniformly in all the 6 main blocks. At least
one question is set from each block each year. This can be confirmed by taking a look at table 7.

Kato Maxmillian 47 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

Table 7

Kato Maxmillian 48 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

Kato Maxmillian 49 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

Time management Time management is very crucial during the time of writing an exam.
First subtract off the time for praying, planning before starting and proof reading (editing) your answers
before they invigilators command you to stop writing. Since section A carries 40% of the total marks,
then give 40% of the remaining time to section A. Then calculate the average time to be spent per
objective question.
Remember that application questions will require more time followed by comprehension questions then
lastly recall questions. So it means that the recall questions should require less than the average time.
And 60% of the remaining time to section B.
Hand writing
Write well so that your answers are easier to be read by anyone marking.

Kato Maxmillian 50 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

4 ORGANISATION IN CELLS AND ORGANISMS

4.1 Cell structure and cell functioning

1. Which part of a phospholipid molecule makes up most of the thickness of cell surface membrane?

A. Glycerol C. Hydrocarbon chain

B. Hydrophilic head D. Phosphate groups

2. The organelles that provide part of the skeleton of a cell are the.

A. Centrioles C. Golgi apparatus

B. Endoplasmic reticulum D. Ribosomes

3. Which of the following cell organelles is associated with the final stage of most cell secretions?

A. Centrioles C. Golgi apparatus

B. Endoplasmic reticulum D. Ribosomes

Kato Maxmillian 51 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

4. The resolving power of a microscope is the.

A. ability of the microscope to distinguish fine detail.
B. clarity of the image formed from the microscope.
C. number of times the image is magnified by the objective lens.
D. power of the microscope to focus very small objects.

5. Which of the following cell organelles is associated with the final stage of most cell secretions?

A. Smooth endoplasmic reticulum

C. Ribosome
B. Rough endoplasmic reticulum
D. Golgi apparatus

6. What are the most abundant molecules in the cell surface membrane of plants?

A. Cholelestrol. B. glycoplipids. C. Phospholipids. D. proteins.

7. Which one of the following plastids is mostly important in clover seeds?

A. Amyloplasts B. Chloroplasts C. Oleoplasts D. Proteoplasts

8. Which one of the following cell structures can be can be seen with a light microscope?

A. mitochondrion. B. Ribosome. C Smooth ER. D. Rough ER.

9. The use of electrons as a source of radiation in the electron microscope allows high resolution to

be achieved because electrons.

A. are negatively charged. C. have a very short wavelength.

B. can be focused using electromagnets. D. travel at a speed of light.

10. Which one of the following is not present in plant cells?

A. Golgi body B. Microtubule C. Nucleus D. Lysosome

Kato Maxmillian 52 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

11. Which one following does not always form part of a bacterium cell?

A. Cell wall B. Flagellum C. Cytoplasm D. Ribosome

12. Which of the following structures are absent in animal cells?

A. Cell wall, chloroplast, central vacuole C. Lysosome, centrioles, cell wall

B. Cell wall, centriole, chloroplast D. Lysosome, microbodies, centrioles

13. A phospholipid in the plasma membrane consist of.......

A. phosphate, fat, and oil. C. phosphoric acid, fats, and oil.

B. phosphoric acid, glycerol, fatty acid. D. phosphate, glycerol, fatty acid.

14. Which one of the following functions of membranes is only carried out by intracellular

membranes?
A. facilitate transmission of nerve impulses.
B. allows cells to recognise others.
C. control of material entry and exit.
D. provide separate compartment, isolating different chemical reactions.

15. Which one of the following structures is found in animals cells but not plant cells.

A. Cell surface membrane. C. Golgi body.

B. Centriole. D. Chloroplasts.

16. The pigment molecules of a chloroplast are located within the.

A. thylakoid membrane C. intra thylakoid space

B. inner membrane D. space between inner and outer membrane

17. From which cell organelle are nucleic acids absent?

A. Chloroplast B. Golgi complex C. Mitochondrion D. Ribosome

Kato Maxmillian 53 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

18. The resolving power of a microscope is its ability to..............

A. contrast. C. see detail.

B. reduce light interference. D. magnify.

19. The organelle is responsible for replenishing the plasma membrane is...........

A. rough endoplasmic reticulum. C. mitochondrion.

B. golgi body. D. vacuole.

20. Which characteristic must a membrane protein have in order to be intrinsic?

A. A pore in the centre of the protein C. An associated carbohydrate

B. Non polar hydrophobic regions D. An associated lipid

21. The mineral element attached to the pophyrin ring of the chlorophyll molecule is

A. copper B. magnesium C. manganese D. iron

22. Which one of the following is NOT a Porphyrin?

A. Haemoglobin B. Chlorophyll C. Cytochrome D. Riboflavin

23. Which one of the following theories best explains how double membrane organelles came to exist

in eukaryotes?

A.Endosymbiosis B. Endometriosis C. Endoparasitism D. Endocytosis

24. Which one of the following is not part of the protoplast?

A. chloroplast B. glycogen C. starch D. mitochondria

25. The cells of higher plants lack the following

A. dictyosome and lysosome C. centriole and lysosome

B. plastids and centrioles D. plasmodesmata and Golgi body

Kato Maxmillian 54 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

26. The organelle responsible for inter cellular transportation of proteins is called.

A. dictosome C. microfilaments
B. rough endoplasmic reticulum D. microtubules

27. The role played by chromatophore pigments in the survival of an organism is.
A. cause rapid muscle contraction hence escaping enemies.
B. increase oxygen delivery to the contracting muscles.
C. cause organisms colour change hence camouflage.
D. eliminate carbon dioxide from the respiring tissues to increase pH.

28. When a lignin sensitive stain was applied the stain was positive in the tracheid but not the sieve

tubes because.

A. sieve tubes are less lignified than tracheids

B. tracheids have lignin in the lumen
C. the perforated walls of xylem tissue are lignified
D. sieve tubes have partially lignified sieve plates

29. What is the effect of a ruptured lysosome?

A. autolysis B. plasmolysis C. crenation D. haemolysis

30. Identify the statement that is not correct about cyanobacteria.

A. it is photosynthetic C. it is a prokaryote
B. its cell wall is made of cellulose D. it is not multicellular

31. One disadvantage of the multicellular state is that individual cells are

A. are always small in size. C. become less functional.

B. lose independence. D. become less specialised.

Kato Maxmillian 55 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

32. Which of the following organelles plays the most significant role in the meristematic cells?

A. lysosomes B. dictyosome C. centriole D. ribosome

33. The organelle that manufactures the ribosomes is

A. endoplasmic reticulum C. golgi apparatus

B. nucleolus D. rough endoplasmic reticulum

34. The lysosome is a suicide organelle because

A. it contains hydrolytic enzymes C. it is responsible for autolysis

B. it can destroy other damaged cells D. it plays a role in haemolysis

35. How does the nucleus play a role in heredity?

A. it controls cell division C. directs protein synthesis

B. it has chromosomes D. controls cell activities

36. Identify the group that has organelles that don’t play a transport role in the cell
A. nucleus, dictyosome, ribosome
B. mitochondia, chloroplast, rough endoplasmic reticulum
C. smooth endoplasmic reticulum, chloroplast, golgi body
D. mitochrondia, nucleus, chloroplast

37. Proteins are manufactured in ribosomes and in the;

A. Chromoplasts B. Oleoplasts C. Chloroplasts D. Nucleolus

38. A tissue viewed under a microscope showed numerous lysosomes in the cells. Which one of the

following is the possible cause?

A. Infection. C. Active transport.

B. High rate of internal transport. D. High rate of protein synthesis.

Kato Maxmillian 56 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

39. The cell nucleolus is involved in the;

A. Manufacture of DNA C. Formation of ribosomes

B. Manufacture of RNA D. Duplication of chromosome

40. Which one of the following is not true about centrioles?

A. They are capable of replication
B. They can produce basal bodies
C. They can manufacture spindle apparatus
D. They are found in all living cells.

41. Which one of the following structures possesses abundant smooth endoplasmic reticulum?

A. Adrenal cortex C. Pancreas

B. Salivary gland D. Liver

42. Chromatins are composed of;

A. DNA and nucleoli C. Histones and DNA

B. Nucleoli and Histones D. Nucleoplasm, DNA and Histones

43. Which one of the following roles is associated with smooth endoplasmic reticulum?

A. Protein synthesis C. Transportation of proteins D. Isolation and

B. Production of amino acids transport of lipids and steroids

44. Which one of the following structures separates the sap from the cytoplasm?

A. Plasma membrane B. Tonoplast C. Middle lamella D. Nuclear membrane

45. Cells with important secretory functions have well developed;

A. Mitochondria B. Bicarbonate ions C. Centrioles D. Golgi body

Kato Maxmillian 57 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

46. The following are functions of the cell vacuole, except;

A. Storage of food C. Enlargement of cell membrane

B. Storage of wastes D. Storage of some pigments

47. The cell organelle responsible for renewal of the cell membrane is known as;

A. Golgibody C. Endoplasmic reticulum

B. Ribosomes D. Nucleolus

48. Which one is responsible for destroying worn-out organelles in a cell.

A. lysosome C. endoplasmic reticulum.

B. robosome D. mitochondrion

49. The cell wall found outside the membrane of the Nitrosomonas is mainly made up of;

A. Cellulose B. Capsule C. Peptidoglycan D. Phospholipids

50. The pigment molecules of a chloroplast are located within the;

A. Thylakoid membranes C. Intrathylakoid space

B. Inner membrane D. Intermembrane space

51. Cell membranes are made up primarily of

A. phospholipids and glycogen C. peptidoglycan and nucleic acids

B. Carbohydrates and protein D. proteins and phospholipids

52. Rapid transport of materials within the cytoplasm of a cell is associated with the.
A. presence of an extensive endoplasmic reticulum
B. numerous ribosomes
C. absence of a cell wall
D. presence of spindle fibres in the dividing cell

Kato Maxmillian 58 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

53. Which one of the following is unique to prokaryotic organisms.

A. cell membrane B. peptidoglycan C. ribosomes D. phospholipids

54. Which one set of cellular structures is lacking in prokaryotes?

A. cell wall, plasma membrane, vacuole C. nucleus, endoplasmic reticulum, vacuoles

B. cell wall, chlorophyll, nucleus D. nucleic acids, golgi body, vacuole

55. Cells which lack a membrane to separate the cytoplasm from nuclear material are called

A. imperfect cells B. viruses C. eukaryotic cells D. prokaryotic cells

56. In prokaryotes, respiration occurs in structures called.

A. golgi bodies B. chloroplasts C. mesosomes D. mitochondria

57. What would be the effect on a cell with punctured lysosome? The cell would under go

A. Plasmolysis B. autolysis C. crenation D. haemolysis

58. Chromatophores are

A. reproductive cells
B. fat containing cells
C. catrotenoid containing cells
D. Pigment containing cells in certain vertebrates

59. Which of the following is the function of the golgi apparatus?

A. synthesis of secretory substances C. sites for respiratory metabolism

B. protein synthesis D. intracellular digestion

Kato Maxmillian 59 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

60. Which of the following chemicals of life are absent in the plasma membrane?

A. Nucleic acid B. proteins C. carbohydrates D. lipids

61. Which one of the following is not true about centrioles?

A. They are capable of replication C. They can manufacture spindle apparatus

B. They can produce basal bodies D. They are found in all living cells.

62. The cell organelle responsible for renewal of the cell membrane is called

A. Golgibody C. Endoplasmic reticulum

B. Ribosome D. Nucleolus

63. The tails of the phospholipids like in the centre of the cell membrane due to their being

A. Polar B. hydrophobic C. light D. hydrophilic

64. Transport of materials within the cytoplasm of a cell is associated with the

A. Presence of an extensive endoplasmic reticulum

B. Numerous ribosomes
C. Absence of a cell wall
D. Presence of spindle fibres in the diving cell

65. One of the following is not a function of cartilage

A. a cushion between bones C. reduction of friction

B. metabolic of friction D. precursor of bones

66. Which of the following is a function of the golgi body in a cell.

A. secreting substances out of the cells C. Assembly of raw materials for section
B. synthesizing proteins D. synthesizing carbohydrate

Kato Maxmillian 60 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

67. Which type of molecule form a bilayer with in the cell membrane?

A. carbohydrate B. lipid C. plasmodium D. protein

68. Which one of the following is the correct arrangement of microtubules in a cross section of a

flagellum.

A. 9 + 0 B. 9 + 4 C. 9 + 2 D. 9 + 1

69. Which one of the following features would be prominent in mucus secreting cells?

A. Large nucleus and dense matrix

B. numerous rough endoplasmic reticulum and Golgi body
C. Numerous mitochondria and lysosomes
D. Dense matrix and smooth endoplasmic reticulum

70. The tails of the phospholipids lie in the centre of the cell membrane due to their being.

A. light B. hydrophilic C. polar D. hydrophobic

71. Which one of the following is the main function of the golgi apparatus in a living cell?

A. Destruction of worn out cell organelles C. synthesis of proteins

B. synthesis of cell wall component D. intracellular transport

72. In cells, protein destined for secretion are formed on the

A. free ribosomes in the cytosol. C. ribosomes in the chloroplast.

B. ribosomes in the endoplasmic reticulum. D. Golgi apparatus.

73. From which cell organelle are nucleic acids absent?

A. chloroplast B. golgi apparatus C. mitochondrion D. ribosome

Kato Maxmillian 61 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

74. Which part of a phospholipid molecule makes up most of the thickness of cell surface membrane?

A. glycerol B. hydrophilic head C. hydrocarbon chains D. phosphate group

75. Which characteristic must a membrane protein have in order to be intrinsic?

A. A pore in the center of the protein C. An associated carbohydrate

B. Non polar hydrophobic regions D. An associated lipid

76. A cell has a high density of rough endoplasmic reticulum in its cytoplasm. Which other organelle

can be expected to occur in large numbers in this cell?

A. chloroplasts B. microvilli C. golgi apparatus D. nuclei

77. Which of the following would most readily move across a selectively permeable membrane?

A. small uncharged polar molecules C. large uncharged polar molecules

B. protein molecule D. uncharged fat soluble molecules

78. Tha actual diameter of a cell organelle which measures 0.4mm at magnification of X 400 is

A. 0.01µm B. 0.1µm C. 1.0µm D. 0.001µm

79. In a unicellular organisms the function performed by organs and systems in multicellular

organisms are performed by:

A. Nucleus B. Cell membrane C. Contractile vacuole D. Organelles

80. The basal body of cilia and flagella contain a.

A. 9+2 pattern of arrangement of micro tubula

B. 9+0 pattern of arrangement of micro tubula
C. 7+2 pattern of arrangement of micro tubula
D. 9+3 pattern of arrangement of micro tubula

Kato Maxmillian 62 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

81. Which of the following occurs in both plant and animal cells?

A. Locomotion C. Manufacture of food

B. Respiration D. Loading and unloading of food

82. The organelle responsible for the renewal of the cell membrane is known as

A. golgi body C. Endoplasmic reticulum

B. Fibosomes D. Nucleous.

83. Which one of the following statements best describes prokaryotic cells?

A. contain chromosomes. C. lack interior components.

B. possesses membrane bound organelles D. lack DNA.

84. In Eukaryotes

A. the DNA is circular and lies in the cytoplasm.

B. 70s ribosomes exist.
C. the cell walls are rigid and contain polysaccharide with amino acids.
D. flagella have a 9 + 2 arrangement of microtubules.

85. Which of the following organelles are not double bound (Envelope-bound).

A. mitochondria B. vacuoles C. chloroplasts D. nuclei

86. In a living cell, respiratory enzymes are associated with

A. endoplasmic reticula C. ribosomes

B. mitochondria D. golgi body

87. What role is not associated with endoplasmic reticulum?

A. site for proteins synthesis

B. isolation and transportation of protein synthesized
C. synthesis and transport of lipids and steroids
D. production of amino acids.

Kato Maxmillian 63 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

88. Which of the following vacuoles is not found in animal cells?

A. Autophagic vacuoles C. Sap vacuoles

B. Phagocytic vaculoes D. Food vacuoles

89. Which one of the following pairs of cells has closely similar walls?

Endodermis and phellem C. Endodermis and pericycle

B. Phellem and phellogen D. Endodermis and phellogen

90. The cell organelle lacking elaborate internal structure is the;

A. Mitochondrion B. lysosome C. centriole D. endoplasmic

91. Cells are limited to small size inorder to

A. keep their volume down.
B. allow movement of material in and out of the cells.
C. cut down energy requirements.
D. enable the nucleus control the cell effectively.

92. The biological role of protein in cells depends on the;

A. sequence of amino acids in them

B. pattern of folding of the amino acids
C. other protein molecules with which it is associated.
D. three dimensional shape

93. The eukaryotic nucleus houses all the following except the

A. RNA C. Nucleolus
B. DNA D. Endoplasmic reticulum

94. Which structure contributes to support and movement within a cell?

A. Crista B. Cell wall C. Ribosome D. Microfilament

Kato Maxmillian 64 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

95. The organelle responsible for modifying and packaging.

A. Nucleus B. Lysosome C. Golgi apparatus D. Vesicles

96. In biological membranes, integral proteins and lipids interact mainly by.

A. Covalent bond C. Hydrogen and electrostatic bond

B. Both hydrophilic and covalent bond D. Both covalent and hydrogen bonds

97. Which of the subcellular component is involved in the formation of ATP

A. Nucleus B. Plasma membrane C. mitochondrion D. Golgi apparatus

98. Which of the following organelle is a double membraned organelle?

A. Ribosome B. Peroxisome C. Mitochondrion D. Lysosome

99. Which of the following organelle is a plastid?

A. Ribosome B. Chloroplast C. Lysosome. D. Mitochondrion

100. A probable function of the endoplasmic reticulum is to

A. Control the entry and exit materials in cells

B. Facilitate intracellular transport of materials
C. Act as a template in protein synthesis
D. Enable substance diffuse against concentration gradient

101. The main distinguishing character of a eukaryotic cell is

A. Membrane organelles C. Presence of nucleus

B. Lack of nuclear membrane D. Presence of DNA double strands

Kato Maxmillian 65 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

102. Which of the following organelles would most likely be abundant in the tail of a tadpole at a time

of its reabsorption during metamorphosis?

A. Centrioles C. Golgi apparatus

B. Lysosomes D. Endoplasmic reticulum

103. The flagellum and skeletal muscle are structurally similar in that they both have

A. Microtubules C. A pattern of 9 + 2 microtubules

B. Actin and myosin tubules D. Light and dark bands

104. Which one of the following cell organelles would be most active at sites where substances move

against diffusion gradient?

A. Ribosomes B. Lysosomes C.Mitochondria D. Golgi bodies

105. Which part of an Amoeba is concerned with active intake of water?

A. Ectoplasm C. Pseudopodia
B. Contractile vacuole D. Cell membrane

106. Which of the following does not always form part of a bacterium cell?

A. Cell wall B. Flagellum C. Cytoplasm D. Ribosomes

107. Which of the following features would be prominent in mucus secreting cells?

A. Large nucleus and dense matrix

B. Numerous rough endoplasmic reticulum and Golgi body
C. Numerous mitochondria and lysosomes
D. Dense matrix and smooth endoplasmic reticulum

108. Which one of the following cell organelles is associated with final stage of most cell secretions?

A. Smooth endoplasmic reticulum C. Ribosome

B. Rough endoplasmic reticulum D. Golgi apparatus

Kato Maxmillian 66 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

109. Which one of the following is a function of the Golgi body in a cell?

A. Secreting substances out of the cells

B. Synthesizing proteins
C. Assembling of raw materials for secretion
D. Synthesizing carbohydrates

110. Which one of the following structures plays an important role in the formation of primary cell

walls?

A. Golgi body C. Rough endoplasmic reticulum

B. Lysosome D.Ribosomes

111. Which of the following organelles would be most abundant at the site where some embryonic

tissues are being discarded?

A. Mitochondria B. Ribosomes C. Golgi apparatus D. Lysosomes

112. The function of the nucleoli in a cell is to form

A. Nuclear membrane C. The spindle during nuclear division

B. Ribosomes D. Centrioles

113. Growth in size of a single cell is limited by

A. Cytoplasm B. Nucleus C. Cell vacuole D. Cell membrane

114. Large steroid molecules diffuse quckly through cell surface membranes suggesting that the

membranes.

A. consist of non - polar molecules. C. are freely permeable.

B. are semi permeable D. are made of polysaccharides

Kato Maxmillian 67 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

115. A tissue viewed under a microscope showed numerous lysosomes in the cells. Which one of the

following is a possible cause?

A. Active transport C. High rate of internal transport

B. Infection D. High rate of protein synthesis

STRUCTURED QUESTIONS

116. The figure shows the fluid-mosaic of the cell membrane structure.

(a) Name the molecules labelled A and B (1 mark)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Suggest two properties that drug should possess if they are to enter acell rapidly. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Explain why an electron microscope is used in studying cell structure. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

117. a) What is meant by a semi permeable membrane? (2 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Proteins and cholesterols are among the components of the cell membrane state any two
importance of these compnents.
i) Proteins, (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 68 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Cholesterols, towards the membrane (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
c) Outline any four advantages of some organelles, being membrane-bound. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
d) The cytoplasmic composition of the cells is mainly made up of colloidal solution.

i) Define a colloidal solution (2 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
ii) State one property of colloids. (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

118. a) With aid of a well labeled diagram describe the action of a lysosome. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
b) Outline four functions of the lysosome inside cells of living organisms. (4 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

119. (a) State two important differences which can be recognized under the light microscope between
plant and animal cells. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 69 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(b) (i) Name the membrane-bounded channels, which form a network and almost fill the
cytoplasm of most cells and are only recognizable under the electron microscope. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii)What are the ”small granules” associated with the channels mentioned in b(i) above and what
is their function? (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c)(i) Give any four differences between eukaryotic and prokaryotic cells. (4 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

120. The diagram shows part of the membrane containing a channel protein

(a) Identify the parts labelled. (1.5 marks)

A,
.............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
B,
.............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
C
.............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 70 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(b) For each of the following, state whether the components are hydrophillic or hydrophobic.
(i) A; (1 mark)
.............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) B; (1 marks)
.............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(iii) darkly shaded part of the protein. (1 marks)
.............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(iv) Lightly shaded part of the protein. (1 mark)
.............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Explain how ions would move through the channel protein. (1 mark)
.............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(d) State two features that the channnel protein and carrier protein have in common. (2 marks)
.............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(e) State one structural difference between channel and carrier proteins. (1 mark)
.............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

121. The diagram below shows a structure of a bacterial cell as viwed using an electron microscope.

Kato Maxmillian 71 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(a) Name parts labelled A,B, and C. (1.5 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Give two reasons why viruses are an exception to the cell theory. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

122. The diagram below shows part of a cell membrane structure.

(a) Complete the table by writing the letter from the diagram which refers to each part of the
membrane. (2.5 marks)

Part of the membrane Letter

Channel protein
Contains only the elemnts Hydrogen and Carbon.
A glycocalyx
A trans membrane protein
Contains a glycerol and a phosphate

(b) Explain why the structure of a membrane is described as fluid mosaic. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 72 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(c) What should be the nature of substances that may move across the cell membrane

(i) With ease? (1 mark)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) With difficulty. (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(d) What are functions of glycocalyx in the plasma membrane? (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

123. The diagram below represents a phosholipid molecule.

(a) (i) Name parts labeled A, B and C. (3 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Explain how the phospholipid molecules form a double layer in the cell membrane.(2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Cell membranes also contain protein molecules. Give two function of these protein molecules.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 73 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

124. Distinguish between the following pairs of terms.

(a) Magnification and resolution. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Light microscope and electron microscope. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Nucleus and nucleolus (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(d) membrane and envelope. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(e)Smooth ER and rough ER. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(d) Prokaryote and eukaryote. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 74 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

125. The figure below shows a diagram based on an electron micrograph of a secretory cell in the
pancrease.This type of cell is specialised for scecreting proteins. The arrows show the route taken
by the protein molecule.

(a) Describe briefly what is happening at each of the stages;

A; (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
B; (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
C; (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
D; (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Name one molecule or structure which leaves the nucleus by route E. (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 75 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(c) Through which structure must the molecule or the structure you have named in (b) above pass
to get through the nuclear envelope. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
(d) Name the molecule which leaves the mitochondrion in order to provide energy for this cell.
..............................................................................................................................................................

4.2 Cell physiology

1. Which of the following does not contribute to the selective permeability of a biological

membrane?
A. Specificity of the carrier proteins in the membrane.
B. Selectivity of the channel proteins in the membranes.

Kato Maxmillian 76 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

C. Hydrogen bond formation between water and phosphate groups.

D. Hydrophobic barrier of the phospholipids bilayer.

2. Where are the carbohydrates portions of glycolipids and glycoproteins in the cell surface

membranes?
A. the inside and outside surfaces of membranes.
B. the inside surface of the membrane.
C. the interior of the membrane.
D. the outside surface of the membrane.

3. Movement of ions and large polar molecules across the plasma membrane is repelled by

A. cholesterol B. phospholipids C. glycolipid D. protein channel

4. The two cells A and B have water potentials of -2000kpa and -1000kPa respectively. Which of

the following statements is true about cells?

A. Cell A has higher concentration of water molecules than cell B
B. Cell A has a higher solute potential than cell B
C. There is a net movement of water from cell A to cell B
D. Cell A has a less solute concentration than cell B

5. Which one of the following changes in a cell would increase its water potential?

A. Decrease in turgor pressure C. Decrease in osmotic potential

B. Increase in solute potential D. Increase in pressure potential

6. The cell wall pressure equals the osmotic potential of a cell.

A. When the diffusion pressure deficit is zero C. At complete plasmolysis

B. At incipient plasmolysis D. At partial turgor

7. Which of the following is wrong about the plasmolysed cell.

A. there is hardly any contact between protoplast and cell wall
B. the wall pressure is zero
C. the water potential is very negative
D. the osmotic pressure is minimum

Kato Maxmillian 77 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

8. Which one of the following enters plant cells by active transport?

A. Carbon dioxide C. Oxygen

B. Nitrate ions D. Water

9. Osmosis is in a way a form of diffusion because.

A. water flows across a semi permeable C. water flows along a concentration gradient
membrane D. it is an active process
B. it is a passive process

10. The pressure and osmotic potential of a cell are equal when

A. the cell is fully plasmolysed C. water potential is zero

B. the cell is at incipient plasmolysis D. the hydrostatic pressure is low

11. Which one of the following is true about turgid cells?

A. Water potential is less negative
B. Water potential equals to solute potential
C. Solute potential equals but opposite to pressure potential
D. Pressure potential is zero.

12. Which one of the following changes brings about the opening of the stomata plant leaves?
A. Fall of intercellular space PH
B. Synthesis of starch
C. Rise in intercellular space carbon dioxide level
D. Increase in guard cell pressure potential

13. Which of the following processes is employed in the transport of sugars in a flowering plant?

A. translocation B. osmosis C. active transport D. diffusion

14. Which one of the following is true?

A. Wilting involves shrinkage of the protoplast away from the cell wall
B. Plasmolysis is due to evaporation of water

Kato Maxmillian 78 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

C. Wilting occurs due to concentration of water

D. Wilting involves shrinkage of the entire cell.

15. The magnitude of lowering the tendency of water to leave a solution is known as;

A. Osmotic potential C. Water potential

B. Pressure potential D. Osmotic pressure

16. A solution which caused cells immersed in it to plasmolyse is described as

A. Isotonic B. super isotonic C. hypotonic D. hypertonic

17. The pressure which tends to force water out of a cell is called

A. osmotic potential C. pressure potential

B. water potential D. turgor pressure

18. Which of the following processes move materials against concentration gradients?

A. Active transport and facilitated diffusion C. Active transport and passive diffusion
B. Active transport and osmosis D. Active transport only

19. Which one of the following water relations is not true about a plasmolysed plant cell?
A. Turgor pressure is zero
B. pressure potential is equal to asmotic potential of sap
C. Pressure potential is zero
D. Water potential of the sap is equal to its osmotic potential

20. Which one of the following changes brings about opening of stomata in plant leaves?
A. fall in the PH of the intercellular spaces.
B. synthesis of starch.
C. rise in levels of carbon dioxide in the intercellular spaces.
D. conversion of starch to sugar.

Kato Maxmillian 79 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

21. The osmotic pressure of a turgid cell is equal to

A. The osmotic pressure of the surrounding medium
B. its Turgor pressure
C. The osmotic pressure of its cell content
D. The diffusion pressure deficit (DPP) of the surrounding medium

22. Which one of the following conditions will not apply to a plant cell placed in a hypertonic

solution?
A. the wall pressure of the cell will decrease
B. the cell becomes flaccid
C. the osmotic pressure of the cell increases
D. the suction pressure of the cell decreases

23. Cells that are turgid have a;

A. Water potential which is less negative.
B. Water potential which is equal to the solute potential.
C. Solute potential which is equal but opposite pressure potential
D. Pressure potential which is zero.

24. The figure below shows a system of two cells separated by a semi-permeable membrane.

Which of the following statements is correct about the movement of water in the sysytem?
A. water moves out of both cells A and B
B. water moves from cell B to cell A
C. there is no net movement of water between the cells
D. water moves from cell A to cell B.

Kato Maxmillian 80 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

STRUCTURED QUESTIONS.

25. (a) Define the following terms

(i) Osmosis (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Osmotic potential (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(iii) Active transport (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Outline two similarities and two differences between active transport and facilitated diffusion.
Similarities (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
Differences (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

26. (a)(i) Distinguish between water potential and solute potential. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Explain why the water potential in roots is higher than the water potential in leaves in plants.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 81 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Describe how;
(i) the root pressure in roots contributes to transport of water in plants. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) structure of cells of the endodermis is adapted for their role of transport of water in plants.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

27. Figure below shows two guard cells A, and A1 with adjacent cells B,B1 , C, C1 and C2 . The values
of the solute potentials and pressure potentials shown in cells A and B are exactly the same as
those for cells A1 and B1 respectively. Similarity, the water potential indicated in cell C is the
same as that in cell C1 and C2 . Use the figure to answer questions that follow.

(a) (i) Calculate the water potential of cells A and B. (02marks)

Cell A
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
Cell B
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 82 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) (i) Show by means of arrows the net movement of water in the seven cells.
Explain why the net movement of water in the cells is as you have indicated in (a)(ii) (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) What would be the effect of net movement of water indicated in (a)(ii) to guard cells A and
A1 ? (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

28. (a) Explain how changes in the solute potential of a cell affects its turgidity. (04marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b). A plant with a solute potential of -1240kpa and a pressure potential of 350kpa was immersed
in a sucrose solution whose water potential was -530kpa.
(i) Calculate the water potential gradient between the cell and the sucrose solution. (03marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii). State the direction in which water flows. (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Outline the difference between plasmolysis and wilting. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 83 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................

29. a) What is meant by water potential of a plant cell? (2 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
b) Explain why all solutions have negative values of water potential. (4 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

30. a) Define the term osmotic potential (1 mark)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
b ) Draw a sketch graph to show the changes in solute potential, water potential and pressure
potential of the plant cell, when inserted in a hypertonic solution. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
ii) Explain the changes in the potentials, as shown by the drawn sketch graph (4 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 84 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................

31. (a) What is meant by water potential of a plant cell?. (2 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) A fully urgid plant cell was placed in a hypertonic sugar solution and left until it was fully
flaccid. Sketch on Figure 4, curve to show the following pressure changes within the cell during
times of the experiment.
(i) Curve A.- changes in water potential of the cell.
(ii) Curve B - changes in osmotic potential if the cell sap.
(iii) Curve C- chnages in pressure potential.

Kato Maxmillian 85 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(c) Outline three ways of varifying that active uptake of particular ions is occuring in a plant
growing in a culture solution. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(d) State the importance of active transport in guard cells. (3 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

32. (a) State the role of cell membranes. ( 4 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Why is transport across cell membranes necessary? (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Give three differences between active transport and diffusion. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(d) Give two examples of processes in plants that require active transport. (0.5 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 86 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

33. The graph below shows the effect of concentration on three transport processes .

(a) With reference to the graphs, state what the three graphs have in common. (2 marks)
...............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Explain the rates of transport observed when the concentration rates is zero. (3 marks)
...............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) (i) Which one of the process would stop if a respiratory poison was added. (1 marks)
...............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Explain your answer. (4 marks)
...............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(d) Explain the difference between the graphs for diffusion and facilitated diffusion. (4 marks)
...............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 87 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

34. The figure below shows the concentration in mmoldm-3 of two different ions inside a human
redblood cell and in the plasma outside the cell.

(a) Explain why these concentration could not have occurred as a result of diffusion. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Explain how these concentrations could have been achieved. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) If respiration of red blood cells is inhibited, the concentration of potassium ions and sodium
ions inside the cells gradually change until they come into equilbrium with the plasma. Explain
your this observation. (4 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

35. (a) What is meant by water potential. (2 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) i) If the water potential of the root hair cell is -2000kpa and the pressure potential is 400kpa.
Calculate the solute potential of cell, show your working. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 88 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

ii) If the pressure potential of the cell is 500kpa and its solute potential is -4900kpa, What is the
water potential of the cell, show your working. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(iii) What is meant by plasmolysis? (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(iv) Incepient plasmolysis means a point at which plasmolysis is about to happen.At incipient
plasmolysis ;
(i) State the value of pressure potential of the cell. (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Comment on the values of water potential and solute potential of the cell. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(iv) Explain how the potential of the root hair cell would be affected if water movement in the
xylem stops. (4 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

36. The figure below shows two adjascent plant cells A and B . The values of their pressure potentials
and solute potentials are given in kilopascals.

Kato Maxmillian 89 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(a) In which direction would the water flow between the two cells. Give a reason for your answer.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Complete the below to show values of pressure potential and water potential of each of the
cells when equilibrium has been reached. Assume that changes of the values of solute potential
are negligible.

Potential Cell A Cell B

Pressure potential
Water potential

(c) The are then immersed in distilled water and allowed to and allowed to reach equillibrium.
Assume values in the solute potential are negligible.
(i) State the new value of water potential of the cells. (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) State the new values of the pressure potential of the cells. (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................

37. The graph below shows two experiments A and B. In both cases, the uptake of potassium ions
into the roots of young plants was measured. The roots were thoroughly washed in pure water
before the plants were to the solution containing potassium ions.

(a) Describe the results of experiment A over the first 80 minutes of the experiment. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 90 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Describe the results of experiment B. (3marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Explain the results in (b) above. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(d) What is the effect of adding potassium cynide in experiment A. (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(f) Explain the effect of adding potassium cynide in experiment A. (2 mrks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(e) Suggest why the roots were thoroughly washed in pure water before the experiment.(2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 91 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

4.3 Histology

1. Which one of the following is not true about sieve tubes?

A. Have no cytoplasm at maturity C. Have perforated end walls, at maturity

B. Lack of nucleus when still young D. They are metabolically active at maturity.

2. Which one of the following cell types are unlikely to be found in the mammalian intestine?

A. Columnar B. Ciliated C. Stratified D Squamous

3. The figure represents human tissue.

The tissue would most likely be lining the

A. salivary glands. B. stomach. C. ileum. D. oviduct

Kato Maxmillian 92 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

4. The figure below represents.

A. tracheid. C. sieve tube.

B. xylem vessel element. D. phloem praenchyma cells

5. Which one of the following glands has a compound tubular structure?

A. Mucus glands in the skin of the frog and other amphibians

B. Salivary glands in the mouth of a mammal
C. Brunners glands in the wall of a mammalian small intestine
D. Sweat glands in the skin

6. Which one of the following epithelial tissues is illustrated by figure 1 above?

A. Columnar. B. Squamous. C. Cuboidal. D. Stratified.

7. Cells with uniformly thickened and lignified walls are likely to be

A. Phloem B. Parenchyma C. Collenchyma D. Sclerenchyma

8. The matrix in cartilage is secreted by

A. Chondroblasts B. Oesteoblasts C. Fibroblast D. Osteoblasts

9. Which one of the following cell types provides strength with flexibility in plant tissues?

A.Parenchyma C.Trancheids
B. Collenchyma D. Sieve tubes

Kato Maxmillian 93 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

10. Streching of the urinary bladder is made possible by the presence of

A. Squamous epithelium C. Columnar epithelium

B. Transitional epithelium D. Stratified epithelium

11. Which one of the following types of epithelia experiences the highest rate of wearing?

A. Stratified B. Columnar C. Glandular D. Ciliated

12. Which one of the plant tissues, have cells with cell wall least adapted for support?

A. Sclerenchyma B. Collenchyma C. Tracheid D. Xylem vessels.

13. Which one of the following plant tissues performs both storage and supportive functions?

A. Parenchyma B. Sclencyma C. Collenchyma D. Phloem

14. In which one of the following is ciliated epithelium found?

A. Kidney tubules C. Lining of capillaries

B. Small intestines D. Lining of alveoli

15. Which one of the following glands is compound saccular

A. Mammary glands C. Sweat glands

B. Sebaceous glands D. Gastric glands

16. Which one of the following is true about mature metaxylem vessels?

A. They are capable of stretching B. They are living cells

C. They are formed after elongation is complete D. They are partially lignified and less rigid

17. In a plant stem, the parenchyma of the secondary cortex is also called

A. phelloderm B. Phellem C. Periderm D. Phellogen

Kato Maxmillian 94 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

18. Which one of the following is not true with apical meristems?

A. They have large spaces in between their cells C. They are small in size
B. They have thin cellulose walls D. They have proplastids

19. The endothelium of the blood vessels is derived from;

A. Mesoderm B. Ectoderm C. Endoderm D. Periderm

20. Which of the following epithelial tissues lines blood capillaries?

A. Cuboidal tissue C. Columnar tissue

B. Squamous tissue D. Glandular tissue

21. The inorganic matrix of the bone is largely composed of;

A. Osteonectin C. Phosphates
B. Calcium D. Concentric lamellae

22. Which one of the following is not true with sieve tubes?

A. Have no cytoplasm at maturity

B. Have perforated end walls, at maturity
C. They are metabolically inactive and dead at maturity.
D. Lack nuclei, when still young

23. Which one of the following tissues, experiences cytoplasmic streaming, when still young?

A. Phloem B. Xylem C. Parenchyma D. Epidermis

24. The plant tissue which is functionally equivalent to a bone is known as;

A. Sclerenchyma B. Parenchyma C. Collenchyma D. Xylem

Kato Maxmillian 95 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

25. Which one of the following tissues serves as vascular and mechanical tissues?

A. Phloem B. Xylem C. Sclerenchyma D. Collenchyma

26. Which one of the following glands secretes its materials, by complete breakdown of their entire

cells?

A. Sebaceous glands C. Salivary glands

B. Mammary glands D. Sweat glands

27. Which one of the following tissues serves the role of the sclerenchyma, in herbaceous plants?

A. Collenchyma C. Xylem
B. Parenchyma D. Phloem

28. Which one of the following is not true about cartilages?

A. They are hard and flexible C. They have ground substance or matrix
B. They are soft and flexible D. They have chondroblasts

29. Which one of the following is a simple branched tubular gland?

A. Brunners gland B. Salivary gland C. Sweat gland D. Mammary gland

30. Which one of the following types of epithelia lines the walls of the mammalian alveoli?

A. Columnar epithelium C. Stratified epithelium

B. Cuboidal epithelium D. Squamous epithelium

31. The main difference between bones and cartilages is that cartilages

A. Lack lacuna C. Lack collagen fibres

B. Lack hydroxyapetite. D. Lack ground matrix

Kato Maxmillian 96 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

32. Which one of the following tissues has the least power of regeneration?

A. Blood tissue B. Epithelium tissue C. Bone tissue D. Nerve tissue

33. Which one of the following tissues would be stained deepest red by a dye that stains nuclei red?

A. Sieve tube B. Tracheid C. Collenchyma D.Cambium

34. Which one of the following tissues is heavily lignified?

A. metaxylem B. primary phloem C. cambium D. proxylem

35. Which one of the following types of epithelia experiences the highest rate of wearing?

A. Stratified B. Columnar C. Glandular D. Ciliated

36. Which of the following structures is found in both xylem and phloem tissues of higher plants?

A. Sieved tracheids C. Companion cells

B. Parenchyma cells D. Hollow vessels

37. The following parts have ciliated epithelium except

A. Ventricles of the brain C. Spinal canal

B. Oviducts D. Kidney ducts

38. Which one of the following is not correct about cells of a tissue? They

A. are of one type. C. have same particular function.

B. have the same origin. D. are linked physically.

39. The matrix in cartilage is secreted by

A. fibroblasts B. chondroblasts C. osteoblasts D. osteoclasts

Kato Maxmillian 97 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

40. Which one of the following epithelium is unlikely to be found in the mammalian intestine?

A. columunar B. ciliated C. stratified D. squamous

41. Which one of the following glands is compound saccular?

A. mammary glands B. sweat glands C. sebaceous glands D. gastric glands

42. What is the function of the xylem tissue?

A. Transports food C. Absorbs water

B. Transports hormones D. provides support

43. Which of the following is true with mature sieve tubes?

A. They have perforated end walls. C. They have all cell organelles.
B. They experience cytoplasmic streaming. D. They are made up of dead cells.

44. The basic function of simple squamous epithelium is

A. secretion B. absorption C. diffusion D. excretion

45. Keratinized epithelium is found in the

A. living of blood capillaries C. living of pharynx

B. living of stomach D. living of buccal cavity

46. The long wary, unbranched fibres present in bundles in connective tissue are

A. Elastic fibres B. Reticulate fibres C. Collagen fibres D. yellow fibres

47. Which one of the following is not a connective tissue?

A. Areolar tissue B. Blood C. Fibro-cartilage D. Muscle

Kato Maxmillian 98 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

48. The Haversian canal of compact bone tissue consists of all the following except:

A. Osteocytes B. nerve fibres C. blood vessels D. lymph vessels.

49. One of the following is not a modification of ciliated columnar epithelium.

A. it has goblet cells to secrete mucus.

B. The goblet mucus traps bacteria.
C. The cilia set up currents in the mucus.
D. The cilia increase surface area for absorption

50. Which of the following tissues has unevenly thickened cellulose walls and uniformly thick

lignified walls respectively?

A. sclerenchyma and collenchyma C. collenchyma and tracheid

B. collenchyma and sclerenchyma D. xylem and sclerenchyma

51. Which of the following tissues is composed of dead cells?

A. Collenchyma B. Parenchyma C. Sclerenchyma D. Phloem

52. The walls of collenchyma cells are stained deep blue by methylene blue but not aniline

hydrochloride. This shows that the walls

A. are not thickened. C. contain protoplasm.

B. are thickened by liginin. D. are thickened by material other than lignin

53. Which one of the following tissues is most important in providing mechanical support in the stem

of a young plant?

A. Xylem B. Collenchyma C. Sclerenchyma D. Phloem

54. Which of the following is composed of spindle shaped cells?

A. Smooth muscle B. Cartilage C. Bone tissue D. Skeletal muscle

Kato Maxmillian 99 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

55. In a long bone, compact bone is found in the

B. Epiphyses B. Periosteum C. Diaphysis D. Cartilage

56. The following are functions of epithelial tissue except:

A.Protection B. Secretion C. Movement D. Excretion

57. Yellow fibro cartilage is found in the following except:

A Pinna B. Nose C. Larynx D. Trachea

58. Hyaline cartilage is considered a simple tissue consisting of only two components. These are:

A. Collagen fibres and chondrin

C. Ground substance and fibroblasts
B. Elastic fibres and chondroblasts
D. Chondrin and chondroblasts

59. Which of the following best describes the function of parenchyma tissue in plants?

A. Parenchyma is the main tissue for the transportation of water and mineral salts to all parts of
the plant.
B. It is the main pathway for the transportation of manufactured food substances
C. It is the main tissue which gives plants mechanical support
D. It is a storage tissue

60. Figure below shows an epithelial tissue

The function of the tissue is to

A. Increase surface area for absorption of materials

B. Provide smooth lining for movement of materials
C. Act as the junction between different tissues
D. Moves material along the surfaces

Kato Maxmillian 100 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

61. Which of the following is not true of sieve tube?

A. They lack nuclei C. They are metabolically inactive

B. Their end walls are perforated D. They have their cytoplasm even at maturity

62. With which tissue type are glands often associated?

A. connective B. Vascular C. Epithelial D. muscular

63. Once the osteoblasts are inactive, they are known as.

A. osteoclasts B. chondroblasts C. osteocyte D. chondrocytes

64. Which one of the following is true about smooth muscles?

A. They are striated C. They contract at will

B. They contract rapidly D. They have unicellular fibres

65. Which one of the animal tissues serves a similar function like parenchyma tissues in plants.

A. collagen tissue B. cartilage tissue C. elastic tissue. D. areolar tissue

66. Which one of the following structures is found in both xylem and phloem tissues of higher plants?

A. Sieved tracheids B. Parenchyma cells C. Companion cells D. Hollow vessels

67. The erectile tissue matrix of the penis is secreted by;

A. Chondroblast B. Osteoblasts C. Fibroblasts D. Osteoclasts

68. Figure shows a section of a structure from plant tissue.

The tissue with such a structure is the.......

Kato Maxmillian 101 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

A. Collenchyma B. Parenchyma C. Phloem D. xylem

69. Which of the following is true about the musculo-epithelial cells of hydra?

A. Present in endoderm B. Lengthen the body

C. Run circularly around the body. D. Shorten the body

70. Figure 1 shows a glandular tissue

In which part of the mammalian body is the tissue likely to be?

A. Ileum B. Lungs C. Stomach D. Skin

71. The epithelial type lining the mammalian alveoli is the ......

A. Columnar B. Cuboid C. Stratified D. Squamous

STRUCTURED QUESTIONS

72. Name two areas in plants where each of the following tissues is found.

(i) Sclerenchyma (2 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Collenchyma (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Give three structural adaptations of the sclerenchyma tissue for its function. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 102 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(c) Explain the importance of the collenchyma tissue in leaves and young stems. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(d) Outline three structural differences between the collenchyma and sclerenchyma tissue.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

73. (a) Draw a single haversian system of a compact bone. (2 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
b) State one role of each of the following structures;
i) Osteocytes. (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
ii) Osteoblasts. (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
(iii) Hydroxyapetite. (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
c) Outline any two differences between a bone and a cartilage. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

74. The figures below show some transport tissue found in flowering plants.

Kato Maxmillian 103 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(a) Name the tissue shown in the diagrams above. (1 mark)

..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Name two types of cells shown in the drawing which are characteristic of this tissue.(2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) i) State two substances which are normally transported in this tissue. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
ii) Describe a techinique which could be used to show that one of the substances you have stated
in (b) (i) is transported in this tissue. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

75. a) Describe the adaptations of each of the following tissues for their functions, giving one
example of a site where each of them is found.
i)Sclerenchyma. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
ii)Xylem. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
b) Explain how the structure of proteins enables them to form body tissues and structures.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 104 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

76. a) List the 3 types of cartilage. (3 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
b) Give four differences between bone and cartilage. (4 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

77. (a) Describe the adaptations of each of the following tissues.

(i) Stratified tissues. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Collagen tissue. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Explain how the structure of protein enables them to form body tissues and structures.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 105 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

5 THE CHEMICALS OF LIFE

5.1 Water

1. The hydrogen bond occurs between

A. electropositive hydrogen and electronegative oxygen
B. electropositive oxygen and electronegative hydrogen
C. non polar groups
D. a metal and non metal

2. Which one of the following properties of water enables its movement through the apoplast

pathway in a plant

A. High latent heat of vapourisation C. High adhesion cohesion forces

B. Polarity of its molecules D. High surface tension

Kato Maxmillian 106 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

3. The high latent heat of fusion has a biological importance of

A. cooling of animals. C. control heat loss in animals.

B. aquatic organisms are slow to freeze. D. minimizing temperature change.

4. Water has a comparatively high surface tension and boiling point in relation to other substances

of similar sized molecules beacuse its molecules are

A. doubly bonded. B. polar. C. ionic. D. covalent.

5. Which property of water makes it suitable for use as a hydrostatic skeleton?

A. water being denser than air

B. water having a high tensile strength.
C. water being difficult to compress
D. water having a high latent heat of vaporization

6. A property of water which facilitates its efficient transportation of glucose is its

A. ability to form hydrogen bonds with other substance
B. high surface tension
C. low freezing point
D. high boiling point

7. Aquactic organism survive under solidified water bodies because

A. water solidifies from bottom to top of the lakes.
B. ice is less dense than water at 4o C
C. cold water is more dense than hot water and falls to the bottom.
D. warm water floats on top of cold water.

8. The high heat capacity of water has biological importance of.

A. Minimizing temperature changes in animal fluids
B. Cooling animals
C. Preventing freezing of cell contents
D. Controlling heat loss in animals

Kato Maxmillian 107 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

9. Evaporation of water from a body surface causes cooling because water has a

A. latent heat of vaporisation. C. boiling point.

B. latent heat of fusion. D. specific heat capacity.

10. Which diagram best describes the arrangment of water molecules around sodium(Na+) and

chloride(Cl-) in solution?

STRUCTURED QUESTIONS

11. Without water, there is no life. Explain the statement. (3 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

12. How is water important in the biosphere? (4 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 108 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

13. How is water important in the maintenance of life? (5 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

14. How is the importance of water related to its properties? (4 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

15. How is water important for maintenance of life properties? (3 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

16. How does the properties of water make it an important chemical of life? (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 109 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

17. How are the biological significance of water related to its properties? (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

18. Describe the molecular structure of water. (3 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

19. a) Use the water molecules to explain the following

i) Dipole (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
ii) Hydrogen bond (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
b) What is the biological significance of the following properties of water?
i) A high specific heat capacity. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
ii) A high heat of fusion. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 110 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

5.2 Carbohydrates

1. Which one of the following is the correct formula of a polysaccharide?

A. (C6 H10 O5 )n B.(CH2 O)n C. (C6 H12 O6 )n D. (C12 H2 O11 )n

2. Which of these substances contains carbon, hydrogen, oxygen and nitrogen?

1. Amylopectin 2. Collagen 3. Deoxyribonucleic acid

A. 2 only B. 1 and 2 only C. 2and 3 only D. 1, 2 and 3

3. Identify the enzyme whose hydrolytic action leads to the formation of glucose and fructose.

A. sucrase B. lactase C. maltase D. fructose

4. What is the constitution of starch?

A. amylose and glucose glucose and glucose

B. amylopectin and glucoseC. D. amylose and amylopectin

Kato Maxmillian 111 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

5. What is the basic unit of starch?

A. glucose B. glucose C. glucose D. monosaccharide

6. The figure below represents

A. amino acid. B. glucose. C. ribose. D. fatty acid.

7. Which of the following substances can not change the colour of copper (ii) ions from blue to

green?

A. sucrose B. glucose C. maltose D. galactose

8. The link responsible for the formation of a disaccharide is

A. 1, 6 peptide bond C. 1, 6 glycopeptide link

B. 1, 4 hydrogen bond D. glyosidic bond

9. Glucose is not a storage carbohydrate in plants because of the following reasons,

A. it is sweet C. it lowers water potential

B) it is soluble D. it is osmotically active

10. Glycosidic bonds are present in

A. Glycogen B. proteins C. lipids D. cholesterol

Kato Maxmillian 112 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

11. The general molecular formular for simple sugars is

A. C6 H12 O6 B. Cx (H2 O)y C. (CH2 O)n D. Cn H2n O2

12. Sucrose is a non- reducing sugar because it

A. is not fully digested C. is a ketose sugar

B. lacks reducing groups D. is a disaccharide

13. All macromolecules are synthesized by joining monomers together in a process known as,

A. Dehydration synthesis C. hydrogen bonding

B. hydration synthesis D. condensation

14. Starch and glycogen are suitable storage molecules because they are
A. Are large in size which makes them insoluble in water
B. Are chemically reactive in the cell
C. Can easily be hydrolysed
D. Exert an osmotic pressure in the cell.

15. Sucrose is a major transport solute in plants because?

A. Is highly soluble so can be in high concentration in the sap
B. Can easily be converted into glucose and fructose
C. Is insoluble so it cannot be used in chemical reactions
D. Can be oxidized by the living parts of the phloem

16. Which one of the following expalins why sucrose is a good transport substance in plants? it
A. can easily be hydrolysed
B. easily enters the general metabolic pathways
C. has high solubility thus forming high concentration
D. is highly abundant in plants

Kato Maxmillian 113 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

17. The complexity and variety of organic molecules is due to the ability of carbon atom to
A. Form covalent and ionic bonds
B. Form covalent bonds in three dimensions
C. Form strong chemical bonds
D. Bond with atoms of many elements

18. The figure below shows the structure of a common organic chemical of life.

Which one of the following is not a property of the molecule?

A. it is soluble in water.
B. it can be hydrolysed by a mineral acid.
C. is a reducing agent.
D. it is crystalline .

STRUCTURED QUESTIONS

19. a) Define the following terms.

(i). Hydrolysis. (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii). Condensation. (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(iii). Reducing sugar. (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 114 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

20. Starch and glycogen are important energy storage compounds in organisms.
a) State three similarities in the structure of starch and glycogen. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
b) Outline three advantages that make starch and glycogen suitable storage compounds.(3marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
c) State the advantages of storing fat over glycogen. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
d) Explain why large herbivores like cows cannot digest but depend on microscopic bacteria to
digest cellulose in the plant material they eat. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

21. (a) How important are monosaccharides to plants and animals? Give examples in each case.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Compare the structure of amylose and amylopectin. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 115 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

22. (a) Describe the structure of starch. (3 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Why do plants store carbohydrates in form of starch and not inform of glucose? (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

23. (a) Describe the structure of glycogen. (3 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Suggest why glycogen is a good storage polysaccharide in animals. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

24. (a) With examples, explain why polysaccharides are preferred storage forms for carbohydrates.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Give reasons why sucrose is the major form in which carbohydrates are translocated.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 116 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

25. (a) Why do carbohydrates form a variety of polysaccharides? (3 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Compare starch and cellulose. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) What structural features of the carbohydrates account for the wide variety of polysaccharides
that exist? (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

26. (a) How does the structure of starch relate to its functions. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b)How does the structure of cellulose relate to its roles. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

27. a) Name three disaccharides and their constituent simple sugars. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 117 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

b) How can you test for a non-reducing sugar in the laboratory? (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

28. (a)Describe the structure of cellulose as found in the plant cell wall. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
b) Outline any four differences between starch and cellulose. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

29. The figure below shows the a disaccharide of lactose. Use it to answer the questions that follow.

(a) State any two functions of lactose. (3 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 118 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(b) What name is given to the reaction above that results into formation of lactose. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Using the information above, is alpha of beta form of glucose used to make lactose? Explain
your answer. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

30. The below shows part of the molecular structure of cellulose and starch.

(a) Describe the differences in the molecular structure between cellulose and starch. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
Cellulose has a structural function in plants while starch has a storage function.
(b) Relate these functional differences to the differences in the molecular structure of cellulose
and starch. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Name the bond formed between adjascent glucose molecules in starch and cellulose.
..............................................................................................................................................................
(d) Suggest why amylase, the enzyme that catalyses the hydrolysis of starch, will not catalyse the
hydrolysis of cellulose. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 119 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(e) The table below shows three polysaccharides. Complete the table by placing tick if a stament
is correct or a cross (X) if a stament is incorrect.

Statement Starch Glycogen Cellulose

Polymers of alpha glucose
Glycosidic bonds present
Unbranched chains only
Energy store in animal cells

Kato Maxmillian 120 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

5.3 Lipids

1. Which one of the following compounds combines with fatty acids to form fats?

A. Glycerol B. Glycine C. phosphoric acid D. Galactose

2. How many water molecules are produced when 30 molecules of fatty acids are used for synthesis

of triglycerides?

A. 10 B. 30 C. 90 D. 60

3. Saturated fatty acids and unsaturated fatty acids are similar in

A. The number of carbon to carbon bonds they possess
B. Their consistency at room temperature.
C. The number of oxygen atoms present
D. The number of hydrogen atoms they contain

Kato Maxmillian 121 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

4. One reason why lipids are better energy sources than carbohydrates is that they

A. Are insoluble C. Are not compact

B. Do not form hydrogen bonds with water D. Have a higher proportion of hydrogen.

5. Which one of the following is wrong about cholesterols?

A. They facilitate functioning of the plasma membrane.
B. They do not dissolve in water.
C. They are lost from the body mainly as bile salts.
D. They are only obtained from the diet.

6. Which of the following food materials has the highest amount of potential energy per unit

weight?

A. monosaccharides B. proteins C. vitamins D. fats

7. The following is a storage material in both plants and animals

A. Insulin B. Lipids C. Starch D. Sucrose

8. When a lipid is combined with a phosphate group, it becomes

A. Saturated C. Water soluble

B. A complex molecule D. amphoteric

STRUCTURED QUESTIONS

9. a) Explain why lipids are insoluble in water. (3 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 122 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

b) State the structural and physiological functions of lipids.

(i) Structual: (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Physiological: (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
c) What properties do lipids possess as storage compounds? (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

10. Using the structual formula

for glycerol, and molecular formula CH3 (CH2 )n COOH for a fatty acid, show the formation of a
triglyceride from fattyacids and glycero. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) What properties do lipids possess as storage food substances?. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 123 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(c) Outline the sructual and physiological functions of lipids in living organisms.
(i) Structual. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Physiological. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

11. The figure below shows a structure of a lipid molecule.

(a) i) Name parts labeled A and B. (1 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
ii) Name the type of lipid. (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
iii) Name the chemical reaction used to form bonds between A and B. (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) (i) State one function of this type of lipid in living organisms. (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) State one feature of the molecules of this type of lipid which makes them suitable for the
function you have stated above. (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 124 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

12. The figure below shows two diagrams, use them to answer the questions that follow.

(a) Identify with albels which one represents a lipid and which a phospholipid. (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) (i) For molecule A, indicate on the diagram where hydrolysis would take place if a molecule
is digested.
(ii) Name the products of digestion. (0.5 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Each molecule has a head with tails attached. For molecule B, label the head to indentify its
chemical nature.
(d) (i) Which of the two molecules is water soluble? (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Explain your answer in (d)(i). (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(e) State one function of each molecule. (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 125 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

5.4 Proteins

1. Which of the following substances consists of globular proteins?

A. Enzymes B. Keratin C. Elastin D. Collagen

2. Which one of these determines the shape of protein?

A. The number of peptide linkages C. The number of essential amino acids

B. The sequence of amino acids D. The active site

3. Which one of the following does not determine the order in which amino acids line up to protein

synthesis.

A. The base sequence in DNA C. The number of the ribosomes involved

B. The sequence of the base triplets in mRNA D. The sequence of anticodons in the tRNA

Kato Maxmillian 126 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

4. Which term best describes both collagen and haemoglobin?

A. enzyme. B. Fibrous proteins. C. globular proteins. D. macromolecules.

5. When a Biuret test was carried out on an unknown substance, a purple colour was observed.

Which type of bond is indicated by the test?

A. Disulphide B. Hydrogen C. Ionic D. Peptide

6. What type of reaction is involved in the formation of disulphide bonds?

A. Condesation. B. Hydrolysis. C. Oxidation. D. Reduction.

7. The biological roles of a protein molecule is dependent on

A. the sequence of amino acids it contains
B. the pattern of folding of the amino acids
C. other protein molecules with which it is associated
D. its three dimensional shape

8. An amino acid can be referred to as a Zwitterion because...

A. In acidic solutions, it reacts with hydroxyl ions
B. In a neutral solution, it has both negative and positive charges.
C. In alkaline solution, it releases hydroxyl ions
D. In a neutral solution, it has a stable structure.

9. The number and sequence of amino acids determines the

A. primary structure of nucleic acids C. primary structure of a protein

B. secondary structure of proteins D. tertiary structure of a protein

10. Below is a list of some amino acid.

i)Alanine iv) Histidine
ii) Arginine v) Leucine
ii) Glycine vi) Lysine

Kato Maxmillian 127 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

A. (i) (ii) (iii) B. (ii) (iv) (v) C. (i) (iii) (vi) D. (ii) (iv) (vi)

11. Which one of the following is not an essential amino acid?

A. Arginine. B. Histidine. C. Isoleucine. D. Asparagine.

STRUCTURED QUESTIONS

12. a) Outline any four differences between keratin and a hormone. (4 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
b) What is meant by an isoelectric point? (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
c) Suggest any one mechanical means of protein denaturation. (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

13. ) Briefly describe the structure and function of

i) fibrous proteins (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
ii) globular proteins. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

14. Explain what is meant by the primary structure of a protein molecule. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 128 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

15. (a) Explain the role of hydrogen bonding in maintaining the structure of a globular protein such
as insulin. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b)Describe how the structure of a fibrous protein, such as collagen, differs from the structure of a
globular protein. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

16. The figure below shows two strucures of aminocids A and B.

(a) Give two elements other than carbon, hydrogen and oxygen which could be present in the side
groups R1 and R2 . (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) A and B can be linked together during protein synthesis.
(i) What name is given to that bond? (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Copy the diagram and put a ring around atoms which are removed when A and B are joined.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(iii) Draw a line connecting the atoms in A and B which are bonded. (0.5 marks)
(c) Describe how properties of side groups R1 and R2 may vary, and how these are involved in the
structure of proteins. (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 129 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(d) Complete the table below giving named examples of a protein having the function indicated.

Function Example of protein.

Contractile
Enzyme
Transport
Structural
Hormone
Protection from diseses

(e) The figure below shows a small polypeptide consisting of eight amino-acids , S-Z.

(i) Give the formula of the chemical compound which would appear at the end of aminoacid Z.
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Name the type of reaction by which amino acids are joined together. (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
(iii) Name the reagents you would use to test for the presence of a protein. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

17. The figure below shows three amino acids.

(a) Draw a diagram to show the structure of a tripeptide with the following sequence,
alanine-glycine-serine. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 130 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) What name is give to the squence of aminoacids in the protein? (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) What substance, apart from the tripeptide would be formed when the three acids combine?
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Draw a ring around an atom or group of atoms making up the R-group that could hydrogen
bond with a neighbouring R group. (1 mark)
(d) Draw a ring around and label the peptide(s) bonds you have drawn in the diagram. (1 mark)

5.5 Vitamins

1. Which one of the following vitamins is water soluble?

A. D B. E C. B D. A

2. In growing children, vitamin D is essential to promote

A. Reabsorption of minerals from the bones

Kato Maxmillian 131 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

B. Storage of excess ions in the liver

C. Absorption of calcium from the intestines
D. Uptake of iron by the thyroid gland

3. Which of the following vitamins can not be stored in the adipose tissue?

A. A and D B. A and E C. E and K D. B and C

4. Which of the following vitamins is not water soluble?

A. Vitamin E B. Vitamin A C. Vitamin D D. Vitamin C

5. Vitamins are important in human diet because they are incorporated into:

A. enzyme substrates B. ATP C. Co-enzymes D. Inhibitors

6. Which of the following vitamins is water-soluble?

A. Retinol B. Calciferol C. Tocopherol D. Ascorbic acid

Kato Maxmillian 132 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

6 CHEMICAL REACTIONS IN A CELL

6.1 Enzymes

1. For the reaction it catalyzes, an enzyme will

A. shift the point of equilibrium C. reduce the activation energy

B. increase the rate between 00 C and 80 C D. work best with a pH range 5 to 9

2. When a piece of liver is dropped into a beaker containing hydrogen peroxide, there is a vigorous

reaction. This is due to the enzyme.

A. Pepsin B. catalase C. carbonic anhydrase D. trypsin

Kato Maxmillian 133 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

3. Enzymes that catalyze the removal of water molecules from a substance are called

A. reductases B. dehydeases C. dehydrogenases D. hydrases

4. When the level of inhibition of an enzyme activity depends entirely on the concentration of the

inhibitor, it indicates that the inhibition is;

A. Competitive B. Reversible C. Noncompetitive D. Irreversible

5. An essential feature of a competitive inhibitor is its ability to

A. activate an operator gene C. combine with a prosthetic group

B. modify a substrate D. fit into an active site

6. Which one of the following describes the turnover number of an enzyme?

A. number of molecules affected by the enzyme.
B. number of substrate molecules turned into products per minute.
C. number of product molecules formed
D. number of substrate molecules catalysed per minute.

7. Which one of the following does not affect a non-competitive inhibition?

A. temperature change. C. enzyme concentration. D. substrate

B. pH changes. concentration.

8. Which one of the following properties of proteins is most important in creating molecular order in

cells?

A. amphoteric properties C. High molecular weight

B. tendency to form a colloidal state D. ability to form precipitates with strong acids

9. Co-enzymes and prosthetic groups are different because co-enzymes.

A. are organic molecules
B. are inorganic and organic.

Kato Maxmillian 134 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

C. remain attached to the enzyme between reactions.

D dont remain attached to the enzyme between reactions.

10. Which one of the following is true about characteristics of enzymes?

A. The higher the temperature above the optimum, the higher the rate of enzyme activity.
B. The higher the substrate concentration, the lower the rate of enzyme activity.
C. The higher the suitable pH, the higher the rate of enzyme catalysed reaction.
D. The higher the active site, the higher the rate of enzyme catalysed reaction.

11. An enzyme remains useful at different temperatures as long as it can.

A. increase the activation energy of the reaction in catalyzes.
B. lower the activation energy of the reaction in catalyzes.
C. remain highly specific by catalyzing only a single reaction
. D. remain globular

12. The cofactor which is a small organic molecule that acts as a carrier molecule called.

A. prosthetic group B. coenzyme C. metal activator D. Apoenzyme

13. Which one of the following pairs of enzymes belongs to lyases?

A. Decarboxylases and catalase C. Catalase and dehydrogenase

B. Decarboxylase and ligase D. Ligase and dehydrogenase

14. Which one of the following characteristics of enzymes distinguish them from inorganic catalysts?

They;
A. Initiate and speed up the rate of reactions.
B. Remain the same at the end of a reaction.
C. May promote reversible reactions.
D. Exert their effects when present even in small amounts.

15. Chloride ions are vital for efficient functioning of salivary amylase because the ions are;

A. activators B. coenzymes C. co-factors D. prosthetic groups

Kato Maxmillian 135 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

16. Which one of the following correctly represents the effect of increasing substrate concentration

on the degree of inhibition in a competitive and competitive inhibition reaction?

. competitive Non-competitive
A. decreased increased
B. decreased no decrease
C. increased decreased
D. no change increased

17. The rate of enzyme controlled reaction becomes constant ata certain point with increase in

substrate concentration because.

A. enzymes are denatured. C. end-product inhibtion occurs.

B. active sites become fully occupied. D. cofactors become used up

STRUCTURED QUESTIONS

18. a) Using an example in each case distinguish between competitive and non-competitive inhibitors.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
b) Explain how allosteric inhibition occurs. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
c) State one way in which enzyme inhibitors have been put to use by man. (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 136 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

19. The figure below shows the effect of varying substrate concentration on an enzyme catalysed
reaction, in abscence and presence of compund A.

(a) Explain the relationship between the reaction rate and substrate concentration.
(i) in absence of compound A. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) in the presnce of compound A. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) State two factors which would have to be kept constant in this experiment. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(C) What would be the effect of increasing the concentration of compund A in the experiment?
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

20. a) What is an enzyme. (3 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 137 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

b) Outline factors that affect enzyme activity. (3 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
c) Describe how a competitive inhibitor affects enzyme activity. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

21. (a) What is meant by inhibition of an enzyme. (3 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
b) Explain how the end product inhibition in an enzyme controlled reaction is a negative
feedback.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
C) Explain the role of the active sites of an enzyme in enzyme specificity. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 138 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

22. The figure below shows the relationship between pH and realtive activity of the three proteases

(a) Explain why changes in pH affect enzyme activity. (3 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Comment on the effect of change in pH on the three proteases. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Which of the these proteases would be most suitable for as meat tenderiser? Give a reason for
your answer. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(d) Suggest one factor other than pH which affects the activity of proteases. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................

23. a) By giving an example define the following terms;

i) coenzyme. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 139 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

ii) Prosthetic group. (3 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
iii) Enzyme activators. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
b) What is the significance of enzyme inhibition? (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

7 CLASSIFICATION AND DIVERSITY OF LIVING

ORGANISMS.

7.1 The taxonomic heirarchy

1. The grouping and study of organisms according to their similarities is called

D. Nomenclature C. Systematics
B. Identification D. Phylogenetic relationship

Kato Maxmillian 140 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

2. Which combination of phyla consists of the most advanced organisms?

A.Tracheophyta and chordate C. Tracheophyta and annelid

B. Tracheophyta and echinodermata D. Chordata and cnidaria

3. Which one of the following is a characteristic of members of monera kingdom?

A. Possession of true nucleus C. Possession of phalegella

B. Being single celled D. Being heterotrophic

4. A common feature belonging to annelids and athropods is the

A. exoskeleton. C. metameric segmentation.D. chitineous

B. jointed body form. cuticle.

5. Chordates have the following characteristics except

A. Dorsal notochord extending into head C. Dorsal hallow nerve tube

B. Gill clefts D. Post anal tail

STRUCTURED QUESTIONS

6. a) What is meant by binomial nomenclature? (3 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
b) State any 2 characteristics, unique with the following phyla:
(i) porifera. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii)Echinodermata; (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 141 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(iii) Annelida; (2 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
c) State any 2 differences between members of Arachnida and Insecta. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

7.2 Viruses

1. One of the following is not a characteristic of viruses.

A. They are the smallest living organisms C. They have both DNA and RNA
B. They lack cellular structures D. They have alipoprotein coat

2. Viruses resemble living organisms because they possess.

A. a nucleus. C. a cell membrane.

B. genetic material. D. oxidative enzymes.

Kato Maxmillian 142 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

3. Which one of the following characteristics of viruses makes it difficult to classify them as living

organism?

A. They can be reconstituted from crystals. C. They do not have chromosomes

B. They are not destroyed by antibodies D. They are all parasites

4. Viruses are not alive because they

A. do not grow. C. do not metabolise.

B. lack cell parts. D. have gentic material.

5. Viruses can reproduce.

A. independently of the host.
B. independently of host cells if they first take up organelles from the host cells.
C. only within host cells.
D. only with assistance of other viruses.

6. The enzyme reverse transcriptase uses.

A. DNA as template to make more DNA. C. RNA as template to make more RNA.
B. DNA as template to make RNA. D. RNA as template to make more DNA.

7. The grouping of viruses is based partly on the

A. presnce or absence of an envelope. C. type of organism they affect.

B. presence or absence of nucleic acids. D. structure of their organelles.

8. Phage DNA is intergrated into a host cell’s chromosome is a

A. coronavirus. B. retrovirus. C. prophage. D. capsid.

9. An emerging virus is one that arises.

A. from a host cell when the cell undergoes lysis.
B. from a lysogenic cycle and enters a lytic cycle.
C. when isolated habitats are developed by humans
D. on the skin after hiding inside nerve cells.

Kato Maxmillian 143 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

10. A disease causing particle made of RNA without a capsid is called

A. a viroid. B. a retrovirus. C. a prion. D. an envelope.

STRUCTURED QUESTIONS

11. (a)(i) What characteristics are used to classify viruses as living things? (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Why are viruses also referred to as non-living things? (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Why is a virus referred to as an obligate parasite? (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) State the two general components of viruses. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(d) Name any two plant and two animals (other than human) diseases caused by viruses.
Plant diseases (1) (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
Animal diseases (1) (1mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 144 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

12. (a) The diagram below shows five steps in the lytic cycle of a bacteriophage. The order of steps
has been scrambled. Arrange the steps in their correct order by writing the letter of each step, and
briefly what is happening in each step.

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) How does an RNA virus get viral DNA into a host cell’s genome? (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(C) Why must a person recieve a different flu vaccine ecah year to be protected against flu?
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(e) What kind of factors can cause a prophage to become virulent. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 145 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

13. (a) The figure below shows the structure of the human immunodefieciency virus. Label parts a to
e in the spaces provided

(b) State any two characteristics of viruses. (2 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Name two methods other vaccination, for controlling viral diseases. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(d) Why would a drug that blocks DNA transcription not be a desirable method for treating a viral
disease? (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

14. The figure below represents of a bacteriophage virus.

Kato Maxmillian 146 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(a) Name and briefly describe the functions of the parts labelled A and B. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Suggest an approximate size(diameter) for such a virus. (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Suggest two important reasons why such viruses are not reffered to as living organisms.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 147 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

7.3 Kingdom Monera

1. The following organizations have cilia and flagella with 9 + 2 fibril arrangement except.

A. Paramecium. B. Euglena C. Bacteria D. Volvox

2. Which one of the following belongs to kingdom monera?

A. Spirogyra B. Blue green bacteria C. Yeast D. Euglena

3. Which of the following type of bacteria would you mostly likely to find in very salty water?

A. chemoautotroph. C. cynobacterium.
B. halophile. D. thermoacidophile.

4. An organism was found to possess conspicuious flagella,chloroplast and a protein coat.The

phylum to which the organism belongs is the

A. protozoa. B. chlorophyta. C. ascomycota. D. byophyta

Kato Maxmillian 148 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

5. One structure you would not find on a bacterial cell is a

A. cell wall. B. cell membrane. C. mitochondrion. D. chromosome.

6. Bacteria become resistant to antibiotics by

A. secreting antibiotics
B. assisting the passage of antibiotics through the cell wall.
C. acquiring an R-plasmid for resisitance.
D. growing only in petri-dishes.

7. Photoautotrophic bacteria obtain their energy from

A. from the sun. C. by feeding on living organisms.

B. by oxidising inorganic chemicals. D. by feeding on dead and decaying material.

8. Which one of the following bacteria can live in the presence of oxygen?
A. only obligate anaerobes.
B. only obligate aerobes.
C. only obligate aerobes and facultative anaerobes.
D. all bacteria

9. The process by which two living bacteria bind together and transfer genetic information is called.

A. conjugation. B. transformation. C. transduction. D. encapsulation.

STRUCTURED QUESTIONS

10. (a) Give four nutritional groups of bacteria, giving one example in each case. (4 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 149 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

c) How are bacteria economically important in nature. (3 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

11. (a) Give the function of each labeled part the drawing of the bacterial cell below.

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Name three environmental factors that affect the growth of bacteria. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Where does photosynthesis take place in a photoautotrophic bacterium? (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................

12. (a) Name the bacterial cells in the figure below in the spaces provided.

Kato Maxmillian 150 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(b) Why do some bacteria retain their Gram stain while others do not? (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Identify two ecologically important characteristcs of cynobacteria. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(e) Clostridium perfringens , the soil dwelling bacterium that causes gangrene, is an obligate
anaerobe, using the information predict which would be more likely to become infected with C.
perfringens : A deep puncture wound or a surface cut. Explain the reason for your inference
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

13. The figure below shows the strucure of a typical bacterial cell as revealed by an elcetron
microscope.

(a) Give one function for each of the following features A, B, and C. (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Gram staining can be used in in the identification of bacteria.
(i) Explain the difference in appearance after staining between a sample of Gram positive and a
sample of Gram negative. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 151 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(ii) Give one example of a genus of Gram negative bacteria. (1 mark)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

7.4 Kingdom Fungi

1. All fungi are

A. multicellular and prokaryotic. C. eukaryotic and non-photosynthetic.

B prokaryotic and photosynthetic. D. unicellular and photosynthetic.

2. Which one of the following is not an asexual reproductive structure of a fungus?

A. septum. B. sporangium. C. conidiophore. D. sporangiospore.

3. Throughout most of their life cycle, most fungi are.

A. male. B. female. C. diploid. D. haploid.

Kato Maxmillian 152 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

4. Unlike animals, fungi.

A. ingest nutrients before digesting them.
B. secrete enzymes and then absorb the digested nutrients through their cell walls.
C. have cell walls made of cellulose without chitin.
D. do not store energy inform of glycogen.

5. Fungi that have coenocytic hyphae and reproduce sexually through conjugation belong to

phylum.

A. Zygomycota. B. Basidiomycota. C. Ascomycota. D. Deuteromycota.

6. A mushroom is an example of.

A. rhizoid. B. ascogonium. C. zygosporangium. D. basidiocarp

7. Fungi that produce spores inside sac-like compartments belong to phylum.

A. Zygomycota. B. Ascomycota. C. Basidiomycota. D. Deuteromycota.

8. In the life cycle of an ascomycetes, haploid nuclei fuse when

A. Conidia germinate.
B. asci develop.
C. a tube forms between the ascogonium and the antheridium.
D. ascospores germinate.

9. One of the functions of fungus in mycorrhizal relationship is

A. perfoms photosynthesis. C. absorb phosphate and other ions.

B. store sugars for the plant. D. decompose rock to form soil.

Kato Maxmillian 153 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

STRUCTURED QUESTIONS

10. The figure below shows asexual and sexual reproduction in zygomycetes.
(a) label each structure or process in the space provided.

(b) How do the reproductive structures of ascomycetes differ from those of basidiomycetes.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Explain the difference between a mycorrhiza and a lichen. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) What effects do lichens have on their physical environment? (2marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

11. Fungi were originally classified under the plant kingdom.

(a) Outine features of fungi that made it necessary to place them in their own kingdom. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Explain why fungi are wide spread and in vast number. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 154 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(c) What is economic importance of fungi? (3 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

12. The figure below shows two types of fungal hyphae.

(a) Identify structures A,B and C and name the type of hyhae D and E represent.

(b) How does the cell wall of fungi differ from those of plants? (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Outine four features of puffballs that enable them to be placed into the fungi kingdom.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(d) Explain how a fungi reproduces through fragmentation. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(e) What characteristic do fungi share with plants? (1 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
(f) In what ways are most fungi similar to unicellular protists? (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 155 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

7.5 Kingdom Animalia

1. Modern human beings are scientifically referred to as;

A. Homo erectus C. Homo sapiens

B. Homo sapiens sapiens D. Australopithecus africanus

2. Starfish belong to phylum;

A. chordate B. echinodermata C. coelentrata D. mollusca

3. Fleas are wingless but are grouped in the order of the winged insects because;
A. its mouth parts are similar to those of winged insects
B. it lost wings during evolution
C. its limbs are similar to those of the winged insects
D. it feeds on the same type of food with the winged insects

Kato Maxmillian 156 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

4. Ticks belong to order;

A. arachnida B. acarina C. siphanoptera D. insecta

5. Which one of the following belongs to a different phylum?

A. Octopus B. scorpion C. millipede D. crab

6. Which terms includes all others

A. mammal B. hominidae C. primates D. vertebrates

7. Which one of the following sets is made up of names of only mammals?

A. bat, shark, elephant, zebra C. seal, whale, elephant, porcupine

B. seal, whale, shark, elephant D. zebra, whale, python, porcupine

8. Which one of the following organisms belongs to the same phylum as the earth worm?

A. Millipede B. leech C. Tape worm D. Round worm

9. The preying mantis is categorised under order

A. Orthoptera B. Arthropoda C. Dictyoptera D. Hymenoptera

10. Which of the following is a feature exclusive to birds.

A. lack of teeth B. scales C. flight by fore limbs D. feathers

11. Which one of the following is not a characteristic of chordates?

A. dorsal hallow nerve tube. C. vertebral column.

B. gill pouches. D. tail notochord.

Kato Maxmillian 157 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

12. Which one of the following organisms has the highest power of regeneration?

A. Sponges B. Hydra C. Flat worms D. Lizards

13. Which of the following organisms is rendered immobile by cutting off the flagella?

A. amoeba B. euglena C. paramecium D. Chlamydomonas

14. Which one of the following belongs to a different phylum from the rest?

A. amphioxus B. A worm C. sea squirt D. sea anemone

15. In which one of the following pairs do the organisms belong to two different phyla?

A. Trypanosoma and plasmodium C. centipede and cockroach

B. Round worm and tapeworm D. fish and crocodiles

Kato Maxmillian 158 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

7.6 Kingdom Plantae

1. Each of the following is a part of a seed except.

A. embryo. B. endosperm. C. seed coat. D. gametophyte.

2. Ferns are types of

A. vacular plant. B. seed plant. C. angiosperm. D. gymnosperm.

3. Pine plants are types of.

A. nonvascular plant. B. angiosperm. C. gymnosperm. D. herbaceous plant

4. The life cycle of a vascular plant is characterised by

A. a large gametophyte and small sporophyte. C. the abscence of sporophyte.

B. a large sporophyte and small gametophyte. D. the absence of gametophyte.

Kato Maxmillian 159 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

5. The Funaria gametophyte thallus gives rise to;

A. spores B. archegonia C. ovum D. zygote

6. Bryophytes have

A. True roots,stems and leaves. C. an alternation of generation life cycle.

B. vascular tissue. D. seeds.

7. Bryophytes include all plants execpt.

A. ferns. B. hornworts. C. liverworts. D. mosses.

8. The mobile sexual reproductive parts of all seedless plants are.

A. rhozomes B. cones. C. spores. D. epiphytes.

9. One of the adaptive advantages of seeds is that seeds .

A. do not remaian inative for a long period of time.
B. can germinate without water.
C. lack tough outer coat.
D. contain a nutrient supply.

10. Naked seeds are produced by plants in phylum.

A. coniferophyta. B. lycophyta. C. Anthophyta. D. pteridophyta.

11. One difference between angiosperms and gymnosperms is that.

A. most gymnosperms can reach maturity in a single season.
B. angiosperms have more effiecient vascular system
C. gymnosperms are more likely to be associated with mycorrhizae.
D. angiosperms are less diverse than gymnosperms.

Kato Maxmillian 160 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

12. Most monocots.

A. bear their seeds in cones. C. do not produce flowers.

B. have vascular bundles arranged in a circle. D. have parallel venation.

13. The production of single type of spore is a characteristic of the life cycles of.

A. moss and fern. C. most ferns and gymnosperms.

B. mosses and most gymnosperm. D. mosses, most ferns and most gymnosperm.

14. The dominant stage in the life cycle of a conifer is the.

A. gametophyte. B. sporophyte. C. megasporangium. D. microsporangium.

15. The dominant stage in the life cycle of a conifer is the.

A. gametophyte. B. sporophyte. C. megasporangium. D. microsporangium.

STRUCTURED QUESTIONS

16. The figure below shows a phylogenetic diagram of plants and their algal anscestors.
(a) In the space provided, name the adaptations that evolved at each of the positions indicated.

Kato Maxmillian 161 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(b) Name two adaptations plants have made to life on land. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Describe the advantage of each adaptation. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

17. The diagram below shows the main parts of the moss.
(a) Identify the phases of the moss life cycle represented by letters A and B, and name the
structure labelled C.

(b) Identify two ways how vacular plants differ from non vascular plants. (1.5 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) How do reproductive structures of angiosperms differ from those of gymnosperms?
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

18. (a) State four distinguishing features of anfiosperms. (4 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 162 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(b) Describe any three;

(i) features of seeds that have contributed to their success on land. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Major difference between plants and animals in their mode of growth and development.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 163 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

8 THE ORGANISM AND ITS ENVIRONMENT

8.1 Biosphere, ecological niche and biotic environment

1. When man feeds on beans they are acting as

A. producers C. primary consumer

B. secondary consumers D. first consumer

2. A feeding relationship that proceeds from grass to rabbit, fox, and lion is best described as

A. food wed C. food chain

B. structured feed relation D. continuous eating

3. Within an ecosystem, the total number of secondary consumers must be

A. less than the total number C. consistently the same year after year
B. greater than the total number of herbivores D. equal to the total number of

Kato Maxmillian 164 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

4. Which one of the following equations shows the correct relationship between gross primary

productivity(GPP) and net primary productivity (NPP) in plants?

A. GPP = NPP - Photosynthesis C. GPP = NPP - Plant respiration

B. NPP = GPP - Photosynthesis D. NPP = GPP - Plant respiration

5. Which one of the following has the greatest biomass in an ecosystem

A. Tertiary consumers C. Secondary consumers

B. Primary producers D. Primary consumers

6. Which one of the following ecological pyramids may be used to determine productivity in an

ecosystem?

A. pyramid of energy. C. pyramid of numbers.

B. pyramid of biomass. D. pyramid of productivity.

7. The number of organisms in each trophic level reduces as one moves up a food chain because

A. Energy is lost in moving from one trophic level to another

B. Energy is lost from the top trophic levels
C. Organisms in higher trophic levels are less productive
D. Of high level of predation at the top trophic levels

8. During which transfer of energy is most energy lost in an ecosystem?

A. Producers → primary → consumers
B. Primary consumers → secondary→ consumers
C. Secondary→ consumers tertiary→ consumers
D. Tertiary→ consumers → decomposers

9. Which term includes the other three terms?

A. community B. ecosystem C. population D. biome

Kato Maxmillian 165 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

10. The statement complete competitors cannot coexist is explained by

A. Primary succession C. Competitive exclusion

B. Natural selection D. Environmental resistance

11. In a heavily polluted aquatic ecosystem, the group of organisms with highest concentration of

pollutants in their bodies are

A. tertiary consumers C primary consumers.

B. secondary consumers. D. primary producers

12. Competition by two species for the same ecological niche generally results in.
A. the sharing of the niche by the two species
B. one species taking possession of the niche
C. both species leaving the niche
D. inter breeding between the species

13. What is meant by ecological niche?

A. Condition in which the organism lives
B. Specific localities with a particular set of conditions
C. Geographical regions, cutting across continents
D. Precise place of an organism and what it does there

14. Algae have much smaller biomass compared to large producers such as tree but may have the

same productivity because

A. alot of material and energy are locked up in dead xylem tissue of the tree.
B. the algae have a vey high turn over.
C. algae have a high rate of reproduction
D. the rate of growth and death in algae is high.

15. A food web is more stable than a food chain because a food web
A. includes more consumers than producers.
B. Includes alternative path ways for energy flow.
C. reduces the number of niches in an ecosystem.

Kato Maxmillian 166 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

D. transfers all the producer energy to herbivores

16. An ecological niche is the

A. Abiotic component of an organisms environment
B. Habitat where an organism finds the most suitable climate
C. Place where an organism finds its food supply
D. Way an organism interacts with other organisms

17. Figure 2 shows a pyramid of numbers for a food chain.

The most likely nutritional relationship between producers and primary consumers is

A. mutualistic. C. parasitic.
B. symbiotic. . D. autotrophic.

18. Which one of the following refers to a group of individuals of atleast two species living together?

A. Community. B. Population,. C. Habiat. D. Niche.

19. Which one of the following is true about the environment of a forest floor under thick canopy?

A. has wide temperature fluctuations.

C. develops dense plant growth.
B. recieves far red light.
D. has heavy soil erosion

20. Which one of the followimg constitutes of the most energy transfer?

A. praying mantis feeds on flies. C. Cat feeding on small mammals.

B. Aphids feeding on plant sap. D. Beetle larvae feeding on dung

Kato Maxmillian 167 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

21. Why don’t most food chains go beyond trophic level four?
A.Top consumers like lions dont have predators.
B. Some organic matter is not edible.
C. They have very few producers.
D. Energy is lost by consumers to producers.

22. During which transfer of energy is most energy lost in an ecosystem?

A. Producers → primary consumers
B. Primary consumers → secondary consumers
C. Secondary consumers → tertiary consumers
D. Tertiary consumers → decomposers

STRUCTURED QUESTIONS

23. In an aquatic ecosystem which was affected by an insecticide, analysis of energy flow and
concentration of the pesticide at each trophic level in a food chain was made. The results are
shown on a pyramid of biomass of the ecosystem, in figure

(a) What does the width of each bar of the pyramid represent? (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Explain why, from producers to secondary consumers,
(i) The levels of the pesticides increase? (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 168 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(ii) The flow of energy decrease? (2 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) From the biomass, explain how the producers can sustain the herbivores. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(d) Give three ecological problems that may arise through the use of pesticides. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

24. (a) What is meant by primary productivity? (2 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Explain how each of the following affects primary productivity in plants
(i) Water stress. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Chlorosis. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

25. (a) Explain the role consumers and producers in the recycling of carbon in nature
(i) Consumers; (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 169 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(ii) Producers; (2 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Give five reasons why all the carbon in plants is not accessible to herbivores (5 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
c) The diagram below is a pyramid of biomass in an ecosystem.

(i) What does the length of each bar represent. (1 mark)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) How are the phytoplankton capable of supporting the zoo planktons. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 170 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

26. The figure below shows energy flow in a food chain

(a) Assuming 10% of the energy received by the herbivore is lost. Calculate the energy retained
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Explain why
(i) Energy transfers from herbivores to carnivores is more effective than from producers to
herbivores. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) The efficiency of energy transfer from herbivores to carnivores is less than 100%? (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) State the factors which limit the numbers of trophic levels in a food chain. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 171 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

27. The figure below shows the relationship between biomass of primary consumers, secondary
consumers and producers.

(a) Define the term biomass. (1 mark)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) What conclusion can be drawn from the graph? (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Give three reasons why not all the energy in the producer biomass can be converted into
energy in primary consumer biomass. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(d) How does trophic efficiency vary across trophic levels from producers through a series of
consumers? Give two reasons for your answer. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 172 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

28. The figur below shows the relationship between the biomass of phytoplankton and the depth at
which is found in two different lakes.Lake A has low nutrient concentration. Lake B has the
highest nutrient content

(a) Briefly describe a method by which you could measure the biosmass of the phytoplanktons.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Describe the effect of different nutrient concentration on the distibution of phytoplanktons in
the two lakes. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) The rate of biomass production at 5 metres was much higher in lake A than in lake B. Explain
why. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(e) After a shorter period of time, the phytoplanktons die and their remains decays;
(i) Use this information to explain why application of large amounts of nitrate fertiliser to the land
surrounding the lake might affect other organisms in the lake. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 173 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Suggest why a period of drought might increase the effect described in your answer in (e)(i).
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(f) Biological methods can be used to monitor water pollution such as that caused by addition of
fertilisers. Explain why each of the following may be used to monitor water pollution.
(i) presence or basence of indicator species. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) an index of diversity. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

29. (a) Define area leaf index (LAI) (2 mars)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) The figure below show changes in the rate of productivity and respiration with leaf area index
of a banana plant.Study it carefully and answer the questions that follow.

Kato Maxmillian 174 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(i) Explain the relations between the leaf area index and net primaty productivity between points.
A and B. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
B and C. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) State the equation that shows the relationship between gross primary productivity, net primary
productivity and respiration. (1 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(iii) Which one of these quantities will give the best indication of mass of dry matter produced by
the banana. (1 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 175 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

8.2 Estimating population and population growth

1. All the following are density dependent factors that limit population growth except

A. rainfall C. interspecific
B. disease and parasites D. intraspecific competition

2. Which of the following methods of controlling malaria would cause least damage to the

environment?

A. Drawing of swamps C. spreading oil all over stagnant water

B. spraying swamps and ponds with insecticide D. introducing fish into the swamps and ponds

3. Which of the methods below is most suitable for estimating the population of the Paramecium in

a pond?

A. Capture-recapture method C. Removal sampling

B. Total count D. Random sampling

Kato Maxmillian 176 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

4. In an experiment to determine population of a species of animals using the capture-recapture

method, the following results were obtained:
Number of animals marked and released = 210
Number captured in second collection = 240
Number recaptured = 24

What was the estimated total population of the animals?

A. 474 B. 1890 C. 2100 D. 1860

5. The role of the decomposers in the nitrogen cycle is to

A. fix nitrogen into ammonia
B. release ammonia from organic compounds, thus returning it to the soil
C. denitrifying ammonia, thus returning nitrogen to the atmosphere.
D. convert ammonia to nitrate which can be absorbed by plants.

6. In estimating the number of fish in a small lake, 625 fish were netted, marked and released. After
a week, 873 fish were netted and of these 129 had been marked . the estimated size of the

population of fish in the lake

A. 92 B. 180 C. 631 D. 4230

7. Which one of the following would not apply to population whose size is growing exponentially?

A. Absence of predators
C. Shortage of reproducing individuals
B. Reproduction rate being higher than death
D. Absence of competition for resources.
rate

8. An absolute limit imposed by the environment on population increase is called

A. biotic potential C. carrying capacity

B. mortality D. environmental resistance

Kato Maxmillian 177 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

9. Which one of the following is correct about organisms in an ecosystem?

A. Some organisms exist in isolation C. All organisms interact with each other
B. Every organism can be independent D. Each organism has a different source of food

10. A climax community is one in which

A. Succession is at its peak C. Succession has ceased

B. A carrying capacity has been reached D. Death rate of organisms is at its lowest

11. In estimating the population of Tilapia in fish pond, 60 fish were marked and released. After 2
days, 50 were captured and out of which 10 were marked. The population of Tilapia in the fish

pond was.

A. 300 B 400 C 200 D 100

12. What is the major environmental factor limiting the number of autotrophs at a great depths in the

oceans?

A. Amount of light. C. Availability of minerals

B. Types of sea floor D. Absence of biotic factors

13. The largest population that can be maintained by a particular environment for an indefinite period

is known as

A. Exponential growth C. Biotic potential

B. carrying capacity D. population explosion.

14. Which one of the following is not used to describe a population of organisms

A. Density B. Biodiversity C. Size D. Distribution

Kato Maxmillian 178 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

15. Which one of the following statements concerning the general world environmental situation is

scientifically untrue?
A. use of pesticides increases accumulation of poisons in water supplies.
B. farming intensively leads to destruction of wild life habitant
C. cutting down of forests creates favorable conditions for soil erosion.
D. use of fertilizers has risks of water pollution.

16. Which of the following factors will cause an increase in the bio chemical oxygen demand in a

water body?
A. insufficient supply of oxygen
B. a high producer population
C. A high production on low consumer population
D. Action of anaerobic bacteria

17. In estimating the population of a weed in a area of 1000m2 , a1m2 quadrant was thrown 50 times
and the total number of weeds counted were 60. What was the estimated population of the weed?

A. 20 B. 300 C. 833 D. 1,200

18. Determining the most common plant species in a large harbitat within a short time can be best

carried out using the

A. linr transect. B. quadrat. C. direct count. D. aerial view method.

19. When using the Lincoln index method, during the release of the animals one has to consider the

following factors except

A. release of animals in their inactive period
B. scatter points of release throughout the habitat
C. do not release near any danger
D. releasing process should not damage the organism in any way

20. When individuals are found in isolated small groups within a habitat, their dispersion is termed as

A. random. B. excessive. C. clumped. D. uniform.

Kato Maxmillian 179 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

21. The type of succession where recolonisation of an area results into a different community from

the original one is known as

A. primary. B. dominant. C. deflected. D. secondary.

22. The following apply to a population which is rapidly growing except;

A. reproduction rate is higher than death rate. C. absence of competition.

B. absence of predators. D. shortage of reproducing individuals.

STRUCTURED QUESTIONS

23. The figure below shows three population growth curve patterns a, b, and c that occur naturally.

Describe and suggest reasons for the observed pattern of each population growth curve.
(a) (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 180 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(c) (4 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

24. (a) (i) Describe how the quadrant method can be used to determine species density. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) State the advantage and disadvantages of the method. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) (i) why is it important to estimate population size? (2marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) In estimate the number of fish in a small lake, 625 fish were caught, marked and released.
After one week, 920 fish were caught and of these, 150 had been marked. What was the estimated
fish population? (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(iii) In using the method in b (ii) to estimate the population size of fish, state two assumptions that
were made. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
a) i) Describe how random sampling can be carried out. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 181 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

ii) Suggest three disadvantages of random sampling methods. (3 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
b) Describe how you would use a quadrant to estimate the percentage frequency of a small plant
species in a habitat. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

25. The figure shows a relationship between a pest and biological control agent.

(a) Giving a reason, state which curve represents the

(i) pest; (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) control agent; (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 182 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(b) Explain the changes in the population of the pest and control agent. (5 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Suggest what would happen if the pest was completely wiped out. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(d) Explain the characteristics of a good biological control agent. (1 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

26. The figure below shows the population of a producer and a consumer in a lake over time.

(a) State which curve represents the.

1
(i)producer; ( marks)
2
..............................................................................................................................................................
1
(ii) consumer; ( marks)
2
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Explain the interactions between between the two population before point A (5 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 183 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Suggest how human activities could result in the interactions of the population between points
A and B. (4 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

27. The capture recapture method was used to estimate the population size of dragon flies. The
following results were obtained: On first day, 300 dragon flies were captured and marked. Two
days later 450 dragon flies were captured out of which 100 had been marked.
(a) Using this information, estimate the population size of dragon flies. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) State three assumptions, and two precautions which are taken into account while using this
method in estimating population size.
Assumptions: (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
Precautions: (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) State any three sources of error in using this method of estimating population size. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 184 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

28. Figure shows two forms of population growth curves of animals

(a) Indicate by drawing on curve A the carrying capacity of the environment. (01 mark)
(b) Compare the pattern of population change in curves A and B. (02 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Suggest an explanation for the population changes in curve B. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(d) Suggest three biotic factors which can result into a change in carrying capacity, in an
environment. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 185 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

29. The graph A and B below indicate biotic interactions between different species of Paramecia
when bred in two mixed cultures in two different beakers. Study them and answer the questions
that follow;

(a) Propose the interactions show by;

(i) Graph A (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Graph B (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Explain the interaction between the two species as shown by graph A. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Suggest the adaptations of P aurelia, as shown by graph B. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(d) What is the evolutionary significance of the interaction of the species in graph B? (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 186 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

30. Table 1 gives information on the frequency % of three plants along grassland / woodland transect.

(a) List the structural and physiological adaptations that enable a grass e.g Grass A, to survive in
its habitat. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Give two structural adaptations you would expect to find in herb G that would enable it to
survive in the woodland. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) How would you describe the distribution of grass B? (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

31. (a) How can predation be beneficial to the prey species? (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Give factors that may affect the predator-prey balance in nature. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 187 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(c) Outline ways by which humans have affceted the predator- prey balance resulting into harmful
consequences. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

32. (a) What is pest resurgence? (2 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Suggest reasons why pest resurgence arises when a broad spectrum is used in controlling pest
populaation. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Give two other effects of prolonged pestcide application in controlling pest population.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

33. (a) Describe brifely the Lincoln index method of estimating population size. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Outline three disadvantages of using the Lincoln index method of estimating population size.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Outline any three precautions that must be taken when using the Lincoln index method in
estamating population size. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 188 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

8.3 Associations between organisms

1. Which one of the following is not exhibited by a well adapted parasite?

A. Inflicting moderate harm to its host C. Killing the host

B. Employing an intermediate host D. Using more than one host

2. Which of the following characteristics of a parasite is not means of ensuring continuity of species

of the parasite?

A. Degeneration of redundant body structures C. Protection against host enzyme

B. Means of penetrating another organism D. Means of dispersing offspring

3. Which of the following is the right order in the life cycle of fasciola?

A. Miracidium larvae, redia, sporocyst. C. Miracidium larva, fertilized egg, sporocyst

B. Miracidium larva, sporocyst, redia D. miracidium larva, cercaria, redia

4. Facultative parasites are more difficult to control than the obligate ones because they;

A. live in colonies. C. have many hosts.

B. can change the mode of feeding. D. are capsulated.

Kato Maxmillian 189 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

5. The following are physiological adaptations of some parasites except;

A. anticoagulant formation C. anaerobiosis

B. chemosensitivity D. organ degeneracy

STRUCTURED QUESTIONS

6. a) What is meant by the term parasitism? (2 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
b) State three physiological adaptations of endoparasites. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
c) State the advantages of a parasitic mode of life. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

7. (a) what is meant by parasitism? (2 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b). State three physiological adaptations of endoparasites. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Give three advantages of a parasitic mode of life to the parasite. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 190 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(d) Describe three ways of a parasite-host relationship which ensures the success of a parasite.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

8. a) Define the term saprobiontism. (2 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
b)Briefly describe the feeding mechanism of saprobionts (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
c) Mention any three differences between saprobionts and the parasites. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
d) Outline any significance of saprobiontic organisms. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 191 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

8.4 Effects of humans on ecosystems

1. Excessive use of pesticides is dangerous because

A. they cause eutrophication C. they cause bioaccumulation

B. they cause pest resistance D. they cause biomagnifications

2. Predators in the top trophic levels in a food chain are most severely affected by persistent

pesticides because
A. their system are highly sensitive to chemiclas
B. they have rapid reproductive rates
C. they cannot store pesticides in their tissues.
D. the pesticides become concentrated in their prey.

3. Which one of the following activities does not contribute to global warming?

A. Use of pesticides B. Deforestation C. Burning fossil fuels D. Use of CFCs.

4. Depletion of of ozone layer is caused by the

A. green house effect
B. release of carbon dioxide in the atmosphere.

Kato Maxmillian 192 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

C. penetration of the ultraviolet rays

D. release of the chlorofluorocarbons in the atmosphere.

5. The following are green house gases except;

A. carbon dioxide B. chloroflorocarbons C. methane D. Sulphur dioxide

6. Radioactive rays are particularly dangerous in nature because they.

A. cannot be absorbed by so they only affect animals.
B. accumulate in animals and return to the soil when animals die.
C. cause extremly high tempertaures in the environment.
D. accumulate in high concentration at high trophic levels.

7. Which statement explains green house effect?

A. Depletion of ozone layer increases atmospheric pressure.
B. The earth retains the heat it gains from the sun.
C. Increasing atmospheric carbon dioxide prevents heat loss from the earths surface.
D. Atmospheric gases prevents the light rays from the sun reaching the earth.

8. When man feeds on beans they are acting as

A. producers C. primary consumer

B. secondary consumers D. first consumer

9. A feeding relationship that proceeds from grass to rabbit, fox, and lion is best described as

A. food wed C. food chain

B. structured feed relation D. continuous eating

10. The ecological roles played by organism may be represented graphically in form of pyramids.

This representation recognizes the fact that.

A. environments seldom support a maximum population
B. energy transfer is never 100% efficient
C. climax communities are subject to change
D. population pressure may produce migration

Kato Maxmillian 193 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

11. Rapid deforestation of rain forests may be accelerating the

A. serious loss of energy and gene pool C. water pollution

B. declining loss of fossil forests D. green house effect

12. Which term includes the other three terms?

A. community B. ecosystem C. population D. biome

13. Within an ecosystem, the total number of secondary consumers must be

A. less than the total number C. consistently the same year after year
B. greater than the total number of herbivores D. equal to the total number of producers

14. Competition by two species for the same ecological niche generally results in
A. the sharing of the niche by the two species
B. one species taking possession of the niche
C. both species leaving the niche
D. inter breeding between the species

15. In the tropics when land is cleared of its existing vegetation

A. the capacity of the soil to absorb nutrients increases
B. soil temperature rises considerably during day
C. decomposition of organic matter slows down
D. there is an increase in the water-holding capacity of soil.

16. Which one of the following is not an adaptation by Ascaris as a parasite?

A. presence of cuticle covered with mucus C. possession of a muscular pharynx

B. possession of a long intestine D. tolerance of low oxygen concentration

17. All the following are density dependent factors that limit population growth except

A. rainfall C. interspecific
B. disease and parasites D. intraspecitic competition

Kato Maxmillian 194 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

18. Which of the following methods of controlling malaria would cause least damage to the

environment?
A. Drawing of swamps
B. spraying swamps and ponds with insecticide
C. spreading oil all over stagnant water
D. introducing fish into the swamps and ponds.

19. The role of the decomposers in the nitrogen cycle is to

A. fix nitrogen into ammonia
B.release ammonia from organic compounds, thus returning it to the soil
C. denitrifying ammonia, thus returning nitrogen to the atmosphere.
D. convert ammonia to nitrate which can be absorbed by plants.

20. An absolute limit imposed by the environment on population increase is called

A. biotic potential C. carrying capacity

B. mortality D. environmental resistance

21. Excessive use of pesticides in the long term affects mostly

A. carnivores. B. parasites. C. producers. D. herbivores

22. What is the major environmental factor limiting the number of autotrophs at a great depths in the

oceans?

A. Amount of light. C. Availability of minerals

B. Types of sea floor D. Absence of biotic factors

23. A food web is more stable than a food chain because a food web.
A. includes more consumers than producers.
B. Includes alternative path ways for energy flow.
C. reduces the number of niches in an ecosystem.
D. transfers all the producer energy to herbivores.

Kato Maxmillian 195 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

24. The statement complete competitors cannot coexist is explained by

A. Primary succession. C. Competitive exclusion

B. Natural selection D. Environmental resistance.

25. The largest population that can be maintained by a particular environment for an indefinite period

is known as

A. Exponential growth C. Biotic potential

B. carrying capacity D. population explosion.

26. The following relate to the Biochemical Oxygen Demand (B.O.D), increase in the
1. Population of aerobic micro organism
2. Level of organic pollution
3. Level of eutrophication

Which of these apply when the Biochemical Oxygen Demand is highest?

A. 1 and 2 B. All of them C. 2 and 3 D. 1 and 3

27. Which statement explains green house effect?

A. Depletion of ozone layer increases atmospheric pressure
B. The earth retains the heat it gains from the sun.
C. Increasing atmospheric carbon dioxide prevents heat loss from the earths surface.
D. Atmospheric gases prevents the light rays from the sun reaching the earth.

28. Which one of the following statements concerning the general world environmental situation is

scientifically untrue?
A. use of pesticides increases accumulation of poisons in water supplies.
B. farming intensively leads to destruction of wild life habitant
C. cutting down of forests creates favourable conditions for soil erosion.
D. use of fertilizers has risks of water pollution.

Kato Maxmillian 196 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

29. Why dont most food chains go beyond trophic level four?
A. Top consumers like lions dont have predators.
B. Some organic matter is not edible.
C. They have very few producers.
D. Energy is lost by consumers to producers

30. Which one of these makes carbon dioxide have the greatest influence on global warming?
A. Retains more heat.
B. Has a higher concentration in the atmosphere.
C. Stays longer in the atmosphere.
D. Has acidic properties.

31. Which one of the following forms of environmental hazards is attributed to application of CFCs?

A. Green house effect.

C. Ozone layer depletion.
B. Acid rain.
D. Eutrophication.

STRUCTURED QUESTIONS

32. (a) State three ecological problems which arise from the accumulation of dosmestic waste in
urban communities. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Give two ways of reducing domestic watse. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 197 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(c) Figure below shows the lichen species growing along a 20 km transect from an urban centre.

(i) Explain the trend in the lichen species with with distance from the urban centre. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Suggest an explanation for the observed number of lichen species at a distance of 10 km from
the urban centre. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

33. With respect to the use of pesticides

(a) Distinguish the terms pest resurgence and biological magnification (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Give the causes of pest resurgence. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 198 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(c) Explain the qualities of an ideal pesticide. (3 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

34. (a) State two (2) causes of water pollution. (2 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) The figure below shows thermal stratification in a water body. Study it carefully and answer
the quastions that follow.

(i) From the figure above what is meant by thermal stratification? (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Suggest explanations for the distributions of each of the following within the different layers
of the lake. Oxygen content: (4 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
Concentration of nutrients: (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 199 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

35. (a) What is meant by eutrophication? (2 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) State two human activities that may cause eutrophication. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) What is the effect of eutrophication? (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(d) Effects of eutrophication are more severe in water bodies where thermal pollution occurs.
Explain. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

36. How do high levels of each of the following gases in the atmosphere affect the environment
(a) Sulphur dioxide; (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) carbon dioxide; (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 200 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(c) chloroflouro carbons; (3 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

37. Table 1 shows the amount of DDT measured in parts per million (ppm) found in a variety of
organisms associated with a fresh water lake.

Where the DDT level was measured Amount of DDT (ppm)

Water 0.0003
Phytoplankton 0.006
Zooplankton 0.004
Herbivorous 0.39
Carnivorous 1.8
Fish-eating birds 14.3

(a) (i) Calculate how many times the DDT is more concentrated in carnivorous fish compared
with its concentration in water. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) What do the results in a(i) show? (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Explain why the concentration of DDT changes from water to carnivorous fish. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) State two effects of DDT to organisms. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 201 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(d) Explain how a pest sprayed with a pesticide may flourish afterwards. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

38. The graph below shows the effects of sewage pollution on some physical and chemical
constituents of a river at increasing distances downstream from the point of sewage discharge.

Suggest explanations for the variation, downstream from the point of sewage discharge, in
concentrations of ammonium ions, dissolved oxygen, and suspended solids.
(i) Ammonium ions; (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Dissolved oxygen (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(iii) Suspended solids; (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Mention two consequences of discharging sewage into a river. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 202 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

39. (a) State any two human activities which cause eutrophication. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) The fugure below shows plankton biomass of a lake measured during onset of eutrophication
and before. The reslults are represented in pyramid of biomass X and Y.

(i) Identify which of the pyramid represents the lake:

During onset of eutrophication. (1 mark)
...............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
Before eutrophication: (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Suggest the explanation for the difference in pyramid X and Y. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(iii) Explain how the phytoplanktons in X are able to support the zooplanktons. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(C) State two ways of reducing water pollution. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 203 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

9 HEREDITY

9.1 The structure of nucleic acids and nature of the gene

1. In DNA replication, each new

A. single helix is composed of 50% protein and 50% DNA protein
B. triple helix is composed of one DNA strand and two new DNA strands
C. double helix is composed of one old DNA strand and two new DNA strands
D The DNA of a human being differs from

2. Analysis of sample of DNA showed that 33% of the base were adenine. The percentage of

guanine bases in the sample was

A. 34. B 33 C. 17 D. 28

3. The two strands of DNA easily separate during replication because of the;
A. helical nature of the nucleotide
B. closeness of the base pairs
C. weak hydrogen bonds between base pairs
D. the weak hydrogen bonds between phosphate and sugar

Kato Maxmillian 204 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

4. If the bases on the mRNA are ACU, what would be the corresponding bases on the original DNA

coding Strand during protein synthesis?

A. ACT B. UGA C. TGA D. ATU

5. When a DNA sample was analysed, it showed that 28% of the bases were adenine. The

percentage of cytosine therefore is

A. 36. B. 16. C. 28. D. 22.

6. The primary function of DNA in cells is to

A. serve as storage form for unused nucleotides.
B. occupy space in the nucleus ,and keep the nucleus fronm collapsing.
C. stores information that tells the cell which protein to make.
D. serve as a template for making long, spiral carbohydrates.

7. The two strands of DNA molecules are held together by

A. ionic bonds. B. covalent bonds. C. peptide bonds. D. hydrogen bonds.

8. According to base-pairing rules, guanine binds with.

A. cytosine. B. adenine. C. thymine. D. guanine.

9. Which one of the following is not a correct structure of the a nucleotide?

A. adenine-deoxyribose-phosphate. C. cytosine-deoxyribose-phosphate.
B. adenine-ribose-phosphate. D. guanine-deoxyribose- phosphate.

10. The percentage of adenine in DNA is

A.equal to the percentage of cytosine. C. equal to the percentage of guanine.

B. equal to the percentage of thymine D. not related to the percentage of thymine

Kato Maxmillian 205 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

11. Which one of the following is true about ribosomal RNA?

A. it is the most abundant RNA type of the cells
B. it is manufactured from DNA type in the nucleolus
C. its base sequence differs in different species of organisms
D. it is based in the cytoplasm of the cell.

12. The codon CCU and CCC both code for the amino acid proline. What property of the genetic

code does this illustrate?

A. It is universal C. It is degenerate
B. One gene codes for one polypeptide D. There are overlapping genes

13. The maximum number of triplet codons in the mammalian nuclear genetic code is

A. 3 B. 46 C. 61 D. 64

14. A cistron of DNA refers to

A: group of several DNA molecules C: region of DNA for polypeptide formation

B. point of untwisting of DNA molecule D. point of unzipping of DNA molecule

15. Which one of the following base triplets will pair with ACG triplet base?

A. TGC B. AAT C. GTG D. ACC

16. Which of the following is found in both DNA and RNA

A. Double helix C. Ribose

B. sugar phosphate chain D. Thymine

Kato Maxmillian 206 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

17. A genetic code is a non over lapping code. What is the maximum number of amino acids, which
would have been coded for, by the following sequence of bases: UAAUAGUGA, provided there

was overlap in the genetic code?

A. 3 B. 4 C. 7 D. 9

18. Replication of two DNA strands takes place.

A. in two different directions
B. in the same direction of the replication fork.
C. in a direction opposite to that of the replication fork.
D. at right angles to the direction of the replication fork.

19. In replication in prokaryotes.

A. there are two origins.
B. two replication forls move in opposite directions.
C. replication proceeds in only one direction.
D. there are no replication forks.

20. A mutation is a
A. change in the direction of the replication fork.
B. form of cancer.
C. kind of replication.
D. change in the nucleotide squence of DNA.

21. Which one of the following enzymes is involved with the breaking of hydrogen bonds?

A. DNA polymerase. C. DNA helicase.

B. DNA ligase. D. DNA hydrogenase

22. A biochemical analysis of a DNA sample showed that 34% of the bases were guanine. The

percentage of the adenine bases in the sample is.

A.32. B. 16. C. 17 D. 34.

Kato Maxmillian 207 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

23. Deoxyribose and ribose sugars are different because.

A. Deoxyribose lacks on oxygen atom at carbon 2.
B. Deoxyribose lacks a hydrogen atom of carbon 2.
C. Deoxyribose has an extra oxygen atom at carbon 2.
D. Deoxyribose is a pentose sugar while ribose sugar is a hexose sugar.

24. In the Watson crick mode of a double helix, the rungs of the twisted ladder are composed of

A. sugars
C. two pyrimidines
B. two purines
D. a purine and a pyrimidine

25. What are the triplet baseson the template DNA strand if the anticodon of the tRNA is ACG?

A. ACG. B. UGC. C. TGT. D. GGC

26. In DNA replication, each new

A. single helix is composed of 50% protein and 50% DNA protein
B. triple helix is composed of one DNA strand and two new DNA strands
C. double helix is composed of one old DNA strand and two new DNA strands
D. double helix is composed of one old protein strand and one new protein strand

27. The DNA of a human being differs from

A. base pairs B. base pair sequence C. having uraci D. sugar sequence

28. The maximum number of triplet codons in the mammalian nuclear genetic code is

A. 3 B. 46 C. 61 D. 64

Kato Maxmillian 208 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

STRUCTURED QUESTIONS

29. The genetic code contains punctuation codons to mark the start and end of synthesis of
polypeptide chains on ribosome.
a) State the codes for the
i) Start codon: (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
ii) Stop codons; (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
b) i) Define the term genetic code. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
ii) Outline any four basic features of a genetic code. (4 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(C) Explain why the genetic code for an amino acid is a 3 base code rather than a 2 base code.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

30. Explain what is meant by the following terms.

(a) Semi-conservative replication of DNA. (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Conservative replication of DNA. (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 209 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

31. State where each of the following is found in a cell.

1
(i) DNA: ( marks)
2
..............................................................................................................................................................
1
(ii) RNA: ( marks)
2
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Give three structual differences between DNA and RNA. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) What is the genetic significance of DNA replication? (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(d) Give two ways that suggests that DNA is heredity material. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

32. (a) The diagram below shows two nucleotide base pair in the segment of DNA molecule. Label
each part of the figure in the spaces provide.

(b) Why is complementary base pairing important in the DNA structure? (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) If 15% of the nucleotide in a DNA molecule contain guanine, what percentage of the
nucleotide contain each of the following bases? (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 210 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

33. (a) The figure below shows DNA replicating,describe what is occuring at each lettered section of
the figure.

Part a: (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
part b: (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
part C: (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Why is it important that exact copies of DNA are produced during replication? (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) State any three features that make DNA a good storage compound for genetic information.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 211 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

34. The figure below shows a section of DNA nolecule.

(a) Name parts labeled A,B, and C. (3 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) The mRNA code for the amino acid serine is UCA.
(i) Give the DNA code for serine. (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Give the tRNA for serine. (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) (i) What type of molecule is the product of translation.? (01 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Describe the role of tRNA in the translation process. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

35. (a) Describe two differences between a DNA molecule and tRNA molecule. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 212 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(b) Explain how DNA molecule;

(i) codes genetic information. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) is able to produce an exact copy of its self during replication. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Describe two different types of gene mutation may lead to production of different proteins.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 213 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

9.2 Cell division

1. Which of the following events occur both in mitosis and meiosis?

A. Synapsis C. Crossing over

B. DNA synthesis D. Halving of chromosome number

2. The function of meiosis in gamete formation is to

A. Maintain the chromosome number and produce genetically similar gametes
B. Halve the chromosome number and produce genetically similar gametes
C. Halve the chromosome number and produce genetically variable gametes
D. Maintain the chromosome number and produce genetically variable gamates

3. At which one of the following stages of cell division does a cell have the same nucleic content as

that at metaphase I?

A. Anaphase I C. Telophase II
B. Metaphase II D. Prophase II

Kato Maxmillian 214 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

4. What stage of cell division is shown in figure one

A. metaphase of mitosis. C. prophase II of meiosis.

B.metaphase of meiosis. D. metaphase I of meiosis

5. Figure 1 below represent a pair of homologous chromosomes during meiosis. If crossing over

occurs at the point labeled as Q, t he genotypes in the gametes formed would be.

A. 2Ab, 2aB C. 1Ab, 1AB, 1ab, 1aB

B. 1AA, 1aa, 1BB, 1bb D. 2AB, 2ab

6. It is difficult to observe individual chromosomes during interphase because

A. the DNA is not yet replicated

B. they uncoil to form long thin strands
C. they are dispersed.
D. homlogous chromosomes do not pair up until division starts.

7. Which one of the following statements is true.

A. meiosis produces gametes for sexual reproduction or spores for asexual reproduction
B. only diploid cells divide by meiosis but both haploid and diploid cells can divide by mitosis
C. if mitosis produces a multi-cellular organism after fertilisation, but before mitosis, that
organism is haploid.
D. if motosis produces a multi-cellular organism but meiosis occurs before fertilisation, that
organism is haploid.

Kato Maxmillian 215 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

8. Which one of the following events takes place during the late metaphases of mitotic cell division?

A. Nucleolus disappears.
B. Chromosomes arrange themselves on the equator of spindle
C. Chromatids part company and migrate to opposite poles of cell
D. Chromatids draw apart at the centromere region.

9. Prokaryotic cells reproduce by a process called?

A.mitosis. B. meiosis. C. binary fission. D. binary fusion

10. During cross-over, portions of chromatids

A. double the amount of DNA in each chromosome
B. move autosomes to sex chromosomes.
C. break off and attach to adjascent chromatids on the holomogous chromosome
separate from each other and move to opposite poles of the cell.

11. In which phase of meiosis do tetrads form?

A. prophase I. B. telophase I. C. metaphase II. D. anaphase II

12. meiosis II
A. is preceded by copying the DNA.
B. separates chromatids into separate poles of the cell.
C. separates homologous chromosomes into separate poles of the cell.
D. produces diploid offspring cells.

13. In oognesis, a diploid reproductive cells divide meiotically to produce.

A. one diploid gamete. C. one haploid gamete.

B. four diploid gametes. D. four haploid gametes.

14. In eukaryotic cells, DNA is copied a phase of the cell cycle called....

A. M phase. B. S phase. C. G1 phase. D. G2 phase

Kato Maxmillian 216 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

15. Which of the following is synthesized at interphase during mitosis?

A. rRNA B. mRNA C. DNA D. tRNA

16. The cytoplasm of a eukaryotic cell divides by a process of called

A. mitosis. B. meiosis. C. replication. D. cytokinesis.

17. The fibers that extent from centrosome to centrosome during mitosis are called

A. polar fibers. B. spindle fibers. C. kinetochore fibers. D. binary fibers.

18. In the G0 phase, cells

A.synthesise DNA. C. exit from the cell cycle.

B prepare for cell division. D. move their chromosomes to the cell equator.

19. Which of these stages of prophase 1 deals with the paternal and maternal chromosomes coming

together and pairing up?

A. Pachytene B. Diplotene C. Zygotene D. Leptotene

20. A cell with four chromosomes undergoes a cell cycle including mitosis. Which diagram correctly

shows the changes in chromatid number during interphase?

21. During synapsis, the,

A. DNA in each chromosome is copied. C. cytoplasm divides.

B.spindle fibers disappear. D. chromosomes line up to their homologues.

Kato Maxmillian 217 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

STRUCTURED QUESTIONS

22. (a) State Mendel’s law of independent assortment. (2 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
b) Explain how independent assortment brings about genetic variation. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
c) Give three significances of mitosis to an organism. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
d) Give four differences between meiosis and mitosis. (4 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

23. (a) In the spaces provided below, label each figure with the phase of mitosis that it represents.

(b)List five main phases of the cell cycle, and briefly explain what occurs in each phase.(3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 218 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Describe cytokinesis in a plant cell. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

24. a) Define the following terms.

i) Synapsis. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
ii) Diploid. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
iii) Crossing over.
(2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
iv) Cell cycle. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
b) State two feature of mitosis which conserve the chromosome constitution. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
c) Give two differences between mitosis in plant and animal cell. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
d) What are the advantages of possessing two sets of chromosomes in cells. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 219 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

25. Define the following terms.

(i) Haploid: (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Diploid: (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Mention any four differences between mitosis in plants and that in animals. (4 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c)Briefly explain how crossing over results into variety. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

26. (a). State FOUR differences between mitosis and meiosis. (4 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b)What two features of mitosis ensure that the diploid number of chromosomes is maintained.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Describe two roles of mitosis. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 220 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

27. (a) In the space provide below, label each figure with the phase of meiosis that it represents

(b) Describe two ways in which genetic recombination occur during meiosis. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) How do products of meiosis I differ from those of meiosis II? (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 221 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

9.3 Protein synthesis

1. Which type of molecule is the end product of translation?

A. Amino acid B. DNA C. mRNA D. Polypeptide

2. Double helix is composed of one old protein strand and one new protein strand Which one of the

following is the first step during protein synthesis?

A. Translation C. Transcription
B. Transportation D. DNA replication

3. During protein synthesis, the anticodon base sequence on tRNA is AUG. What is the base

sequence on template DNA strand?

A. UAC B. ATG C. AUG D. TAC

4. Translation of the genetic code the

A. Formation of mRNA B. Formation of tRNA

C. Replication of DNA D. Formation of polypeptides

5. Which one of the following statements is correct about base pairing in nucleic acids?
A. Guanine pairs with adenine.
B. Purines only pair with pyrimidines.

Kato Maxmillian 222 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

C. Purines pair with other purines.

D. Hydrogen bonds only occur between pyrimidines

6. Which one of the following statements correctly describes the transcription of DNA?

A. produces amino acids C. it produces mRNA

B. it results in an increased DNA synthesis D. it occurs at the surface if a ribosome

7. The information required for protein synthesis is called to the ribosome by

A. transfer RNA B. ribosomal RNA C. DNA D. Messenger RNA

8. How many different arrangments of four bases into triplets can be made?

A. 3+4 B 3x4. C. 34 D. 43

9. Protein synthesis will not occur in a cell lacking

A. nucleoli and ribosomes C. nuclei and nucleoplasm

B. ribosomes and nucleoplasm D. endoplasmic reticulum

10. In an outline for protein synthesis DNA → mRNA → polypeptide

stage 1 stage 2

stage 2 represents

A. transcription. B. translation. C. transduction. D. transformation.

11. Which type of molecule is the end product of translation?

A. Amino acid B. DNA C. mRNA D. polypeptide

12. The free end of the tRNA which serves as a binding site of a specific amino acid terminates in the

triplet.

A. ACC B. CCA C. UGA D. AUG

Kato Maxmillian 223 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

13. The information required for protein synthesis is called to the ribosome by

A. transfer RNA B. ribosomal RNA C. DNA D. Messenger RNA

14. What is the maximum number of triplets of nucleotides that could code for the 20 amino acids?

A. 3 B. 6 C. 48 D. 64

15. Protein synthesis will not occur in a cell lacking

A. nucleoli and ribosomes C. nuclei and nucleoplasm

B. ribosomes and nucleoplasm D. endoplasmic reticulum

16. If the bases on the mRNA are ACU, what would be the corresponding bases on the original DNA

coding Strand during protein synthesis?

A. ACT B. UGA C. TGA D. ATU

STRUCTURED QUESTIONS

17. (a)The diagram below summaries the events tant occur during translation. label each part of the
figure in the spaces provided.

(b) Explain why methionine is the first amino acid in every growing polypetide. (02 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 224 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(c) Explain the relationship of the following terms in each of the following pairs.
(i) Regulator gene and repressor protein: (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) operator and operon: (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(iii) intron and exon. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

18. The figure below summaries the processes of protein synthesis. use it to answer questions that
follow.

(i) Which of the first anticodon used in protein synthesis from this mRNA? (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) What is the anticodon sequence in tRNA 1. (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 225 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(iii) Give the DNA triplet code which is recognised by tRNA 2. (1mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(iv) Give the amino acid carried by tRNA 2. (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) i) Explain what changes will occur in translation apparatus to allow codon 6 to be translated.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
ii) What are the possible codon sequences for codon 6.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

19. The figure below shows a polyribosome.

(a) Name (03 marks)

X,
..............................................................................................................................................................
Y,
..............................................................................................................................................................
Z;
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) In which direction are the ribosomes moving? Explain how you are able to decide on their
dirction of movement. (03 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 226 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

9.4 Mendel’s monohybrid and dihybrid inheritance.

1. All the allelles present in the population of a species are called the populations

A. Gene frequency B. Gene pool C. Genome D. Genotype

2. Which one of the following representations of genotypes would produce only one type of

gametes

A. TtHh B. ttHh C. TTHh D. Tthh

3. When tall red flowered plant was crossed with a a short and white flowered plant, all the off
springs were tall and red flowered. When the F1 were selfed, theF2 plants phenotypes were in a

ratio of 3:1. This suggests the occurance of

A. Epistasis B. Recombination C. Crossing over D. Linkage

Kato Maxmillian 227 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

4. An occurance of a phenotypic ratio of 3:1 in a dihybrid cross is an indication of

A.Linked genes
B.Crossing over of chromosomes
C.Failure of homologous chromosomes to separate
D. Dominance

5. What would be the phenotypic ratio of the offspring when a test cross is carried out on an

individual who is a carrier for albinism

A. 3:1 B. 1:2:1 C. 1:1 D. 9:3:3:1

6. What would be the phenotypic ratio of the offspring when a test cross is carried out on an

individual who is a carrier for albinism?

A. 1 : 2 : 1. B. 3 : 1. C. 9 : 3 : 3 : 1. D. 1 : 1.

7. In humans brown eyes are dominant to blue eyes. A cross between a heterozygous brown eyed

individual and a recessive blue eyed individual would result in a phenotypic ratio of

A. 9:3:3:1. B. 1:2:1. C. 3:1. D. 1:1.

8. The scientist who first described the principles of dominance, segregation, and independent

assortment was

A. Charles Darwin. B. Albert Einstein. C. Louis Pasteur. D. Gregor Mendel

9. The results of crossing a red flowered Japanese four oclock plant with a white flowered Japanese

four o’clock are all pink offspring. This demonstrates the principle of

A. incomplete dominance. C. mutation.

B. multiple alleles. D. crossing over.

Kato Maxmillian 228 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

10. In a plant species, the allele for tallness (T) and blue flowers (B) is dominant to that for shortness
(t) and white flowers (b). A tall plant with blue flowers was crossed with a short plant with white

flowers. The results obtained were:

1 Tall blue : 1 Tall white : 1 Short blue : 1 Short white
The genotype of the tall blue flowered parent was

A. TtBb B. ttBB C. TTBb D. Ttbb

11. The phenotype of an organism

A. is due to its genotype.
B. is represented with letters.
C. occurs only in homozygous dominant organisms.
D. is also called the organisms genetic makeup

12. The allele of a trait that always shows up in the F1 generation is said to be

A. recessive. B. sex linked. C. dominant. D. homozygous

13. Establishing the genotype of an organism by crossing it with a homozygous recessive individual

is carrying out a

A. Test cross C. Back cross

B. Dihybrid cross D. Monohybrid cross

14. In guinea pigs, the allele for rough coat (R) is dominant over the smooth coat (r) and that for
black coat (B) is dominant over one for white coat (b). The allele for coat type and colour are not
linked. A cross between rough black guinea pig and rough white one produced 28 rough black,
31 rough white, 11 smooth black and 10 smooth white. Which one of the following could be the

genotype of the parents?

A. RrBb x Rrbb B. RRBB x RRbb C. RRBb x Rrbb D. RrBB x Rrbb

Kato Maxmillian 229 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

15. In flowers, the heterozygous condition of the alleles for Red petals (R) and white petals (W), are
pink. Which one of the following proportions and colour of petals is correct if a pink flowered

plant is crossed with a red flowered plant?

A. 3 red : 1 white B. 3 red : 1 pink C. 1 pink : 1 red D. 1 pink : 1 white

16. A coffee plant known as to be heterozygous for a recessive defect which makes the plant fail to
produce viable seeds, was self-pollinated and gave rise to 600 seedlings. How many of the

seedlings were heterozygous.

A. 150. B. 200 C. 300 D. 400

17. The phenotype resulting from a cross between red eyed and white eyed fruit flies depends on

which parent is red eyed. This means that the gene for eye colour is

A. Polygenic B. Sex linked C. Homogametic D. Sex limited

18. What would be the proportions of the F1 generation if a double recessive parent is crossed with a

double heterozygous one?

A. 1 : 1 : 1 : 1 B. 1 : 2 : 2 : 1 C. 9 : 3 : 3 : 1 D. 1 : 3

19. Which one of the following phenotypic ratios results from Dihybrid inheritance?

A. 1 : 1 B. 1 : 2 : 1 C. 3 : 1 D. 9 : 3 : 3 : 1

20. Which of the following is an example of monohybrid inheritance in man?

A. Colour of eyes C. Inheritance of haemophilla

B. Albinism D. Height

21. Which of the following stages best describes Mendels first law?

A. Metaphase I C. Prophase II
B. Anaphase D. Metaphase II

Kato Maxmillian 230 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

22. A cotton plant known to be heterozygous for a recessive gene defect which makes the plant fail to
produce seeds was self pollinated and gave rise to 500 seedlings. How many of the seedlings will

fail to produce seeds?

A. 150 B. 250 C. 125 D. 300

23. A blue eyed man marries two wives, both brown eyed. Two children one brown eyed, the other
blue eyed are born to the first wife. The second wife bears three children all brown eyed. Which

one of the people named would be homozygous dominant?

A. The man C.The second wife

B. The first wife D. The three children of the second wife.

24. In mice, the allele for yellow fur is dominant to agouti fur. A self cross between mice with yellow
fur produces offsprings in the ratio of 2 yellow to 1 agouti. This result indicates that the allele for

yellow fur is

A. recessive B. codominant C. lethal D. linked

25. When a heterozygote (grey body, long wing) was crossed with a homozygote (black body, short
wing), the off springs phenotypic ratio was 1 grey body, long wing to 1 black body vestigial wing

because

A. It is a dihybrid C. There was linkage

B. it is a test cross D. The was codominance

26. In cattle, the gene for the polled conditions is dominant over that for the horned condition. A
heterozygous polled bull is mated to a cow whose horns were removed when still a calf. The

offspring will be either;

A. heterozygous polled or homozygous horned
B. heterozygous horned or homozygous horned
C. homozygous polled or heterozygous horned
D. homozygous horned or homozygous polled

Kato Maxmillian 231 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

27. A white cow was mated to a red bull and the offspring was roan. This result shows:

A. heterozygosity C. crossing over

B. hybrid vigour D. incomplete dominance

28. Which one of the following is determine when a test cross is carried out?

A. phenotype of an organism C. the genotype of an organism

B. segregation of chromosomes D. the heterosis of an organism

29. Incomplete dominance is a result of;

A. weak genes
B. recessive genes
C. interaction between two or more chromosomes
D. interaction between alleles

30. In horses chestnut coat is dominant to black coat and trolling gait is dominant to pacing. A horse
that is hybrid for both traits has the genotype Cc Tt. If a horse who is a chestnut pacer is bred
several times to a black troller and they always have chestnut trollers and black trollers. What are

the genotypes of the parents?

A. CcTT x ccTT B. CcTt x ccTt C. Cctt x ccTT D. Cctt x ccTt

STRUCTURED QUESTIONS

31. In a garden pea plant there are two forms of heights. When a pure breeding tall pea plant was
crossed with a short pea plant all the offsprings obtained were tall when the offsprings were
selfed a phenotype ration was obtained in F2
a. Using suitable genetic symbols determine the genotypic ratio of the F2 generation. (4 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 232 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
b) What are the phenotypic and genotypic ratios of the F2 generation. (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
c) Explain how you would determine the genotype of the F1 tall pea plants formed. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
d. Suppose 700 pea plants where produced in the F2 generation
(i) How many were tall? (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii)How many were short? (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

32. (a) State Mendel’s first Law of inheritance. (2 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Manx cats donot have tails.When a manx cut is mated with a normal long tailed cat,
approximately half of the offsprings are long tailed and approximately half are manx. When two
manx cats are mated, the ratio of offspring is 2 manx to 1 long tailed cat.
(i) What does this suggest about the inheritance of manx condition in cats?. (3 marks)

Kato Maxmillian 233 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Show by means of a cross, the inheritance of manx condition when two manx are mated.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

33. In an oil seed plant species, the allele for tallness is dominant over that of dwarfness. Meanwhile
the allele for chlorophyll production and non-chlorophyll show incomplete dominance. The
heterozygous plants are variegated.
(a) Using suitable symbols, construct a diagram of a cross between a tall plant with green leaves
and a dwarf plant with variegated leaves, to show the genotypes and phenotypes of the offsprings.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Explain why 25% of the offspring of the cross in (a) would fail to survive. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 234 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

34. Suppose a man who is a tongue roller marries a woman who is a non-tongue roller and all the
children in the F1 are tongue rollers
(a) Workout the phenotypic and genotypic ratio as obtained in the F2 generation. (4 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) What is the probability that the 4th born is a non-tongue roller? (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

35. Gene R for red colour can only express itself in a Dihybrid cross in the presence of gene C which
complements its action to form colour. When two white flowering genotypes CCrr and ccRR
were crossed the F1 generation were all red flowers.
(a) (i) What would be the genotypes of F2 when the F1 progeny are selfed? (Show your working).
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
ii)What would be the phenotype ratio of the F2 progeny? (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 235 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(b) Comment on the F2 phenotype ratio you have obtained in (a)(ii) above. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

36. (a) State Mendel’s first law of inheritance and explain what it means. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) (i) State the stages of meiosis that illustrate this law. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Explain what takes place in the stages you have named in a (ii) above. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) In human beings, brown eye are usually dominant over blue eyes. Suppose a blue-eyed man
marries a brown eyed woman whose father was blue-eye. What proportion of their children
would you predict will have blue eyes? Show your working. (6 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 236 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

37. (a) State four situations where Mendel’s law would not apply. (4 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) In an animal species, individuals that are homlogous for gene A or its alles die. Another
independent gene B in the homozygous state, blocks this lethal effect,otherwiae gene B has no
other effect on the organism
(i) Work out the expected phenotypic ratio of the viable offspring in a cross of individuals of
AaBb and AaBB genotype. (5 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) State the type of gene in interaction in b(i). (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

38. What do you understand by the following terms?

i) Allele; (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
ii) co-dominance; (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 237 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

b) In cats the allelic gene for black colour and ginger colour shows co-dominance. This gene is
sex-linked. A male cat with ginger coat colour was crossed with a female with black coat colour.
Using genetic symbols work out the genotypes of across of the F1 off springs. (5 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

39. (a) Define the following terms;

i) A reciprocal cross; (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
ii) A pure line; (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b)Tomato plants show variation in their leaf shape (describe as cut leaved and potato leaved)
and in their height (tall and dwarf). When cut leaved tall tomato plants were crossed with potato
leaved, dwarf tomato plants). F1 off springs were obtained. When the F1 off springs were
selfed,F2 off springs were obtained as shown below;
920 cut - leaved tall plants
291 potato - leaved tall plants
299 cut -leaved dwarf plants
101 potato - leaved dwarf plants
i) Carry out the selfing of F1 offsprings, to show the genotypes and phenotypes of F2 offsprings.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 238 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
ii) Explain how theF2 phenotypic ratio is obtained. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

9.5 Gene interactions, linkage, lethal genes etc.

1. In drosophila, there are red -eyed and white eyed types, the red eye being dominant over the
white, genes controlling eye colour and are sex linked. The ratio of the phenotypes resulting from

mating of a red-eyed male XY and a white eyed female XX is

A. 1 red-eyed :2 white-eyed C. All red-eyed

B. 1 red-eyed : 1 white-eyed D. 2 red -eyed : 1 white-eyed

2. In an experiment using maize with two contrasting characters, the F2 progeny were made up of 3

: 1 ratio instead of the 9 : 3 : 1 Dihybrid ratio. This is most likely to be a

A. Crossing over C. Ordinary linkage

B. Sex linkage D. Incomplete dominance

Kato Maxmillian 239 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

3. A muscle cell of an animal was found to contain 24 chromosomes. How many chromosomes

would a germinal epithelium cell within the ovary of the animal contain?

A. 24 B. 12 C. 48 D. 36

4. Which one of the following is caused by a defect on a recessive sex-linked allele?

A. Albinism C. Sickle cell

B. Colour blindness D. ABO blood group system

5. A couple had children with disorder that appeared only in sons. Which one of the following

statements is true about this occurrence? The disorder is

A. Sex linked and the mother is a carrier
B. Caused by multiple alleles
C. Sex linked and both parents are carriers
D. Sex limited to males and the father is ac carrier

6. An occurrence of a phenotypic ratio 3 : 1 in a Dihybrid cross is an indication of

A. Linked genes
B. Crossing over chromosomes
C. Failure of homologous chromosomes to separate
D. Dominance

7. A plant has 20 chromosomes on its receptacle cells. What would be the number of chromosomes

in its endosperm?

A. 80 B. 40 C. 30 D. 10

8. Which one of the following is true about sex-linked characters in humans?

A. Females never suffer from the trait
B. Females do not pass on the character to their sons.
C. Females are either normal or carriers
D. Males are either carriers or sufferers

Kato Maxmillian 240 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

9. Which one of the following phenotype ratios results from a recombination due to linkage?

A. 4 : 1 : 1 : 4 B. 1 : 2 : 1 C. 2 : 1 D. 1 : 1

10. A man of blood group B married a woman of blood group AB. Which one of the following blood

genotypes would not be of their children?

A. AO B. BO C. AA D. BB

11. A boy has blood group A and his sister has blood group B. Which combination of genotype

cannot belong to their parents?

Mother Father
A. I A I A IBIo
B.I A I B I AI B
C.I o I o I AI B
D.I B I o I AI o

12. Which of the following statements is not true of a recessive sex-linked character in humans?
A. It is found more frequently in males than in females
B. It does not appear in a female unless it also appeared in the paternal parent
C. It rarely appears in both father and son, then only if the maternal parent is heterozygous
D. It is found more frequently in the female than in the male

13. A trait that is carried on the X chromosome and has no allele on the Y chromosome is
A. an exception to the principle of codominance.
B. normal sex-linked inheritance.
C. lethal in females.
D. normal autosomal inheritance

Kato Maxmillian 241 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

14. In humans, normal color vision is dominant over color blindness. A color blind male marries a
female who is a carrier for color blindness. What is the probability that a color blind boy, X n Y,

would be born to these parents?

A. 0% B. 25% C. 50% D. 75%

15. Since blood groups AB0 are codominant and individual with IA IB will have blood group

A. B. B. A C.O. D. AO

16. Which one of the following human traits is not a polygenic trait?

A. skin colour. B. eye colour. C. height. D. ABO blood groups.

17. A trait whose expression is affected by the presence of a sex hormone is said to be

A. sex-influenced. C. X-linked.
B. sex-linked. D. Y-linked.

18. Which one of the following cannot be parents of a child of blood group O?
A. Man of blood group A and woman of blood group B.
B. Both man and woman of blood group A
C. Both man and woman of blood group B
D. Man of blood group AB and woman of blood group O.

19. Which of the following is the phenotypic ratio due to lethal genes;

A. 2:1 B. 4:1:1:4 C. 1:2:1 D. 1:1

20. In humans, PKU can be treated by

A. insulin injections. B. diet. C. gene therapy. D. surgery.

Kato Maxmillian 242 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

STRUCTURED QUESTIONS

21. In a drosophila, the gene for wing length and eye colour are sex- linked with normal wings and
red eyes being dominant to miniature wings and white eyes respectively.
(a) In a cross between a miniature-winged red eyed male and a homozygous normal wing white
eyed female, explain the expected appearance of theF1 and F2 generations. (5 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Crossing a female from theF1 genarations above with miniature wing white eyed male gave
the following results
Normal wing white eyed males and females = 35
Normal wing red eyed males and females = 17
Miniature wing red eyed males and females = 18
Miniature wing white eyed males and females = 36
Account for the appearance and numbers of the phenotypes listed above. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

22. In a variety of beans, yellow seed colour is dominant over green and smooth seed coat is
dominant over wrinkled. When yellow smooth beans were crossed with green wrinkled beans, all
F1 had yellow smooth seed. The F2 progeny yielded 556 seeds.

Kato Maxmillian 243 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(a) Assuming no linkage, state the four possible characters in the F2 progeny and their
corresponding phenotypic ratios. (4 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Calculate the number of individuals for each of the characters in the F2 population. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Calculate the percentage crossover in this experiment. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

23. In Drosophila, the genes for broad abdomen and long wing are dominant over the genes for
narrow abdomen and vestigial wing. Pure breeding strains of the double dominant variety were
crossed with a double recessive variety and a test cross was carried out on the F1 generation.
(a) Using suitable symbols, work out the expected phenotype ratio of the test cross of the F1
generation, if the genes for abdomen width and length of wing are linked. (6 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 244 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) It was however observed that when the test cross of the F1 generation was carried out, the
following results were obtained. (03 marks)
Broad abdomen, long wing 380
Narrow abdomen, vestigial wing 396
Broad abdomen, vestigial wing 14
Narrow abdomen, long wing 10
Calculate the distance in units, between the genes ,for abdomen width and length of wing.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

24. Mary, a student, with blood group A had a baby with blood group O. Peter, a fellow Student who
she named as responsible for the pregnancy, denied responsibility. The case was then taken to
court. The following facts were determined.
Peters mother was of blood group A and father, blood group B. State whether the court will find
Peter guilty or innocent. Show how you reached your conclusion. (6 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 245 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

25. (a) What is meant by the following?

(i) Sex-limited character. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Sex-linked character. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) In fruit fly Drosophilla,body colour is either grey or black, and wing length is either normal or
vestigial. The two characters are autosomal. A normal wing grey-bodied male fruit fly was mated
with a vestigial wing black-bodied female fruit fly. All offspring were were normal wing
grey-bodied. On maturity , when those offspring were selfed, it resulted into F2 progeny of about
75% normal wing grey bodied and 25% vestigial wing black body. Using appropriate symbols,
explains the results obtained.. (6 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

26. a) Define the following terms; back cross, sex linked and sex limited characters.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 246 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
b) Which cells in cereals are haploid, diploid and triploid?
Haploid.. (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
Diploid. (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
Triploid. (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Describe one method by which polyploidy can be artificially induced.. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

27. (a) In sugarcane the genes for yellow midrib (y) and long internodes (n) are recessive to green
plants midrib (Y) and short internode (N), and are on the same chromosomes. A yellow
sugarcane with long internode was crossed with a sugarcane heterozygous for yellow midrib and
long internodes. The offspring were: 256 YyNn, 38 Yynn
272 yynn, 34 yyNn
Calculate the cross over value.. (4 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
b)In man the gene for red blood corpuscle shape is represented by alleles E (ediptical) and e
(normal), while another gene for rhesus blood is represented by alleles Rhesus positive(R) and
Rhesus negative (r). Alleles E and R are dominant over e and r respectively. The two genes are
linked. A person may have alleles E and R on one chromosome and e and r on its homologous
partner.
State the possible genotypes of the gamete if
i)There is crossing over.. (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 247 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

ii)There is no crossing over.. (1 mark)

..............................................................................................................................................................
iii) If a man with genotype EeRr marries a woman with genotype eerr, what is the chance that this
couple will produce a child with the genotype Eerr if linkage is complete? (Show your working).
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
c) Give any one disadvantage of linkage.. (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................

28. (a) Explain using appropriate symbols, the possible blood groups of children whose parents are
both heterozygous, the father being of blood group A and te mother of B.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) If both parents have non-identical twins, what is the probability that both twins will have
blood group A?. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 248 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

29. (a) In cats, the genes conrolling the coat colour are carried on the X chromosomes and are
codominant. A black-coat female mated with a ginger-coat male produced a liter consisting of
black male and tortoiseshell female kittens. What is the expected F2 phenonotypic ratio? Explain
the results.. (5 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 249 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

10 EVOLUTION

10.1 Mutation and Variation

1. Which one of the following chromosomal mutations cause Downs syndrome?

A. Non-disjunction B. Deletion C. Inversion D. Duplication

2. Which of the following abnormalities does not result from non-disjunction?

A. Klinefelters syndrome C. Haemophilia

B. Turners syndrome D. Downs syndrome

3. The more variation in a population, the greater its potential to

A. give rise to gene flow. C. produce more offspring.

B. adapt to new changes in its environment. D. grow fast

Kato Maxmillian 250 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

4. The following are trisomic conditions except

A. Klinefelter’s syndrome. C. Down’s syndrome.

B. Turner’s syndrome. D. XXX female

5. Variation among organisms which produce by fission can be due to

A. Crossing over C. Random fertilization

B. Mutation D. Independent assortment

6. One of these is brought about by point mutation:

A. Development of klinefelters syndrome C. Development of Downs syndrome

B. Development of haemoglobin S D. Development of Turners syndrome

7. Hydroxylamine a mutagen converts cytosine to a compound which pairs with adenine. If DNA is

treated with hydroxylamine, the resulting mutation is.

A. Deletion C. an insertion B. Substitution D. an inversion

8. Polyploidy refers to the condition when

A. Chromosomes do not replicate at cell division
B. Part of a chromosome breaks off and is joined up the wrong way round
C. More than a pair of each chromosome is present
D. More than one set of genes is present on a chromosomes

9. Which of the following conditions result from gene mutation?

A. Klinefelters syndrome C. Sickle cell anaemia

B. Turners syndrome D. Downs syndrome

Kato Maxmillian 251 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

10. Sickle cell anaemia is caused by a double recessive gene and sufferers usually die before maturity.

The continued existence of the sickle cell allele among the human population demonstrates

A. Drug resistance C. In breeding

B. Heterozygous advantage D. Genetic drift

11. The maintenance of the fairly constant frequency for a sickle cell allele is an example of

A. incomplete dominanc C. natural selection

B. heterozygote advantage D. genetic viability

12. In humans, albinism is recessive to normal pigmentation, if the frequency of the albino allele in a

population is 10%. What would be the expected proportion of albinos in the population?

A. 0.9 B. 0.3 C. 0.1 D. 1.0

13. Which one of the following stages of meiosis I are core determinants of genetic variation?

prophase I and metaphase I C. anaphase I and metaphase I

B. prophase I and telophase I D. interphase I and prophase I

14. Which of the following factors does not maintain a constant allele frequency?

A. Genetic drift C. Large population

B. Random breeding D. Equal fertility of genotypes

15. Haemophillia is a sex-linked trait caused by a rescessive gene. When a normal person marries a

carrier woman for haemophiia, the probability of the couple a normal son is

A. 0% B. 25% C. 50% D. 75%

16. Which of the following are examples of continuous variation?

A. Mass, height, skin colour B. Mass, blood groups, skin colour

C. Sex, mass, height D. Tongue rolling, sex, blood groups

Kato Maxmillian 252 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

17. The ability for man to taste phenyl thiocarbomate (PTC) is an example of discontinuous variation.
When the percentage frequency of tasters for PTC is 71.2%, what is the genotype of frequency of

homozygous tasters?

A. 28.8% B. 53.7% C. 46.3% D. 49.7%

18. From which of the following sources of variation, which one has the highest chance of producing

new species?

A. Crossing over. C. Mutation.

B. Independent assortment. D.Random fusion of gamates

STRUCTURED QUESTIONS

19. a) Define the term variation. (2 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
b) Outline any 4 differences between continuous and discontinuous Variation.. (4 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
c) What is the significance of variation?. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

20. (a) Distinguish between continuous and discontinuous variation.. (2 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 253 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(b) Explain how each of the following causes variation in sexually reproducing individuals
(i) Crossing over during meiosis.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Independent assortment of chromosomes during meiosis.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

21. Figure 4 shows how sickle cell anaemia has affected a family line. Sickle cell anaemia is a
recessive genetic defeat which is not linked. (Individuals are numbered 1,2,3,,,,,,,,,,12)

(i) State the numbers of all the individuals in the family line that are certain to be heterozygous
for this gene.. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 254 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(ii) What is the probability that individual 6 is heterozygous for this gene?(Show your working).
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(iii) The parasite which causes malaria digests haemoglobin in the red blood cells. Suggest two
reasons why an individual who is heterozygous for this gene may show resistance to malaria.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(iv) State the difference between individuals who have sickle cell anaemia and those that have
sickle cell trait.. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

22. Haemoglobin is a respiratory pigment. A haemoglobin molecule is made up of a protein with a

quaternary structure, combined with four non-protein haem groups.
(a) Explain what is meant by quaternary structure.. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b)Describe two properties of haemoglobin that enable it to function efficiently as a respiratory
pigment.. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) A point mutation has occurred in the gene H which controls the synthesis of normal
haemoglobin. This mutated alleleH S is codominant to the normal allele H N , and results in the
synthesis of an abnormal type of haemoglobin which reduces the ability of the blood to carry
oxygen. In the homozygous state, the H S allele causes the condition sickle cell anaemia.

Kato Maxmillian 255 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(i) Explain what is meant by a point mutation.. (2 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) A woman is homozygous for the H S allele and her partner is heterozygous. Using a genetic
diagram, determine the probability that their first child will have sickle cell anaemia.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

23. Cystic fibrosis is a lethal hereditary defect of the internal organs determined by a recessive gene.
(a) List down the symptoms of the condition.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) A couple has a child with cystic fibrosis but neither the husband not the wife nor any of their
parents have the disease.

(i) Calculate the probability that if this couple had a child, it will have cystic fibrosis (show your
reasoning) . (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) What is meant by the term Allopolyploidy? . (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 256 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

10.2 Application of Hardy-Weinberg principle

1. What would be the frequency of the heterozygote genotype in an infinitely large population if the

frequency of alleles A and a are represented by x and y respectively

A.x2 B. y 2 C. xy D. 2xy

2. What is the frequency of the heterozygous genotype if there is one albino in a population of ten

thousand individuals?

A. 0.01 B. 0.99 C. 0.0198 D. 0.0099

3. ”The Hardy Weinberg principle can be applicable in the following instances except when”
A. population size is small
B. migration occurs only at the beginning of the breeding season.
C. mutations occur at a constant rate
D. natural selection does not occur.

4. If a population of four O’clock flowers consists of five RR plants (Red flowers) two Rr plants
(pink flowers) and one rr plant (white flowers) , the phenotype frequency of plants with pink

flowers is

A. 0.125. B. 0.25. C. 0.5 D 0.75

Kato Maxmillian 257 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

5. If a population described in question 4, the frequency of R allele of plants

A. 0.125. B. 0.25. C. 0.5 D. 0.75

6. All the alleles present in the population of a species are called the populations;

A. genome. B. gene frequency. C. genotype. D. gene pool.

7. For a population to be in a genetic equilibrium.

A. individuals must not enter or leave the population.
B. the population must be evolving.
C. the population must be small.
D. selection must occur.

8. The smallest unit in which evolution occurs is the

A. an individual organism. C. a kingdom.

B. a population. D. a species

9. The occurance of a genetic defect among individuals of an isolated population in a percentage

higher than expected is likely to be a result of

A. natural selection. C. adaptation.

B. speciation. D. genetic drift.

10. Any violation for the conditions necessary for the Hardy-Weinberg equilibrium can result in

A. independent assortment. C. disorganising selection.

B. evolution. D. eventual extinction.

11. The movement of reproductive idividuals from one population to another results into.

A. infertile of spring. C. genetic drift.

B. spontaneous mutation. D. gene flow.

Kato Maxmillian 258 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

12. Genetic drift is most likely to occur in.

A. small populations. C. populations that migrate.

B. large populations. D. population with low frequency of mutation.

13. Assortive mating occurs when.

A. one animal mates with a variety of other individuals during its life time.
B. males choose to mate with females that are most fertile.
C. an individual chhoses mates that are similar to its self.
D. females choose to mate with males that are from other populations.

STRUCTURED QUESTIONS

14. In humans, albinism is caused by an autosomal recessive allele. On average 1 person in 10,000 is
an albino
(a) Give two characteristics of an albino.. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Using Hardy Weinberg formula p2 + 2pq + q 2 = 1, determine the
(i) Frequency of the albino allele in the human population. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Frequency of the heterozygous genotype in the population . (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 259 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(c) Explain why it is difficult to eliminate recessive allelles from a population.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

15. (a) What do you understand by gene pool?. (2 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) What may cause a gene pool of a population to be static? . (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) (i) State three factors that may contribute to the change in frequency of dominant and
recessive alleles in a population.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Explain how each factor stated in c(i) above may cause changes in the frequency of the
dominant and recessive alleles in a population.. (6 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

16. (a) Explain the effects of the following

(i) Heterozygote advantage in a popualtion with increasing gene flow. . (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 260 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(ii) Isolation of a population of a generation.. (3 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Why sicklecell tarit is prevalent in malaria prone areas.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

17. (a) Explain the meaning of the Hardy-Weinberg equilibrium principle.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) State four conditions that must be fulfilled in order for the principle to hold true. . (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Brown eyes in human population is caused by a dominant allele. If in a population, 84% of
the people have brown eyes, using Hardy- Weinberg formula, determine the percentage of the
population who are (i) heterozygous for eye colour. Show your working. . (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) homozygous dominant for eye colour. Show your working.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 261 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

18. (a) What kind of individuals in population are represented by the two ends of the bell curve?.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) What are the three main ways the variations in genotype arise in a population.?. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) What five assumption must be made for the Hardy-Weinberg genetic equilibrium to apply a
population.. (5 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

19. (a) List three factors that can cause evolution to take place.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Explain how Hardy-weinberg genetic equilibrium is affected by mutations.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) What is one potential negative consquence of random mating based on geographic proximity?.
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 262 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

20. (a) Define a gene pool.. (3 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Explain how each of the following causes change in allele’s frequqncy.
(i) sexual selection.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) small size population.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Explain why natural selection is effective at population level, but not organism level.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(e) Cystic fibrosis occurs in the population with a frequency of 1 in 2200. Calculate the frequency
of the carrier genotype.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 263 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

10.3 Darwin and Lamark’s theories of evolution

1. The appearance of genes of evolutionary advantage is a functions of

A. Chance C. Needs of the organism

B. Environmental demands D. Natures plan

2. What is the most basic raw material for evolution according to Charles Darwin?

A. Natural selection C. Variation

B. Struggle for existence D. Competition

3. If Lamacrk’s hypothesis of species modification were true, the children of a person who

developed large muscles by lifting would be born with.

A. smaller-than-average muscles.
B. normal-sized muscles
C. normal-sized muscles that would become larger only if the children also lifted weight.
D. larger-than-average muscels.

4. Darwin used the phrase” descent with modification” to mean that.

A. new species descended from the pre-existing species, and species must be able to change over
time.
B. organisms that descend from high elevations are modified as they acquire new traits.

Kato Maxmillian 264 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

C. all living organisms descended from a rescent common anscestor on the Galapogas islands.
D. all idividuals modify their behavior to survive and then pass those modifications on their
descendants.

5. Which one of the following is NOT part of Darwins theory of natural selection?
A. The members of a species differ from one another.
B. There is severe competition among organisms for available resources
C. Organisms strive to develop those traits that are most helpful in their particular environment.
D. Better adapted members of a species will survive and reproduce more successfully.

6. According to Darwin’s theory of natural selection.

A. individuals are moddified by adverse environmental conditions.
B. the environment affects all organisms in apopulation in the same way.
C. population of all organismsgrow unchecked under natural conditions.
D. orhanism that have more favourable traits tend to leave more offspring.

7. In an evolutionary sense, an individual organism has high fitness if it.

A. has a large number of acquired traits
B. can run long distances without becoming exhausted.
C. reproduces more successfully than other individuals.
D. evolves into another organism rather than becoming extinct.

STRUCTURED QUESTIONS

8. a) State Darwins theory of natural selection. (2 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) State three observations and two conclusions from which Darwin derived his theory.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 265 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(c) How does the modern view on evolution differ from Darwins view?. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

9. (a) Why are acquired traits not directly related to the process of evolution?. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) What is the relationship between evolution and natural selection.. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(C) Using the figure below, which of the parent birds shown below (A or B) appear to have
greater fithess. Explain your answer.. (3 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 266 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

10.4 Evidences of evolution

1. The similarities of the skeletal structures of moles, monkeys and whales lead to the conclusion

that they

A. Belong to the same class C. Descend from a common ancestor

B. Originate from the same environment D. Evolved convergingly

2. The camel family is found only in North Africa, Asia and South America. This is an example of

A. Adaptive radiation
C. Divergent distribution
B. Convergent radiation
D. Discontinuous distribution

3. Which of the following shows divergent evolution?

A. Wings of cockroach and bat B. Skeletons of a mouse and Cray fish

C. Fore limbs of a pigeon and a monkey D. Eyes of a locust and kite

4. Which of the following show divergent evolution?

A. Wings of a cockroach and a bat C. Fore limbs of a pigeon and a monkey

B. Skeleton of a mouse and cray fish D. Eyes of a locust and a kite

Kato Maxmillian 267 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

5. The following processes account for the discontinuous distribution of flora and fauna in the

worlds land masses.

1. Isolation 3. Migration
2. Continental drift, 4. Adaptive radiation

Which one of the following is the correct order for the occurrence of the process?

A. 1, 2, 3, 4 B. 2, 3, 4, 1 C. 2, 3, 1, 4 D. 4, 3, 2, 1

6. The possession of similar structures in organisms having different ancestral origin is a result of

A. Convergent evolution
C. Adaptive radiation
B. Divergent evolution
D. Parallel evolution

7. What is the process called by which different species evolve similar traits?

A. coevolution. C. divergent evolution.

B. convergent evolution. D. adaptive radiation.

8. The evolutionary pattern illustarted by finches on the Galapagos island is an example of

A. coevolution. C. divergent evolution.

B. convergent evolution. D. artificial selction.

9. Divergent evolution would be most likely in which of the following situations?

A. a group of organisms is isolated from the main population on three islands with different
environmental conditions.
B. individuals in a large population experience the same environmental conditions.
C. individuals in a small population experience the same environmental conditions.
D. a group of individuals which are well adapted to the environment live on remote island.

Kato Maxmillian 268 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

10. Functional resemblance of wings of a butterfly and a bird although from different origins, is an

example of

A. homology. B. autology. C. analogy. D. phylogeny

11. In artificial selection, humans select for?

A. a desirable trait. C. a vestigial trait.

B. undesirable trait. D. a trait that makes organisms less fit.

12. The wing of a bat and a foreleg of an alligator are

A. analogous features. C. vestigial features.

B. homologous features. D. artificially selected features.

13. Features that were useful to an anscestral organism but are not useful to a mordern heritage that

inherited them are said to be.

A. analogous. C. vestigial.
B. homologous. D. artificially selected.

14. Which one of the following is not likely to bring about evolutionary change in the population?

A. Crossing over. B. Migration. C. Mutation. D. Genetic drift.

15. Embryological comparisions reveal that.

A. many vertebrate embyos look similar at early stages of development.
B. embryos of different vetebrates look similar as development proceeds
C. rabbit embryos look like adult fish.
D. gorillas begin their life as fish and then develop into gorillas during embyonic development.

16. Fossils are

A. remains or traces of preexisting organisms C. deeply burried sedimentary rock strata.

B. all extinct organisms. D. from animals but not plants.

Kato Maxmillian 269 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

STRUCTURED QUESTIONS

17. (a) Using an example, give the meaning of adaptive radiation of species.. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) State the ecological importance of adaptive radiation. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) How do adaptive radiation and homologous structures give evidence of evolution?
(i) Adaptive radiation (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Homologous structures (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

18. Define the following terms.

(i) Adaptive radiation:. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Coevolution:. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(iii) Convergent evolution:. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 270 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(iv) Divergent evolution:. (2 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(v) Resistance:. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(vi) artificial selection.. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(vii) Organic evolution:. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 271 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

10.5 The origin and emergency of new species, types of selections

1. Which one of the following may cause adaptive radiation to a variety of species?

A. Stabilizing selection C. Ceasation of selection forces

B. Directional selection D. Disruptive selection

2. Which one of the following does not lead to change in allele frequency of a population?

A. Mutation C. Sexual recombination

B. Selection D. Genetic drift

3. Which of the following factors would contribute least to the development of new species?

A. Gene mutation C. Geographical isolation

B. Chromosomal mutation D. Environmental stability

Kato Maxmillian 272 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

4. Which one of the following woulf happen to individuals of a population in the shadded area of
the figure below if selection pressure continued for generations acting on the phenotype?

They would

A. develop into two distinct population C. evolve into new species

B. die off and becomes extinct. D. multiply in number.

5. Insects have different mouth parts modified to suit their different modes of feeding. This shows

A. Speciation
C. Divergent evolution
B. Convergent evolution
D. Development of analogous structures

6. Starlings produce an average if five eggs in each clutch. if there are more than five, parents cannot
adequately feed the young.If thet are fewer than five, predators may destroy the entire clutch.This

is an example of

A. disruptive slection. B stabilizing selection. C. directional selction. D. sexual selection.

7. Which one of the following is likely to cause a faster rate of evolution of organsisms?

A. stabilising selection. C. disruptive selction.

B. directional selection. D. slow changing environment.

8. A shark (fish) and a porpoise (mammal) are both adapted to swimming. This is an example of

A. Speciation
B. Divergent evolution
C. adaptive radiation
D. convergent evolution

Kato Maxmillian 273 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

9. Which one of the following situations would result into evolution? When

A. organism has adpted to a new environment.

B. there is inbreeding
C. genetic equilibrium is upset
D. there is no gene flow in a population.

10. Which one of the following best describes the evolution of new species from the same ancestor in

different environments?

A. Divergent evolution C. Convergent evolution

B. Adaptive radiation D. Directional selection

11. The type of selection that can most likely lead to polymorphism within a population is termed as

A. Artificial selection
C. Stabilizing selection
B. Disruptive selection
D. Directional selection

12. The human embryo and that of fish both have gill slit. A possible explanation for this is that;

A. Gills are needed to carry out gaseous exchange in both embryos

B. At one time human beings lived in water and hence used gills
C. Humans probably evolved from present day fish
D. Humans and fish have a common phylogenetic ancestor

13. Which one of the following factors is least likely to contribute to the development of new

species?

A. Chromosomal changes C. Environmental stability

B. Gene mutations D. Geographical isolation

14. Fish populations that do not interbreed because they live in different ponds may evolve into

separate species due to.

A. ecological isolation. C. prezygotic isolation.

B. geographic isolation. D. postzygotic isolation.

Kato Maxmillian 274 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

15. Bird populations that do not interbreed because they cannot recognise each other’s mating calls

may evolve into separate species due to

A. ecological isolation. C. prezygotic isolation.

B. geographic isolation. D. postzygotic isolation.

16. A pattern of rapid evolutionary changes followed by long periods of no change is described as

A. gradual evolution.
C. reproductive isolation.
B. punctuated evolution.
D. continous speciation.

STRUCTURED QUESTIONS

17. (a) Explain the meaning of the term speciation.. (2 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b)Using suitable examples, explain how sympatric speciation differs from allopatric speciation..
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

18. a) What is meant by the following terms;

(i) vestigial organs.. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Homologous organs. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(iii) Continental drift.. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(iv) Continous distribution of organisms.. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(v) Oceanic islands.. (2 marks)

Kato Maxmillian 275 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

19. (a) What are the two limitations of the biological species concept?. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) What is one advantage of prezygotic isolation over postzygotic isolation?. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Describe two pieces of evidence indicating that speciation does not always occur at the same
time.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

20. a) What is adaptive radiation? . (2 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
b) How could the following lead to adaptive radiation?
i) Environment change. (4 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
ii) New morphological adaptations. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
iii) Isolated Habitats e.g oceanic islands. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 276 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

21. a) i) What is meant by the term near extinction? . (2 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
ii) State one natural cause of extinction. . (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
b) State three ways human activity has accelerated the rate of extinction of species. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
c) Explain why tertiary predators are more prone to extinction. . (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

22. When extensive lakes that existed in Bunyoro were reduced to isolated pools many years ago,
four species of fish evolved as a result.
(a). Suggest how the drying up the lake system to isolated pools could have resulted in the
evolution of four new fish species.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Suggest what would happen to the fish species if water levels rose and aisolated pools once
again formed an extensive lake system.. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 277 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

23. (a) How does resistance of malaria parasites to malarial drugs occur? . (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) How may each of the following lead to speciation?
(i) Genetic drift. . (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Unrandom mating.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

24. The figure below shows selection pressure acting on a population of butterflies.

(a) State the type of natural selection exhibited in the figure above. (01 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 278 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(b) Explain how this type of natural selection affects the phenotypic ratio characteristics of the
population. (03 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) (i) In the space below sketch the distribution curve that would result after many generations of
this type of natural selection shown above. (01 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) What ecological effect does the above type of selection have on the population? . (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(d) State the importance of genetic variation in natural selction. . (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

25. (a) Explain three theories that attempt to explain the origin of the earth .. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 279 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(b) What is meant by the following terms

(i) homologous structures.. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Pangea . (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(iii) Continental drift. . (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) ”Certain particles of matter contain active principle which could produce a living organism
given suitable conditions” Basing on this explain how life started on earth.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

26. (a) What is adpative radiation?. (2 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) What could happen to a tree-dwelling species of lizard if all the trees in an area died?.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Give three examples of artificial selection . Include examples of both plants and animals.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 280 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(d) Name the three types of selection illustarted by the graphs below

27. (a) Briefly what is meant by the terms;

(i) Endagered species;. (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Extinction;. (1mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) (i) State three ways human activity has increased the rate of extinction of species in recent
time.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Suggest practical measures that can be put in place to prevent extinction in your country.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Explain why large predators are more likely to become extinct as compared to primary
consumers.. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 281 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

11 THE MAINTENANCE OF LIFE

11.1 Autotrophic nutrition

1. What is produced in cyclic photophosphorylation compared with non cyclic

photophosphorylation using same amount of light?
A. More ATP than in non-cyclic photophosphorylation, but no NADPH+H +
B. Less ATP than in non-cyclic photophosphorylation, but no NADPH + H +
C. Less ATP than in non-cyclic photophosphorylation, but more NADPH + H +
D. The same amount of ATP and NADPH +H + as in non-cyclic photophosphorylation.

2. Which one of the following wave length bands of light is least absorbed by chlorophyll?

3. Over a 24- hour period, which factor would have the least effect upon the rate of photosynthesis
in a green plant?

Kato Maxmillian 282 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

A. Concentration of carbon dioxide in the air C. Wavelength of light

B. Quantity of nitrates in the soil D. Availability of water in the soil

A. 450-500nm (blue) C. 650-700nm (orange)

B. 600-650nm (yellow) D. 700-750nm (red)

4. Many leaves appear green because chlorophyll molecules

A. are green in colour
B. reflect blue light while they absorb green light
C. reflect green light and absorb blue and red light
D. reflect ultra violet light

5. Which pair of the following substances is not required for the light-independent reactions of
photosynthesis?

A. ATP and carotenoids C. RuBP and free oxygen

B. NADPH and ATP D. Carotenoids and oxygen

Which one of the following is not an adaptation of a leaf for photosynthesis? It

A. Is broad and thin
B. Has cuticle
C. Has numerous stomata and air spaces inside
D. Has numerous chloroplasts in the palisade cells

6. The first carbohydrate made in photosynthesis is

A. ribose sugar. C. phosphoglyceric acid.

B. ribulose. D. phosphoglyceraldehyde.

7. Net productivity in C4 plants is higher than that of C3 plants because

A. C4 plants have a higher turn-over rate.
B. energy accumulates ata higher rate in C4 plants.
C. photophosphorylation occurs in C3 plants
D. the rate of respiration is higher in C3 plants

8. How does the C4 pathway improve the efficiency of carbon dioxide fixation?

Kato Maxmillian 283 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

A.Ribulose biphosphate carboxylase has a high affinity for carbon dioxide.

B. Phosphoenolpyruvate carboxylase has a high affinity for oxygen.
C. Oxygen does not compete with carbon dioxide for the active site of Ribulose bi phosphate
carboxylase.
D. Oxygen does not compete with carbon dioxide for the active site of phosphoenol pyruvate
carboxylase

9. Under which conditions do you expect the highest rate of photo respiration? Under which
conditions do you expect the highest rate of photo respiration?
A. High light intensity, presence of RUBISCO, low oxygen level.
B. Low carbon dioxide, high oxygen level, low humidity.
C. Presence of RUBISCO, PEP carboxylase, highlight intensity.
D. sunny, dry weather, high level of carbon dioxide

10. Photorespiration does not occur in C4 because they

A. use of phosphenol pyruvic acid for fixing carbon dioxide
B. mainly grow at high altitudes
C. are more abundant in cold regions
D. have succulent leaves which lower the internal temperature.

11. What is the fate of the hydroxyl radicals formed during light stage of photosynthesis? They are
A. Broken down into oxygen and free hydrogen
B. Used to raise the activation level of chlorophyll
C. Used to produce oxygen and water
D. Used to reduce carbon dioxide to sugar

12. C3 plants have an ecological advantage over C4 plants because

A. C3 plants photosynthesis during day and night
B.C4 plants use PEP carboxylase in hot conditions.
C. C4 plants need more energy to fix carbon dioxide.
D. C3 plants dont lose a lot of water in temperate areas.

13. The decarboxylation of malic acid in C4 plants, results into formation of;

Kato Maxmillian 284 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

A. phosphoglyceric acid C. Phosphoenol pyruvic acid

B. Pyruvic acid D. Oxaloacetic acid

14. Protons(H + ) accumulate in the thylakoid space during electron transport between photosystem I
and II. The excess protons in the thylakoid space
A.enter the respiratory pathway.
B. convert NADP to NADPH and generate ATP.
C. raise the pH of the space until the process stops.
D. are small enough to diffuse back in the cytoplasm.

15. Which one of the following photosynthetic pigments is universal to all the groups if algae?

A. xanthophylls C. chlorophyll a
B. carotene D. chlorophyll b

16. Which one of the following is not true about blue green bacteria?
A. They lack chloroplasts
B. Use water as a hydrogen donor.
C. chlorophyll is their primary pigment
D. They oxidize chemicals to manufacture food˙

17. The purple Sulphur bacteria live at the bottom of ponds under green algae because it
A. Absorb light of different wave length from the algae
B. Are parasites
C. Are shielded from direct sunlight
D. Do not require light for photosynthesis

18. Which of the following serves as the first electron sender?

A. Water B. NAD C. FAD D. Cytochrome

19. What statement applies to cyclic photophosphorylation?

A. Photosystem one is not reestablished by electrons from photosystem two.
B. Electrons flow from and back to photosystem two.
C. Photosystem two draws electrons from water.
D. A bond is not built up between adenosine diphosphate and inorganic phosphate.

Kato Maxmillian 285 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

20. C3 plants are less efficient than C4 plants in fixing carbon dioxide at low carbon dioxide and high
oxygen partial pressure because
A.C3 plants use energy
B. In C3 plants, energy is lost
C. RuBP carboxylase is inactivated by the high oxygen partial pressures
D. PEP carboxylase has a high affinity for oxygen

21. Which one of the following is illustrated in Figure 1?

A. With increase in light intensity, the rate of photosynthesis increases until temperature becomes
a limiting factor.
B. Rate of photosynthesis increases with an increase in the carbon dioxide concentration
C. With increase in light intensity, the rate of photosynthesis increases indefinitely.
D. Rate of photosynthesis increases with an increase in light intensity until carbon dioxide
concentration becomes a limiting factor.

22. Which one of the following is likely to occur if a photosynthesizing plant was suddenly removed
from light?

A. Reduction in PGA C. Accumulation of PGA

B. Accumulation of PGAL D. No change in amount of PGAL

23. In which one of the following parts of a chloroplast is water splitting enzymes mostly located?

A. Stroma B. Intergrana C. Cytoplasm D. Grana

Kato Maxmillian 286 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

24. In photosynthesis, the major advantage of the C4 pathway is to

A. Fix carbon dioxide in the Calvin cycle
B. Concentrate carbon dioxide in the cells of leaves
C. Fix carbon dioxide from the atmosphere into the leaves
D. Store carbon dioxide in form of organic acids

25. During the light stage of photosynthesis, water is an important raw material in that it
A. Gives off oxygen
B. Provides hydrogen that reduces NAD
C. Reduces carbon dioxide to carbohydrates
D. Provides electrons

26. Figure 1 shows the relationship between temperature and rate of photosynthesis in two plant
species A and B.

Which one of the following is a correct conclusion from the results?

A. B is a shade plant while A is a sun plant.
B. A has a lower compensation point than B
C. A has a higher optimum temperature for photosynthesis than B
D. Photorespiration does not occur in A but occurs in B

27. The products of light reaction in photosynthesis are

A. NADH2 , ATP and O2 C. NADPH2 , ADP and O2

B. NADP, ATP and O2 D. NADPH2, ATP and O2

Kato Maxmillian 287 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

28. Which one of the following is the role of reduced NADP in the dark stage of photosynthesis?

A. Combines with carbon dioxide C. Provides hydrogen

B. Provides energy D. Acts as an electron acceptor

29. Thylakoids of the grana have the

A. Enzymes for the C3 pathway C. Enzymes for the C4 pathway

B. Enzymes for the light reactions D. Enzymes for pentose phosphate pathway

30. Which wavelength from light spectrum is mostly absorbed by green plants?

A. Red B. Green C. Blue D. Yellow

31. Where wavelength from light spectrum is mostly absorbed by green plants?

A.lamella C. thylakoid membrane

B stroma D. granal membrane

32. Which one of the following would speed up the phosphorylation of a hexose sugar?
A. A decrease in ADP concentration
B. A decrease in the concentration of ATP
C. An increase in the concentration of phosphorylase
D. An increase in the concentration of phosphorylated hexoses

33. Fig. 2 illustrates the phenomenon of limiting factors. What, in this case, is the limiting factor for
photosynthesis?

Kato Maxmillian 288 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

A. Chlorophyll content C. Carbon dioxide

B. Temperature D. Light

34. Which one of the following occurs during the light dependent stage of photosynthesis?

A. Formation of ADP C. Formation of PGAL

B. Production of NADPH2 D. Production of NADP

35. The figure below shows variation of the rate of photosynthesis with light intensity.

The factor limiting the rate of photosynthesis in region A is

A. light intensity. B. carbon dioxide. C. Water D. temperature.

36. The carbon acceptor in the Calvin cycle of the dark stage of photosynthesis is

A. Pyruvic acid C. Phosphoglyceraldehyde

B. Phosphoglyceric acid D. Ribulose 1,5 diphosphate

37. During photosynthesis, the carbon fixing compound is produced from,

A. glucose C. unstabe-6-carbon sugar

B. glycerate-3-phopsphate D. triose phosphate

38. During water stress, there is reduced photosynthesis mainly due to shortage of

A. Carbon dioxide C. Light

B. Water D. Minerals

39. During what stage of the dark reaction is NADPH2 used? Conversion of
A. Ribulose diphosphate to Phosphoglyceric acid

Kato Maxmillian 289 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

B. Phosphoglyceraldehyde to hexose sugar

C. Hexose sugar to starch
D. Phosphoglyceric acid to Phosphoglyceraldehyde

40. Which of the following nutrients are constituents of chlorophyll?

A. Potassium and sulphur B. Nitrogen and magnesium

C. calcium and phosphorus D. zinc and copper

41. Which one of the following pairs of reactants is not required for light-dependent reactions of
photosynthesis.

A. NADPH and ATP. C. RUBP and free oxygen.

B. ATP and carotenoids. D. carbon dioxide and enzymes.

42. Which one of the curves correctly represents plants adapted for low light intensity.

43. Protons (H+ ) accumulate in the thylakoid space during electron transport between photosystem I
and II. The excess protons in the thylakoid space
A.enter the respiratory pathway.
B. convert NADP to NADPH and generate ATP.
C. raise the pH of the space until the process stops.
D. are small enough to diffuse back in the cytoplasm

44. Purple sulphur bacteria live at the bottom of ponds under green algae because the bacteria;
A. are parasites.
B. do not require light for photosynthesis.
C. are shield from direct sunlight.
D. absorb light of different wavelength from that absorbed by algae

Kato Maxmillian 290 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

STRUCTURED QUESTIONS

45. (a)The figure below shows a scheme of reaction occuring in a chloroplast during photosynthesis.

(i) name the chemical substances represented by letters W,X,Y and Z.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Indicate by means of arrows on the diagram, the direction of transfer of substances occuring
in cycles A and B.
(b) State three adaptations of a chloroplast for photosynthesis.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

46. (a) Giving examples differentiate between photosynthetic and chemosynthetic bacteria..(3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Explain how certain bacteria which require light for photosynthesis, survive under weeds in
ponds and rocks.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

47. (a) what is a limiting factor?. (3 marks)

Kato Maxmillian 291 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Describe a state where carbon dioxide is a limiting factor in photosynthesis.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Give three differences between light dependent and light independent reactions of
photosynthesis.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

48. The figure below shows the distribution of C3 ,C4 and CAM plants at different altitudes.

(a) Suggest reasons for the trends in the distribution of each of the plants species.
(i) C3 plants . (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) C4 plants. . (3 marks)

Kato Maxmillian 292 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(iii) CAM plants. . (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) State four physiological differences between C3 and C4 plants.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

49. (a) What is Photophosphorylation? . (3 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Where in the plant cell does cyclic photophosphorylation occur? . (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Describe the process of cyclic photophosphorylation. . (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(d) What is the importance of cyclic photophosphorylation in photosynthesis?. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

50. (a) Name the two stages of photosynthesis, indicating where, in the chloroplast, they occur.
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 293 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(a) By means of a flow diagram, show the sequence of electron flow during non-cyclic
photophosphorylation.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

51. The figure below shows the effects of temperature on the rate of photosynthesis and respiration in
well illuminated leaves

(a) Compare the effects of temperature on the rate of photosynthesis and respiration. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Explain the shapes of the curves.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

52. The figure shows the concentration of glycerate -3- phospahate(GP) and ribulose biphosphate of
(RuBP) during an investigation in which a sample of chorella was allowed to photosynthesise at
very low and very high carbon dioxide levels.

Kato Maxmillian 294 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(a) Explain the changes in the concentration of RuBP at

(i) High carbon dioxide levels. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Very low carbon dioxide level. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Suggest why the concentration of GP falls when the level of carbon dioxide is reduced.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(d) Name two factors which must be kept constant in the investigation.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(e) Give four differences between cyclic and noncyclic photophoshorylation. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

53. (a) What is chemosynthesis? . (3 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Outline three ways in which photosynthesis in purple sulphur bacteria differs from that of
higher plants . (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 295 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Explain why it is possible for photosythetic and chemosynthetic bacteria to co-exist in an
oxygen free environment. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(d) State the importance of chemosynthetic bacteria in nature.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

54. (a) Figure below shows a scheme of reactions within the plants photosynthesizing unit.

(i) Name the substances represented by A, B, C and D. . (3 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Name the cells labelled T and U.. (3 marks)

Kato Maxmillian 296 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(iii) Give two examples of plants where the photosynthetic pathway above is found. .(3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

55. The diagram below shows an outline of the main stages in the Hatch and Slack pathway.

(a) (i)With reference to the figure above, give the name of cell A and cell B. . (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Name enzyme X and Y. . (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) State three differences between the mode of action of enzyme X and Y.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(d) Name the substances P,Q,R and S. . (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(e) Explain the importance of the Hatch and Slack pathway. . (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 297 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(f) Describe the role played by reduced NADP in the light-independent reaction. . (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

56. The scheme below shows the flow of electrons along the thylakoid membranes of a green leaf.

(a) Name the parts labeled A to D in the scheme above.. (3 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) State three differences between photosystem I and photosystem II.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Explain why;
(i) photosynthesis occurs in green plants of a variageted leaf. . (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 298 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii)Even though leaves reflect green light some phoyosynthesis is still able to occur when green
light falls on a leaf. . (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

57. The figure below shows light saturation curves for plants of same species growing underdifferent
light intensities.

(a) Compare the effect of intensity on carbon dioxide uptake in the two types of plants. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Describe the state of light plants at point P. . (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Explain what happens to the plant biomass in region Y.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 299 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(d) State an environmental factor that affects the shape of the graph other than carbon dioxide.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

58. The figure below shows chemical pathways involved in respiration and photosynthesis.

(a) Name the process that produced the pyruvate from glucose.. (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Name compounds labeled X and Y.. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) i) In which part of the chloroplast is glycerate 3-phosphate converted into ribose biphosphate?
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Describe the role of ribose biphosphate in photosynthesis.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

59. (a) Briefly describe how ATP is produced as light strikes a chlorophyll molecule.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Although photosynthesis generates ATP, plants also generate ATP through respiration.
Explain the why this is necessary.. (3 marks)

Kato Maxmillian 300 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) The diagram shows the main steps in light dependant stage of photosynthesis

(i) For what is ATP used in step X?. (3 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Name compound Y.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................

60. The diagram below represents a chloroplast.

(a) Name structures A, B, and C.. (3 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Using accurate,ruled-guide lines and letters given below, show on the diagram areas where.
(i) ATP is produced (X)
(ii) NADP is reduced (Y)
(iii) ATP is broken down into ADP and inorganic phosphates (Z)
(c) State which of molecule in the chloroplast contains;
(i) Magnesium.. (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Iron:. (1 mark)

Kato Maxmillian 301 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
(d) What name is given to the substance in the Calvin cycle which combines with carbon dioxide?
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) What name is given to the first stable product produced in the Calvin cycle?. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................

61. (a) Define the term absorption spectrum.. (2 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) State two;
(i) evidences that show that photosynthesis is a two stage process.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) roles of light dependent stage during carbon dioxide fixation.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Desecribe the Hatch-Slack pathway.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

62. The figure below shows the rate of photosynthesis in two different plants over a range of light
intensities.

Kato Maxmillian 302 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

a) Explain, (i) the relationship between light intensity and the rate of photosynthesis for plants A
and B up to 50 lux.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Why the rate of photosynthesis remains constant at very high light intensities.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
b) Giving a reason, state which plant would grow best in a forest floor?
Plant:. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
Reason:. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
c) State two benefits of photosynthesis to plants.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 303 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

63. (a) The figure below shows the effect of carbon dioxide concentraion on photosynthesis of a life
plant leaf (a C3 plant) and that of a sugar cane ( a C4 plant) compared. Study it carefully and use
it to answer questions that follow.

(i) Define the tem compensation point.. (3 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) What four conclusions can be drawn from the figure above?. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(iii) State three differences in the photosynthetic process of C3 and C4 plants .. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 304 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

64. The figure beow shows the relatioship between abundance and rate of photosyntheis when a
chlorophyll molecule is shone by light of varying wavelengths in a flowering plant.

a) State the relationship between absorbance and rate of photosynthesis between

(i) 420nm and 550nm. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) 600nm and 660nm. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
b) Explain the relationships in (a) above. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
c) Explain why a chlorophyll solution flouresces when observed in darkness and white light is
shone through it.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 305 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

65. The figure below shows the main stages of the Calvin cycle.

(a) State the site where the Calvin ctcle occurs in plant cells.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Describe how carbon dioxide is fixed in the Calvin cycle.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Explain how the products of phosphorylation are are used in the Calvin cycle.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(d) Explain intially what happens to the concentration of RuBP and GP if the supply of carbon
dioxide is reduced.
RuBP;. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
GP;. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 306 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

66. The figure below shows the absportion spectra of the photosynthetic pigments of a flowering
plant.

(i) Name the accessory pigments shown in the figure above.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Outline the role of accessory pigments in photosythesis.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(iii) Very little light of wavelegnth 550nmis absorbed by photosynthetic pigments. State what
happens to most of the light.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(iv) A graph can also be drawn to show the relationship between the wavelength and the rate of
photosynthesis. State the name of this graph.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 307 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

11.2 Heterotrophic nutrition

1. Which of the following indirectly stimulates secretion of alkaline fluids by the pancrease?
A. Stimulation by sympathetic nerves
B. The presence of gastrin in the blood
C. The presence of food in the duodenum
D. The presence food in the stomach

2. Which one of the following best explains why fat digestion does not occur in the human stomach?
A. pH of the stomach is too low for lipase to function
B. bile salts that emulsify fat are missing in the stomach
C. fat digestion is only possible in the duodenum
D. lipase are active within a narrow range of pH

3. Figure shows growth curves of rats provided with milk diet at different times

Kato Maxmillian 308 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

The most appropriate conclusion of the results is that

A. In rats, normal growth occurs if the milk contains essential vitamins
B. Milk stimulates growth while lack of it retards growth in rats
C. If milk is added to a milk deficient diet, then the body weight of the rats decreases further
D. Lack of milk in the diet has no effect on the growth of rats

4. The non - enzymatic components of intestinal juice are secreted by the cells in the:

A. wall of illeum. C. gastric glands.

B. crypts of lieberkiin. D. brunners glands

5. Which one of the following statement about digestion of food in man is false?
A. No carbohydrate digestion occurs in the stomach
B. All fat digestion occurs in the stomach
C. No protein digestion occurs in the mouth
D. All fat digestion occurs in the small intestines

6. Which one of the following best explains why fat digestion does not occur in the human stomach?
A. pH of the stomach is too low for lipase to function
B. bile salts that emulsify fat are missing in the stomach
C. fat digestion is only possible in the duodenum
D. lipase are active within a narrow range of pH

7. An enzyme was found to work best between a pH range of 6 to 8. Which one of the following
enzymes could it be?

Kato Maxmillian 309 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

A. Pancreatic B. Salivary amylase C. Pepsin D.Trypsin

8. An adult whose diet only consists of milk may suffer from?

A. insufficient iron synthesis
B. low energy content
C. high fat content which blocks the bone marrow
D. break down of red blood cell

9. The alimentary canals of carnivores are relatively shorter than those of herbivores because
A. Their mainly protein diet is relatively easier to digest
B. They eat diet which is largely protein in nature
C. They have to maintain low weight to be able to chase prey
D. They eat little food at a time

10. Bile production is stimulated by

A. Gastrin C. Enterogastrone
B. Cholecystokinin (cck) D. Secretin

11. A person who had a balanced meal 2 - 3 hours earlier on will have blood with the highest sugar
concentration in the,

A. renal artery B. anterior vena cava C. hepatic portal vein D. aorta

12. Which one of the following enzymes is not secreted by the lining of the ileum?

A. lipase. B. sucrase. C. enterokinase. D lactase.

13. Which one of the following best explains why fat digestion does not occur in the human stomach?
A. PH of the stomach is too low for lipase to function.
B. Bile salts that emulsify fats are missing in the stomach.
C. Fat digestion is only possible in the duodenum.
D. Lipases are active within a narrow range of PH

14. The part of the mammalian gut that contains the chief glands, columnar epithelial cells and goblet
cells is the.

Kato Maxmillian 310 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

A. colon B. caecum C. duodenum D. stomach

15. Which of the following are forms of heterotrophism?

A. photosynthesis, herbivory C. carnivory, herbivory

B. herbivory saprotrophism D. carnivory, saprotrophism

16. The passage which is common to the digestive and respiratory system in humans is the;

A. larynx B. trachea C. Nasal Cavity D. pharynx

17. Which one of the following features characterizes the omnivore gut?
A. Large divided stomach
B. Poorly developed appendix and ceacum
C. Long pouched colon
D. Short ileum and colon

18. In the duodenum, the products ready for absorption are those of the digestion;

A. lipase and amylase C. trypsin and lipase

B. amylase only D. lipase only

19. The hormone produced from the duodenal mucosa which stimulates the production of bile by the
liver is called.

A. insulin B. cholecystokinin C. gastrin D. secretin

20. The hormone that stimulates the gastric glands to secrete pepsinogen is

A. secretin B. gastrin C. cholecystokinin D. pancreozymin

21. Which of the following is secreted by the pancreas, under the influence of secretin hormone?

A: bile B: alkaline fluid C: bicarbonate ions D: pancreatic enzymes

22. Which of the following statements is true about digestion in the small intestine?
A. secretin stimulates the release of pancreatic enzymes

Kato Maxmillian 311 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

B. Pancreozymin stimulates the release of bile from the gall bladder.

C. Secretin stimulates the release of succus entericus.
D. Bile salts emulsify fatty acids.

23. The following are sites of the beginning of physical and chemical digestion, respectively;

A. Mouth and ileum C. Stomach and ileum

B. Mouth and stomach D. Mouth and duodenum

24. The insects lower lip with palps that help to manipulate food is called

A. labium B. mandible C. labrum D. maxilla

The hormone which stimulates the secretion of pancreatic juices and inhibits gastric secretions is

A. cholecystokinin B. enterogastrone C. gastrin D. cortisol

25. Termites are able to benefit from feeding on woody materials because:
A. have sharp, toothed mandibles which crush the wood materials into soluble products.
B. secrete digestive enzymes which breaks down wood.
C. use their labial palps to avail end products from wood.
D. trichonympha in their gut secrete an enzyme which breaks down cellulose in wood.

26. The type of feeding mechanism shown in the figure below

A. pinocytosis B. phagocytosis. C. filter feeding. D. predation.

27. which one of the following pairs of hormones when released increase the level of blood sugar in
the body.

A. secretin and insulin C. Insulin and anti-diuretic hormone

B. Adrenaline and glucagon D. secretin and thyroxine.

Kato Maxmillian 312 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

28. Which one of the following forms the biggest composition of bile?

A. Water B. Bile salts C. Bile pigments D. Cholesterols

29. Which one of the following is secreted under the influence of secretin hormone?

A. Lipase enzyme C. mucus

B. sodium taurocholate D. sucrase enzyme

STRUCTURED QUESTIONS

30. (a) What is the role of the following hormones in human digestive system?
(i) Pancreozymin. (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Gastrin . (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(iii) Secretin. (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Describe how hydrochloric acid is formed in oxyntic cells within the gastric walls. .(3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

31. a) Name three hormones that control digestion and state their effects. . (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 313 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

b) Briefly describe how fatty acids and glycerol are absorbed in the ileum. . (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
c) What role does the liver play in fat metabolism? . (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

32. An experiment was carried out to investigate the effect on the growth of rats of including milk in
the diet.
Two groups (Group A and B), each consisting of eight young rats , were fed on synthetic diet
consisting of purified casein(a milk protein), sucrose, fat, inorganic salts and water. Group A
recieved a supplement of 3cm3 of milk per day for first 18 days then recieved no further milk.
Group B was given no milk for the first 18 days, then reiecved a supplement of 3cm3 of milk per
day. The results are shown in the graph below.

Kato Maxmillian 314 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(a) i) From the graph, find the mean mass of each group of rats at 10 days.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
ii) Describe the changes in mean mass upto day 18, for the rats which recieved no milk. (Group
B). (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
iii) Compare the chnages in the mean mass of both groups of rats during the whole experiment.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Suggest why the growth of rats was faster when they recieved milk than when they recieved no
milk.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) The inorganic salts provided in the diet included calcium. Describe the importance of calcium
to growing rats.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 315 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

11.3 Gas exchange in plants

1. Which one of the following sets of conditions in the guard cells would lead to opening of the
stoma?
A. High carbon dioxide concentration and low sugar concentrations
B. Low carbon dioxide concentration and high sugar concentration
C. High sugar concentration and high carbon dioxide concentration
D. Low pH and high starch concentration.

2. Stomatal closure occurs when

A. Turgor in the guard cells rises
B. The pH in the guard cell increases
C. The osmotic potential of guard cells is more than that of the surrounding
D. Starch in the guard cell is converted to sugars

3. Which one of the following occurs as a result of a low pH in the guard cells?
A. conversion of sugar to starch reducing osmotic pressure
B. conversion of starch to sugar reducing osmotic pressure

Kato Maxmillian 316 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

C. conversion of sugar to starch increasing osmotic pressure

D. conversion of starch to sugar, increasing osmotic pressure

4. Which one of the following qualities of the guard cells that contributes to their opening?
A. Uneven thickened walls
B. Inner walls being less elastic than other walls
C. Presence of chloroplasts
D. Presence of vacuoles

5. Which one of the following changes causes the closure of stomata in plant leaves?
A. Rise in the pH of the intercellular spaces
B. Synthesis of glucose
C. Fall in levels of carbon dioxide in the intercellular spaces
D. Conversion of glucose into starch

6. Hydro active control of stomatal movement in plants is due to

A. Synthesis of abscisic acid (ABA)
B. Active accumulation of mineral ions in guard cells
C. Inter conversion of glucose and starch in guard cells
D. Synthesis of glucose during photosynthesis

Kato Maxmillian 317 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

11.4 Gas exchange in animals

1. In teleost fishes water is drawn into and pumped out of the pharynx mainly by
A. counter flow of water between the gills
B. branchial valves which prevent backflow of water
C. movements of the opercular cavities
D. contraction of opercular cavities

2. Which one of the following features is not essential for gaseous exchange in the lungs?

A. Pleural fluid C. Thin epithelium

B. Dense network of capillaries D. Presence of moisture

3. The disadvantage of parallel flow system during gaseous exchange in some fish is the

A. Slow speed of blood C. Low oxygen uptake by blood

B. Low blood volume D. Low water volume over the gills

4. Which one of the following changes occurs in a mammalian body, at the onset of an exercise?
A. increase in pH of blood

Kato Maxmillian 318 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

B. decrease in the rate of contraction of the diaphragm muscles.

C. increase in the rate of tissue respiration.
D. decrease in the amount odf water vapour in breath.

5. Which one of the following curves below correctly represent the breathing rate of an athelete
under increasing sustainable exercise?

6. Which one of the following is correct about the counter current mechanism in teleosts?
A. blood with low oxygen concentration flows in the same direction with water of high oxygen
concentration.
B. water of low oxygen concentration flows near blood of high oxygen concentration.
C. blood with high oxygen concentration flows opposite direction to water of high oxygen
concentration.
D. water of high oxygen concentration flows in opposite dircetion to bllod of low oxygen
concentration.

7. Which one of the following graphs shows the correct relationship between the rate of breathing
with the increase in amount of excerise in an athelete

Kato Maxmillian 319 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

8. Which of the following events will cause inspiration in humans?

A. Internal intercostal muscles and the diaphragm contract
B. Internal intercostal muscles and the diaphragm relax
C. Internal intercostal muscles relax and the diaphragm contracts
D. Internal intercostal muscles contract and the diaphragm assumes a dome shape

9. Why does exercise cause breathing rate to vary?

A. It increases concentration of CO2 in blood, which lowers PH
B. It increases concentration of CO2 in blood, which increases its pH
C. It lowers the concentration of O2 in blood, which increases the PH
D. It increases the concentration of O2 in blood, which lowers the PH

10. Cartilagenous fish extract less oxygen from water than bony fish because the former.
A. lives in sea water.
B. are relatively bigger in size.
C. employ parellel flow system for gaseous exchange.
D. possess large gills with small surface area to volume ratio.

11. . Surfactant used in treatment of lungs is meant to do the following except;

A. Prevention of friction of the lungs
B. Killing microbes
C. Reduction of energy used to inflate the lungs
D. Increasing the rate of oxygen diffusion

12. The table below shows the rate of breathing and volume of air exchanged woth each person at test
and during exercise.
State of the individual Breaths per minute Volume of each breath.(cm3 )
At rest 12 500
During exercise 24 1000
The increase in the volume of air exchanged per minute when an individual does exercise from
rest is

A. 500cm3 . B. 600cm3 . C. 15000cm3 . D. 18000cm3

13. During exhalation in mammals, which of the following occurs?

A. The external intercostal muscles relax while the internal intercostal muscles contract

Kato Maxmillian 320 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

B. The external intercostals muscles contract while the internal intercostal muscles relax
C. The diaphragm muscles contract
D. The ribcage is pulled upwards and outwards

14. . Identify the factor that increases the diffusion distance across a respiratory surface.

A. large surface area C. small surface area

B. thin epithelium D. thick epithelium

15. Which one of following pairs of adjustments at a respiratory surface would increase its efficiency?
A. Decreasing the rate of ventilation and increasing blood supply
B. Increasing the rate of blood flow and the rate of ventilation
C. Increasing the ventilation rate and the distance of diffusion of molecules
D. Decreasing the blood supply and the distance of diffusion of molecules

16. Why does gaseous exchange in amoeba take place by diffusion across the surface membrane?

A. it is a unicellular organism C. the volume to surface area ratio is small

B. it has a large surface area D. the body components are few

17. An athlete has just finished a race. The phrase ”oxygen debt” refers to
A. the amount of oxygen originally present in the muscles of the athlete before the race.
B. the total amount of oxygen the athlete required to restore the breathing rate to normal.
C. the extra amount of oxygen taken in after the race and used to complete the combustion of
some of the lactic acid.
D. the amount of oxygen required after an exercise

18. Which one of the following would be the effect of increasing the partial pressures of carbon
dioxide in the blood?

A. Increase in the ventilation rate C. Reduction in ventilation rate

B. Variation in the ventilation rate D. Ceasation of ventilation

19. Many small animals use their skins as the only respiratory organ because they
A. Are too small to have other respiratory organs
B. Have large surface area to volume ratio

Kato Maxmillian 321 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

C. use less energy and therefore useless oxygen

D. Are less active than big animals

20. Which of the following is a benefit of gas exchange in air compared to water in animals?

A. Higher concentration of molecular oxygen. C. No energy required to ventilation.

B. Oxygen diffuses more slowly in air. D. Moist respiratory surface not needed

21. In which one of the following respiratory surfaces does gaseous exchange occurs across the entire
body surface?

22. The earthworm does not require a special respiratory organ because?
A. it is not active metabolically
B. It moist cuticle allows gases to dissolve and diffuse easily
C. its surfaces lack a cuticle
D. it has a large surface area to volume ratio

23. The figure below shows parallel flow across a gill plate in fish.

Indicated on the figure on the figure would have the highest diffusion gradient?

Kato Maxmillian 322 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

A. R. B. P C. Q. D. S

Which one of the points

24. The substance which lowers the surface tension in alveoli to ease their flexing during ventilation
movements of the chest is

A. mucus B. surfactant C. tissue fluid D. lymph

25. Which of the following is a benefit of gas exchange in air compared to water in animals?

A. higher concentration of molecular oxygen C. no energy required for ventilation

B. oxygen diffuses more slowly in air D. moist respiratory surface not needed

26. The figure below illustrates a mechanism of gaseous exchange.

The best conclusion from the figure is that...........

A. Oxygen concentration gradient is genearally maintained
B. Equilibrium between water and blood is attained at the same point
C. Blood is less saturated woth oxygen.
D. The fish has inefficient system of gaseous exchange

27. A person has a tidal volume of 0.36 dm3 and a breathing rate of 18 breaths per min. This persons
ventilation rate is

−1
A. 0.02 dm3 min−1 B. 6.48 dm3 min−1 C. 64.8 dm3 min−1 D.2.0 dm3 min

28. Which one of the following may act as a respiratory surface in animals?

A. Spiracle B. Bronchus C. Skin D. Trachea

Kato Maxmillian 323 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

29. Which of the following events will cause inspiration in humans?

A. Internal intercostals muscles and diaphragm contract.
B. Internal intercostals muscles and the diaphragm relax.
C. Internal intercostals muscles relax and diaphragm contract
D. Internal intercostals muscles contract and the diaphragm assumes a dome shape

30. The disadvantage of parallel flow over counter current flow during gaseous exchange which is
caused by presence of a vertical septum is:
A. slows down the speed of movement of water with more oxygen.
B. slows down the speed of water with high carbon dioxide concentration.
C. deflects the water so that it tends to pass over rather than between gill plates.
D. gills run for a shorter distance thereby disrupting interaction.

31. Which of the following happens after gaseous exchange in the buccal cavity?
A. Petrohyoid muscles contract and air moves to the lungs.
B. Sternohyoid muscles contract and the air moves to the longs.
C. Sternohyoid muscles contract and the air in the lungs moves to the buccal cavity.
D. The petrohyoid muscles contract and the air is expelled from the buccal cavity, to the
surroundings

STRUCTURED QUESTIONS

32. a)How is the structure of the gill filaments adapted to increase the rate of gaseous exchange
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
b)Describe how a bony fish uses pumping movements of the mouth to ventilate the gills.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 324 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

33. (a) Explain the following

(i) Breathing in pure oxygen at higher pressure than atmospheric is dangerous.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Breathing in air rich in carbon dioxide is dangerous. . (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) outline three adaptations of animals that live in environments of low oxygen tensions.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

34. (a) Briefly describe the structure of the bony fish gill.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) The graph below shows pressure changes in the buccal cavity and opercular cavity during the
breathing of a bony fish.

Kato Maxmillian 325 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(i) Explain what is happening at points a and b.

point a. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
point b. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Explain how fish increases pressure in the buccal cavity.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(d) Explain how the counter current sysytem in a body gill increases the effieciency of oxygen
extraction from the water and why parellel flow would not achieve this.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

35. (a) Explain why air is a better respiratory medium than water.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) State how each of the following respiratory sysytems have been modified to to increase
surface area for gaseous exchange
(i) Mammalian lung.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 326 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Tracheal sysytem.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Explain why a fish suffocates immediately when removed from water.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

36. (a) Define pulmonary surfactant. (2 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) state any four functions of a pulmonary surfactant. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Using the figure below , explain how the small radius stabilises the alveolus

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 327 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

37. The figure below illustrates two different mechanisms of gaseous exchange in fish A and fish B.

(a) State two differences between the two systems in terms of Oxygen concentration. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Explain the physiological advantage of fish A over B. . (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Describe how a gill is structually adapted as a respiratory surface. . (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

38. The figure below shows the rate and depth of breathing in a group of students during rest and
during a strenous activity.

Kato Maxmillian 328 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(a) Calculate the average number of inspirations per minute during rest and during exercise.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Calculate the average tidal volume during rest and during the exercise.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Explain how oxygen requirements of a mammal are met under conditions of physical activity.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

39. The figure below shows the mechanism of exchange of gases between the blood and water in a
fish

(a) Identify the flow system illustrated above . (1 mark)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 329 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(b) Comment on the efficiency of the mechanism of exchange of gases shown . (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Explain how the teleost gill is more efficient for gaseous exchange than the dog fish gill.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 330 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

11.5 The release of energy

1. Figure below shows the schematic diagram of a portion of a reaction chain

Which one of the following is not true of the reaction

A. FAD is reduced
B. ATP is used in the reaction
C. Hydrogen passes from reduced NAD to FAD
D. NAD is oxidized.

Kato Maxmillian 331 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

2. The figure shows some reactions in the respiratory pathway.

The enzyme which catalyses the reaction marked x is

A. Pyruvate dehydrogenase C. Pyruvate decarboxylase

B. Acetyl CoA dehydrogenase D. Acetyl CoA decarboxylase

3. During a strenuous activity, the pyruvic acid in the muscle may accept hydrogen from reduced
NAD to become

A. Acetyl CoA B. lactic acid C. ethanol D. citric acid

4. Which one of the following activities in living organisms can result in a respiratory quotient of
less than 1.0?
A. When carbohydrates are respired
B. During extensive laying down of fat in livestock
C. At compensation point, during photosynthesis
D. When the rate of exhalation equals that of inhalation

5. In an endergonic reaction, the products of the reaction contain

A: more energy than the reactants and energy is released.
B.more energy than the reactants and energy must be supplied
C. less energy than the reactants and energy is released.
D.Less energy than the reactants and energy must be supplied

6. The low RQ values after some days of germination may be attributed to;
A. High reserve food content
B. Great need for energy production of seed germination
C. Liability of oxygen to diffuse to embryo
D. Utilization of food reserves other than sugars.

Kato Maxmillian 332 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

7. The substance that supplies phosphate at the start of glycolysis is

A. Adenosine diphosphate (ADP)
B. Adenosine triphosphate (ATP)
C. Adenosine monophosphate (AMP)
D. Nicotinamide adenine dinucleotide phosphate (NADP)

8. If oxygen is unavailable, the electron transport system fails because

A. There will be no ATP electron transport
B. Hydrogen cannot be split to release electrons
C. Reduced NAD and FAD cannot be oxidized
D. Oxidized NAD and FAD cannot be reduced

9. Lactic acid accumulation in the muscles of an athletic during action is due

A. oxygen debt C. panting

B. anaerobic respiration D. high rate of respiration

10. Which of the following occurs in both the thylakoid membrane and mitochondrial matrix?

A. ATP synthesis B. sugar synthesis C. Glycolysis D. Krebs cycle

11. Which of the following reactions take place in the Krebs cycle?
i. NAD is reduced to NADH+
ii. FAD is oxidized to FADH2
iii. pyruvate is converted to acetyl-CoA
iv. ADP and inorganic phosphate is condensed to ATP

A. i and ii B. i and ii C. iii and iv D. i and iv

12. Which set of products is liberated during both aerobic and anaerobic respiration in plants?

A. carbon dioxide and energy. C. water and carbon dioxide.

B. ethanol and water. D. carbon dioxide and ethanol.

Kato Maxmillian 333 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

13. The respiratory quotient can be lower than 1.0 during the following activities, except.

A. When an individual is growing fat. C. When the mollusc shell is forming

B. When an organism is hibernating D. When the seed just begins to germinate.

14. During respiration in the absence of oxygen, pyruvic acids is converted into:

A. lactic acid and carbon dioxide in animals. C. ethanol and water in plants.
B. lactic acid and water in animals. D. ethanol and carbon dioxide in plants

15. In which one of the following is the respiratory quotient most likely to be lowest?

A.During lactic acid formation in animals. C. In animals during laying down of fat.
B. In plants during bright light. D. During egg laying in birds.

16. Which one of these activities would result into a low respiratory quotient?
A. Respiration in muscles during heavy exercise
B. Formation of calcareous shells
C. Fattening livestock
D. Preparation for hibernation in a mammal

17. Which of the following are formed during anaerobic respiration in yeast cell?

A. Lactic acid and ATP C. Ethanol and ATP

B. Lactic acid and ADP D. Ethanol and ADP

18. What is the importance of sugar phosphorylation during respiration? It is

A. An initial state in the oxidation of sugar by molecular oxygen
B. The only means by which respiring tissues obtain energy from sugar
C. An important step for the synthesis of complex sugars from amino acids
D. Important in splitting hexose sugars into lactic acid in muscles

19. Which one of the following biological processes does not utilize respiratory energy?

A. Loss of water from the stomata C. Synthesis of cellulose

B. Mineral salt absorption D. Meiosis

Kato Maxmillian 334 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

STRUCTURED QUESTIONS

20. The diagram below shows a summary of glycolysis and two alternative pathways that may follow
this process in anaerobic conditions.

(a) Substance X is the final product of glycolysis. Name this substance.. (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) In glycolysis, NAD is converted to its reduced form (NADH + H+ ). Describe how NAD is
regenerated in pathway A.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Name the waste products of pathway B.. (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
(d) Describe the role of reduced NAD (NADH + H+ ) when respiration takes place in aerobic
conditions.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 335 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

21. Figure 2 shows the transfer of energy in catabolic and anabolic reactions in a living cell.

(a) Using arrowsX and Y show the direction of catabolic and anabolic reactions respectively on
figure 2
(b) Name compounds marked B and one example of the process represented by A and C.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Outline two roles of ATP in living cells. . (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(d) Give three differences between oxidative phosphorylation and photophosphorylation.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 336 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

22. The flow chart below illustrates some of the stages that occur in glycolysis.

(a) State the net gain in ATP from one molecule of glucose in glycolysis.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Explain why the yield of ATP from the respiration of one molecule of glucose when oxygen is
present is more than the yield of ATP from the respiration of one molecule of glucose under
anaerobic conditions.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

23. (a) How in a respiratory chain do elctrons from FADH2 and NADH2 passing through
cytochromes liberate energy for ATP synthesis?. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 337 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) How does the poison cyanide act upon aerobic respiration?. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) What is the precise role of oxygen in respiration?. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

24. The figure below shows a process that occurs with in the mitochondrion and some other
substances that enter and leave it.

(a) Name the process that

(i) produces pyruvate in the cytoplasm.. (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) produces reduced NAD and carbon dioxide in the matrix of the mitochondrion.. (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Describe how ATP is produced from reduced NAD within the mitochondrion.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 338 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

25. The figure below shows metabolic pathway within a mitochondrion from a liver cell.

(a) Suggest why the respiratory substrate added to the metabolic pathway was a molecule from
the Krebs cycle not glucose.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) What additional substance, other than those mentioned on the on diagram , would be added to
this preparation inorder to get the results shown.. (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Explain why;
(i) Why the amount of oxygen fell between A and B. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) The shape of trace after C.. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 339 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

26. The figure below shows degradation of a hexose sugar and genearation of of a triose sugar in a C3
plant and in animal in presence and absence of oxygen.

(a) i) Name compounds W,X,Y and Z.. (2 marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
ii) How do the reaction in stage 2 differ from those of stage 3?. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
iii) State the significance of stage 4 in energy production.. (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) What would happen if a poison is added at stage 3?. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) State how compound X is modified to form the second sugar ( triose sugar) in plants.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 340 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

27. The respiratory quotient (RQ) of a resting person is approximately 0.85. A man exercised
vigorously for two minutes and his respiratory quoteint was measured at regular intervals for 40
minutes. The results were plotted in the figure below.

(a) (i) Explain the variation in the RQ up to the fourth minute after the exercise.. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) From the graph, determine the time taken for the RQ value of man to remain below normal.
Show your working.. (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(iii) Explain the decline in the RQ value below the normal for a period of time determined above.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) What is the fate of pyruvate formed during anearobic respiration in a plant cell.. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 341 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

28. The conversion of succinate fumerate by an enzyme, succinate dehydrogenase. This is one odf
the steps in the krebs cycle. (a) State the role played by the dehydrogenase enzyme in the krebs
cycle (1 mark).
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Explain the importance of this role in (a) above in the production of ATP. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) An investigation was carried out into the effects of different concentrations of aluminiun ions
on the activity of succinate dehydrogenese. The enzyme concentration and other coditions were
kept constant.

(i) Describe the effect of concentration of aluminium ions on the rate of production of the
fumerate. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Suggest an explanation for this effect. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 342 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

11.6 Transport in animals

1. Which one of the following is the role of the capillary network around the alveoli in mammals A.
Makes the alveoli more permeable
B. Increases the surface area of the alveoli
C. Maintains a steep diffusion gradient
D. Make the alveoli cell thinner.

Kato Maxmillian 343 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

2. Which of the following is the major forming which carbon dioxide travels to the lungs from
tissues?

A. Carbonic acid C. Carboxyhemoglobin

B. Sodium bicarbonate D. Bicarbonate ions

3. Which one of the following conditions results into alkaline tide in the cells?
A. Increased concentration of hydrogen carbonate ions.
B. Increased concentration of hydrogen ions.
C. Increased formation of hydrochloric acid.
D. Increased dissociation of sodium chloride

4. In single circulation, the blood pressure is low because

A. The blood passes through two capillary systems
B. Animals that have single circulation have single-chambered heats
C. The single circulations system lacks valves
D. The main vessels in single circulation are capillaries.

5. The contractions of cardiac muscle is said to be myogenic because:-

A. they can only be stimulated to contract after a nerve impulse
B. the contractions can be generated from within the cardiac muscle itself.
C. only hormonal stimulation can initiate these contractions.
D. Spontaneous contractions occur in cardiac muscle as pace maker lacks

6. In amphibian double circulation, mixing of oxygenated and deoxygenated blood is prevented by;

A. vertical septum. C. completely divided ventricles.

B. spiral valves. D. steady blood pressure in the heart.

7. Which one of the following conditions reduces the affinity of haemoglobin for oxygen

A. High oxygen concentration C. Low body temperature

B. High carbon dioxide concentration D. high of blood.

Kato Maxmillian 344 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

8. Which of these is the correct sequence of the movement of impulses in the heart wall before
contraction?

9. The mountain gorilla lives at high altitude and has its oxygen dissociation curve located at the left
of many animals. This suggests that
A. There is low carbon dioxide tension at high altitudes
B. Its hemoglobin has higher affinity for oxygen than many animals
C. Temperatures are low at high altitudes
D. It has high concentration of myoglobin in its muscles.

10. Which one of the following conditions would lead to the Bohr effect in mammals?
A. Decrease in the pH of the blood
B. Increase in the partial pressure of oxygen in the environment
C. Decrease in the metabolic rate
D. Increase in environmental temperature.

11. 14. Which one of the following organisms possesses a heart which pumps out only deoxygenated
blood?

A. Birds B. Mammals C. Amphibians D. Fish

12. Which of the following substances is not transported by blood circulatory system in a blood
circulatory system in arthropods?

A. Nutrients C. Hormones
B. Respiratory gas D. Nitrogenous wastes

13. Which of the following animal groups have body segments and closed circulatory system?

A. Crustacea B. Platyhelminthes C. Annelida D. Insecta

Kato Maxmillian 345 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

14. Which one of the following is the correct order of events in the heart after the contraction of the
atria?
A. Atrio - ventricular valves open, ventricle contract, semi lunar valves close
B. Ventricles contract, atrio - ventricular valves close, semi lunar valves open
C. Ventricles contract, atrio - ventricular valves open, semi lunar valves open
D. Atrio - ventricular valves open, semi lunar valves open, ventricles contract

15. Which one of the following foetal blood vessels carries the most oxygenated blood?

A. Pulmonary artery C. Posterior vena cava

B. Dorsal aorta D. Umbilical vein

16. The main problem of single circulation is the

A. slow speed of blood to the tissues
B. mixing of oxygenated and de-oxygenated blood
C. low rate of oxygenated of blood
D. Resistance to blood flow.

17. Which one of the following structures is responsible for initiating the contractions of the heart?

A. Purkinje tissue C. Sino atrial node

B. Atrio-ventricular node D. Heart muscle

18. Which one of the following blood pigments contains copper?

A. Haemocyanin C. Haemoerythrin
B. Myoglobin D. Haemoglobin

19. The ability of the heart to contract without fatigue is owed to the

A. Sino ventricular node C. Sino arterial node

B. Cardiac muscle D. Purkinje tissue

Kato Maxmillian 346 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

20. Changes in the level of carbon dioxide in mammalian blood is detected by the

A. Carotid and aortic bodies C. Cardio-vascular centres

B. Medulla oblongata D. Hypothalamus

21. Which blood vessels are able to change their resistance to blood flow, regulating distribution of
blood flow to organs?

A. Veins B. Arteries C. Arterioles D. Capillaries

22. 5. The artery is adapted to withstand resulting from the pumping of the heart by having a
A. Superficial location on the body to allow distension
B. Thin elastic wall that extends with increased pressure
C. Thick tough wall to withstand the pressure
D. System of valves that prevent back flow of blood

23. Which one of the pairs of animals listed below possess an incomplete double circulatory system?

A. Rat and frog C. Frog and lizard

B. Cow and baboon D. Snake and dolphin

24. Which of the following statements best defines the Bohr effect?
A. At high level of respiration hydrogen ions combine with haemoglobin.
B. When the partial pressure of oxygen is high than oxygen dissociation curve shifts to the right.
C. When the partial pressure of carbon dioxide is high the oxygen dissociation curve shifts to the
left.
D. When there is a low level of hydrogen ions oxyhaemoglobin dissociates faster

25. The lymphatic system is important in

A. Promoting blood clothing
B. Distribution of body heat
C. Transporting hormones around the body
D. Draining excess tissue fluid into the blood circulatory system

26. The lymph fluid is slightly different from blood plasma in that it contains
A. Less proteins, more of the other food materials and more waste products

Kato Maxmillian 347 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

B. Less proteins, less of the other food materials and more waste products
C. More proteins, less of the other food materials and more waste products
D. Less proteins, less of the other food materials and less waste products

27. 10. Which of the following factors may not alter the frequency of electrical excitation of the Sino
atrial node of the heart?
A. Increase in carbon dioxide content of blood
B. Accumulation of mineral salts in blood
C. Increase in oxygen content of blood
D. Increased blood sugar level

28. Which one of the following would normally decrease the cardiac rate?
A. Secretion of adrenalin into the blood
B. Accumulation of lactic acid in the tissues
C. Increase in the blood oxygen content
D. Increase in the carbon dioxide content in blood

29. Purkinje nerve cells are found in the

A. Pericardiac membrane C. Pseudoheart.

B. Abdomen D. Thorax

30. The importance of the branchial hearts in octopuses is to;

A. pump oxygenated blood to the body tissues. C. pump deoxygenated blood to the gills.
B. pump oxygenated blood to the main heart. D. pump deoxygenated blood to the main heart

31. Which of the following statements is true of arteries?

A. they carry blood away from the heart C. carry blood in large quantities
B. always carry oxygenated blood D. have thinner walls than the veins

32. In amphibian double circulation, mixing of oxygenated and deoxygenated blood is prevented by;

A. vertical septum. C. completely divided ventricles.

B. spiral valves. D. steady blood pressure in the heart

Kato Maxmillian 348 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

33. The mammalian heart muscle cells are supplied with blood by the;

A. pulmonary arteries B. coronary arteries C. hepatic artery D. cardiac arteries

34. Myoglobin is more abundant in active muscles because it

A. Easily release oxygen to the muscles. C. Offers a red colour to the muscles
B. Has a low affinity for oxygen D. Slowly releases oxygen to the muscles.

35. Lack of a nucleus in the red blood cell enables it to

A. have a high affinity for oxygen C. give up oxygen more readily

B. be more permeable to oxygen D. contain more haemoglobin

36. Oxygen from myoglobin is realeased after oxyhaemoglobin supplies are exhausted because
myoglobin
A. acts as a store of oxygen in resting muscles.
B. works better when partial pressure of oxygen is high.
C. is produced in skeletal muscles when oxygen demand is low.
D. has low affinity for oxygen for oxygen than haemoglobin.

37. Carbon dioxide is carried in the red blood cells of mammals in form of.

A. carboxyhaemoglobin C. carbonic anhydrase

B. carbamino compound D. haemoglobinic acid

38. Which one of the descibes the chloride shift during transportation of carbon dioxide in mammala?
A. hydrogen carbonate ions leave the erythrocytes as chloride ions from tissues, enter.
B. chloride ions leave the erythrocytes as hydrogen carbonate ions from tissues, enter.
C. chloride ions enter the lungs as hydrogen carbonate ions leave the erythrocytes.
D. hydrogen carbonate ions enter the lungs as chloride ions leave the ertyhrocytes.

Kato Maxmillian 349 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

39. Which one of the following terms is used to refer to displacement of the oxygen haemoglobin
dissociation curve by a change in pH?

A. Bohr effect B. Decomposition C. Chloride shift D. Alkaline tide

40. Which of the following does not lower affinity of haemoglobin?

A. Increase in acidity of the medium
B. Increase in carbon dioxide concentration of the medium
C. Decrease in carbon dioxide concentration of the medium
D. High oxygen concentration in the medium

41. Atrio-ventricular and semi-lunar valves

A. ensure supply of blood to the heart muscle cells
B. help to keep blood moving in one direction in the heart
C. separate the left from the right ventricles and atria
D. ensure supply of blood to skeletal muscle

42. The tissues of the smokers for cigarettes develop anoxic conditions. Which one of the following
best explains this observation?
A. Cigarette chemicals damage the red blood cells.
B. Haemoglobin has a higher affinity for carbon dioxide than oxygen.
C. There is formation of a high concentration of carboxyhaemoglobin.
D. Carbaminohaemoglobin is a chemically stable compound.

43. The following can occur during high blood pressure beyond the norm, except;
A. Increase in the rate of emission of waves of electrical excitation by the SAN.
B. Decrease in the volume of blood pumped by the heart per minute.
C. Widening of the lumen of the arterioles serving the body tissues with blood.
D. The sympathetic output becomes suppressed.

44. Which of the following is not true about the blood circulatory and lymphatic systems in
mammals? The fluid contains

A. excretory products C. plasma proteins

B. leucocytes D. dissolved food

Kato Maxmillian 350 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

45. Usually sodium ions and potassium ions are actively pumped out of a red blood cell. When the
cell is treated with a metabolic poison, it byrsts because
A. the metabolic poison weakens the cell surface.
B. accumulation of sodium ions and potassium ions inside the cell alters its water potential.
C. the influx of potassium ions damages the structure of the surface .
D. accumulation of sodium ions inside the cell alters its water potential.

46. Climbing the Rwenzori mountain rapidly may result in altitude sickness. This will be due to,
A. Reduced partial pressure of oxygen in the air.
B. reduced quantities of haemoglobin in the erythrocytes.
C. nitrogen bubbles forming in the blood stream.
D. increased carbon content of the blood.

47. Blood flows in the heart of an insect as a result of

A. raising the perivisceral membrane C. relaxation of the heart ligaments.

B. contraction of the alary muscle D. increase in pericardial prssure.

48. Where is the mammalian heart beat initiated?

A. atrioventricular B. left atrium. D. sinoatrio node.

node. C. purkyne tissue.

49. What causes the biscupid valve to close during ventricular sysytole? A. a greater blood pressure
in the left atrium than in the left ventricle.
B. a greater blood pressure in the left ventricle than in the left atrium.
C. contraction of muscles in the septum. D. contraction of muscles in the valve.

50. The forward movement of blood through the tubular heart in insects from posterior to the anterior
end involves

A. Waves of systole along the heart walls. C. Relaxation of alary muscles.

B. Waves of diastole along the heart walls. D. Decrease in tension ligaments

Kato Maxmillian 351 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

51. Which one of the following when at high levels in blood , increase the rate of heart beat.

A. Carbon dioxide. C. Oxygen.

B. Thyroxine. D. Adrenaline.

52. The lung fish living in mud has its oxygen dissociation curve to the left of that of the humans
because?
A. there is a high level of carbon doxide concentration in mud.
B. the lung fish’s haemoglobin has a higher affinity for oxygen than that of humans.
C. of the lower temperatures of the lung fish.
D. of low level of oxygen concentration in the mud.

STRUCTURED QUESTIONS

53. The figure below shows the oxygen dissociation curve of two species of fish, the carp and the
mackerel. The carp lives in the pond with decomposing vegetation while the Mackerel lives in the
surface water of the sea.

(a) Describe how the percentage saturation of haemoglobin woth oxygen changes with change in
partial pressure of oxygen of two species
(i) Carp (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Mackerel (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 352 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Explain the changes in the percentage saturation of haemoglobin with partial pressure of
oxygen in the two species
Carp (4 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
Mackerel (4 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

54. The figure below shows the oxygen dissociation curves for a tadpole blood and that of an adult
frog.

(a) Explain the relative position of the curves for the tadpole blood and that of the an adult frog.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) What is the position of the dissociation curve for the tadpole in its environment?. (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 353 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(c) How is the skin of frog adapted for gaseous exchange? (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

55. (a) Explain the following

(i) If a rhesus negative mother of blood group O is carrying a rhesus positive child of any blood
group other than O, haemolytic disease of the new born does not arise. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) The oxygen dissociation curve of a cat lies to the right of that for humans. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Describe the main feature of the foetal blood circulation which do not occur in the adult man
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

56. (a) Give the meaning of each of the following

(i) Chloride shift.
...............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 354 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(ii) Bohr effect.

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b). Explain the effect of each of the following on the oxygen dissociation curve of haemoglobin
in mammals.
(i) increase in environmental temperature.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii). High carbon dioxide levels in body tissues.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Explain the physiological advantage of high concentration of myoglobin in skeletal muscles.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

57. Figure 2 shows oxygen dissociation curves for Haemoglobin of two animals x and y, living in
different habitats.

Kato Maxmillian 355 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(a) From the figure, state three differences in the behavior of haemoglobin of the two animals.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) (i) Outline the characteristics of the haemoglobin of animal
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) From the characteristics in (b) (i) suggest the nature of the habitat in which animal y lives.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Human haemoglobin has a higher affinity for carbon monoxide than oxygen. What is the
effect of this fact?
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

58. Figure 3 shows diagrams of two types of blood circulatory systems A and B, in animals. The
arrows the direction of the blood flow.

Kato Maxmillian 356 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(a) Describe each circulatory system.

(i) A.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) B
........................................................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) How does each system maintain a high blood pressure?
(i) A.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) B
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) What is the advantage of maintaining a high blood pressure over a fluctuating pressure in a
circulatory system of an animal?
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 357 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

59. (a) Figure 4 shows the oxygen dissociation curves at 2.7 kPa of carbon dioxide, in three
organisms: pigeon, human and lugworm that lives in muddy, waterlogged burrows

(a) Explain the position of the curves for the lugworm and pigeon in reference to that for human.
(i) Lugworm
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Pigeon
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) (i) On the same graph sketch oxygen dissociation curves for the lugworm and human if both
organisms were subjected to same higher carbon dioxide tension.
(ii) Explain the position of each of the curves you have sketched
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 358 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

60. (a) (i) Define Bohr effect.

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) What is the physiological importance of Bohr Effect in man?
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

61. (a) What is a closed circulatory system?

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) How is blood flow maintained in such a system?
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) How is blood pressure controlled in the closed system?
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

62. Carbon dioxide is transported in blood in various forms.

(a) Describe how carnon dioxide molecules reach red blood cells from respiring cells. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 359 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

The figure below shows part of the capillary network and some cells surronding the tissue.

(b)State three ways in which the blood at Y differs from the blood at X other than in the
concentration of carbon dioxide. (3marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) An enzyme in blood catalyses the reaction between carbon dioxide and water as blood flows
through respiring tissues.

(i) Name the enzyme that catalyses this reaction. (1mark)

..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Explain the signifincance of this reaction in the transport of carbon dioxide.(3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

63. Mammals have a closed, double circulation.

(i) What is meant by the term double circulation. (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 360 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

The figure below shows part of the circulation in the mammalian tissue.The central part is
enlarged to show a capillary, a cell supplied by the capillary and vessel Z.

(b) Explain why the walls of the artery is thicker than the walls of the vein. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Suggest one role for the pre-capillary sphincter muscle shown in the figure above.(1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
(d) With refrence to the figure above, describe the role capillaries in making tissue fluid. (3
marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(e) (i) Describe three ways in which plasma differs from tissue fluid.(3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Name the fluid in vessel Z.(1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 361 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

11.7 Defence and Immunity

1. The biochemical property of blood essential for its protective function of the body is

A. Ability to clot C. Presence of haemoglobin

B. Possession of antibodies D. Possession of white blood cells.

2. Which one of the following are target cells for HIV (AIDs virus)?

A. Erythrocytes B. Thrombocytes C. Lymphocytes D. Phagocytes

3. Which of the following statements about immunity is incorrect?

A. Heat killed bacteria become antibodies when injected into an animal
B. Antibodies are special proteins
C. Antibodies are produced against specific antigens
D. Antigens can be molecules on a foreign microbe

4. A rhesus positive foetus whose mother is rhesus negative may not be born alive because the
A. Mothers body produces antigens against foetal antibodies
B. Foetus lacks antibodies against the mothers antigens
C. Mothers body produces antibodies against the foetal antigens
D. Mothers red blood cells mix with the foetal blood

Kato Maxmillian 362 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

5. If a new born baby suffers from haemolytic disease, it means that the

A. Mother is rhesus positive C. Baby is rhesus negative

B. Father is rhesus negative D. Father is rhesus positive

6. When a foetus receives antibodies from the mother through the placenta, it acquires

A. Active immunity C. Passive immunity

B. Long-term immunity D. Artificial immunity

7. The function of the plasma cells during immune response is to

A. Secrete antibodies C. kill cells infected with viruses

B. engulf bacteria D. change into memory cells

8. Which one of the following agranulocytes has the highest percentage composition in blood?

A. Lymphocytes B. Neutrophils C. Basophils D. Monocytes

9. Which of the following leucocytes undergoes diapedesis?

A. Eosinophils B. Basophils C. Neutrophils D. Lymphocytes

10. Heparin acts as an anticoagulant by

A. preventing the manufacture of prothrombin
B. inhibiting the manufacture of vitamin K by the liver
C. preventing the conversion of prothrombin to thrombin
D. inhibiting the conversion of fibrinogen to fibrin

11. . Which one of the following is involved in cell-mediated immunity?

i) B-lymphocytes
ii) T-lymphocytes
iii) Inflammatory response
iv) Lysozymes

Kato Maxmillian 363 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

A. (i) and (iv) B. (i) and (ii) C. (ii) and (iii) D. (ii) and (iv)

12. An antibody is;

A. a vitamin which is activated
B. an activated molecule that kills antigens
C. a receptor molecule that kills antigens
D. a receptor that has binding sites for antigens

13. Which of the following statements about immunity is incorrect?

A. Heat killed bacterial become antibodies when injected into an animal
B. Antibodies are special proteins.
C. Antibodies are produced against specific antigens.
D. Antigens can be molecules on a foreign microbe

14. For a vaccinated individual, the immune system is affected by

A. memory white blood cells C. anti bodies

B. killer T cells D. phagocytic macrophage

15. Which one of the following agranulocytes has the highest percentage composition in blood?

A. Lymphocytes B. Neutrophils C. Basophils D. Monocytes

16. Identify the group that has granulocytes only

A. Eosinophils and monocytes C. Lymphocytes and basophiles

B. Basophils and neutrophils D. monocytes and lymphocytes

17. Why would the removal of the thymus gland from a new born mouse lead to death?
A. Un controlled rise in lymphocyte levels.
B. Failure to recognize and react with antigens.
C. A low erythrocytes and leucocyte count.
D. The stem cells of the bone marrow that give rise to lymphocytes are fully functional.

Kato Maxmillian 364 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

18. Which one of the following Leucocytes, increases greatly in number when an individual develops
hay fever?

A. Basophils B. Neutrophils C. Eosinophils D. Monocytes

19. Which one of the following offers a non specific defense against viral infection?

A. Antibodies B. Interferons C. Leukotrienes D. Histamine

20. Leucocytes take in microscopic pathogens by

A. phagocytosis B. pinocytosis C. endocytosis D. micro endocytosis

STRUCTURED QUESTIONS

21. (a) Explain the function of the antigens and antibodies in the immune system
(i). antigens
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Antibodies
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) State two ways in which passive immunity maybe acquired naturally by a young child.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) During vaccination against tuberculosis(TB), children are injected with a weakened strain of
T.B bacteria. Explain how this procedure can result in long term defense against T.B
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 365 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

22. The table below shows blood group systems in humans. Complete the table by
(i). filling the antigen and the antibody for each blood group
(ii). Indicating whether agglutination occurs (by a cross X) or no agglutination occurs by (a tick ),
when an individual of each blood group receives blood from group AB.

(b). How can a Rhesus negative mother affect a Rhesus positive foetus in her womb.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

23. Figure 4 shows the immune response of a persons blood after vaccinations are given on day one
and 60 days later.

Kato Maxmillian 366 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(a) What is the effect of giving immunization to the individual?

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) From the graph, state the type of immunity acquired by the individual, giving a reason.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Explain the shape of the graph
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(d) Describe three ways in which antibodies combat antigens.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

24. (a) Describe the structure of an antibody.

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 367 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

b) Describe T-cells and the cell- mediated immune response in humans.

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

25. The graph below shows the development of an infection with human immunodefficiency virus.
(HIV) over a period of 10 years. Changes in the number of T lymphocytes is also shown below.

(a) Describe the changes in the number of HIV particles over a period of 10 years.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Describe two ways in which the curve of T4 cells differs from that for the HIV particles.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Account for the differences between the number of T4 cells in blood and the number of HIV
particles over the period.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 368 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

26. The graph below that shows the exxtent of precipitation that occur when serum from different
mammals is mixed with sensitised rabbit serum.

(a) (i) Describe the trend of precipitation of serum human to lemur.

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Explain how precipitates are formed when sensitized rabbit serum is mixed with any
mammal’s serum.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Explain the difference in the amount of precipitate formed between chimpanzee and Lemur.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(d) State one evolutionary conclusion about the relationships between Human beings and;
Chimpanzee
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 369 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

Lemur.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

27. B-lymphocytes orginate from the stem cells, mature and circulate around the body. Following an
infection by tetanus bacteria, some of the lymphocytes will be activated as shown in the figure
below.

(a) With reference to the figure above, name,

(i) the site where the stem cells divide to form B-lymphocytes. (1 mark).
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) the type of divdision that occurs at E.(1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
(iii) the activated B-lymphocyte,F (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
(iv) the molcule G. (1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Explain how cell H is responsible for long-term immunity to tetanus.(3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 370 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(c) Use the information in the figure above to distinguish between the following pair of terms. (i)
antigen and antibody. (2marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) self and non-self. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

28. The figure below shows an antibody molecule.

(a) Name;
(i) Regions X and Y. (1mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Bond labelled Z.(1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Describe brifely how antibody molecules are produced and secreted. (4 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 371 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(c) Explain how the structure of an antibody is related to its function.(4marks)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

11.8 Transport in plants

1. Which one of the following cell organelles would be most active at sites where substances move
against a diffusion gradient?

A. Ribosomes C. Mitochondria
B. Golgi bodies D. Chloroplast

Kato Maxmillian 372 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

2. In what forms are carbohydrates transported in animals and flowering plants respectively?

A. Glycogen and glucose C. Glucose and fructose

B. Glycogen and starch D. Glucose and sucrose

3. The osmotic theory of stomatal opening and closure is associated with

A. the conversion of starch into sugar in the guard cells
B. accumulation of mineral salts in the guard cells
C. synthesis of abscisic acid in the guard cells
D. production of starch during photosynthesis in the guard cells

Kato Maxmillian 373 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

4. . Which one of the following does not limit loss of water from xerophytes?

A. Possession of succulent tissues C. Reduction in the number of stomata

B. Possession of waxy cuticle D. Folding of leaves

5. What is the structure that transports hormones in higher plants?

A. xylem vessels B. sieve elements C. companion cells D. phloem

6. The pathway which allows water to move from cell to cell through the cytoplasm is the

A. apoplast. B. vacuolar. C. symplast. D. cuticular.

7. . Plants at high altitude possess xeromorphic adaptations because;

A. Temperature increases with altitude
B. Humidity decreases with altitude
C. Atmospheric pressure decreases with altitude
D. Water supply decreases with altitude

8. Which one of the following is false about guard cells?

A. They occur in pairs C. They have chloroplasts

B. They are modified epidermal cells D. Their walls are evenly thickened

9. The suberinised and lignified band in endodermal cells of the root is called

A. lignified collenchymas C. xylem cell with lignified wall

B. A casparian strip D. sclerenchyma support fibre

Kato Maxmillian 374 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

10. A plant with a ringed stem dies quickly because

A. Ringing the stem blocks the air passages
B. all the food and water drains out of the plant
C. the products of photosynthesis cannot reach the roots
D. ringing the stem exposes the plant to disease germs.

11. . Which one of the following does not involve mass flow?
A. Blood flow in the arteries.
B. Uptake of food by the tapeworm.
C. Movement of food and water in the gut.
D. Transport of water and mineral salts by the xylem.

12. Which one of the following qualities of the guard cells least contributes to their opening?

A. Uneven thickened walls C. Inner walls less elastic than outer

B. Presence of Chloroplasts D. Presence of vacuoles

13. Which one of the following sets of conditions in the guard cells would lead to the opening of
stomata?
A. High carbon dioxide concentration and low sugar concentration.
B. Low carbon dioxide concentration and high sugar concentration.
C. High sugar concentration and high carbon dioxide concentration..
D. Low pH and high starch concentration

14. Which of these is a distinctive feature of root pressure?

A. increased absorption of water across the cortex by osmosis
B. active transportation of water from endodermis to xylem
C. maintenance of a continuous water column in the plant
D. Presence of strong attraction between water molecules

15. Which of the following does not affect the rate of transpiration?

A. distribution of stomata C. leaf shape

B. leaf surface area D. soil water

Kato Maxmillian 375 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

STRUCTURED QUESTIONS

16. Figure a shows changes in the relative humidity of the atmosphere during the daylight hours of
one day.
Figure b shows changes in the tension in the xylem of a tree during the same period.

a) Describe the relationship between humudity and xylem tension

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
b) Explain the relationship between humidity and xylem tension.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
C) Explain the differences observed in the xylem tension between the top of the tree and the
bottom of the tree.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 376 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

17. The graph below shows the relationship between the rate of transpiration and rate of water uptake
for a particular plant.

(a) What is transpiration?

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) State two environmental factors which are most likely to be responsible for the channges in
the transpiration rates shown below.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Describe the relationship between the rate of transpiration and rate of water uptake in the
graph below.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(d) Explain the relationship above.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

18. (a) Desribe two forces which enable water to move up the xylem vessels in a continous column.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 377 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Explain how light influences stomatal opening in a plant that has been previously in the dark.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

19. (a) What is mass flow in relation to transport in plants?

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) State three conditions under which mass flow may occur?
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Give two differences between mass flow and cytoplasmic streaming.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

20. a) Define the term cotransport

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
Describe the structure of a guard cell.
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 378 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

21. a) Draw and label the structure of the stoma.

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
b) Outline the characteristics of guard cells which enable them to control the stomatal movement.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
C) Briefly explain stomatal movement basing on the theory of carbon dioxide changes.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

22. (a) State three physiological differences between xylem and phloem tissues.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) How are plant sugars loaded into the sieve tubes according to the pressure flow hypothesis?
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 379 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Suggest three evidences that translocation of sugars from the source to the sink in plants is an
active process.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

23. The figure below shows a relationship between the rate of transpiration and water uptake for a
particular plant. Study it carefully and answer the questions that follow.

(a) Compare the rate of transpiration and uptake of water.

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Explain the relationship between rate of water uptake and transpiration upto miday.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) State two environmental factors which are most likely to be affecting the rate of transpiration
as shown in the graph above.

Kato Maxmillian 380 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(d) State two adaptations of leaves to stress.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

24. The figure below shows two cells from a root of a plant.

(a) What name is given to the pathway represented by arrow labelled A?

..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) The table below gives information about the uptake of calcium and nitrate ions by plant root.
Ion Path way by which ion travels across the root Concentration difference.
Nitrate A Higher concentration inside the plant than in soil.
Calcium B Higher concentration in soil than in plants.
(i) Name the process by which you would expect each ion to enter the root from the soil.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 381 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(ii) Suggest an explanation for the link between the pathway by which an ion travels across the
root and the direction of the concentration gradient.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

25. The graph below shows two experiments A and B. In both cases, the uptake of potassium ions
into the roots of young plants was measured. The roots were thoroughly washed in pure water
before the plants were to the solution containing potassium ions.

(a) Describe the results of experiment A over the first 80 minutes of the experiment. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Describe the results of experiment B.(3marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Explain the results in (b) above.(3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 382 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
(d) What is the effect of adding potassium cynide in experiment A.(1 mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(f) Explain the effect of adding potassium cynide in experiment A. (2 mrks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(e) Suggest why the roots were thoroughly washed in pure water before the experiment.(2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 383 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

12 ADJUSTMENT AND CONTROL

12.1 Principles of homeostasis

1. Which one of the following is not a requirement for the working of a physiological homeostatic
mechanism?

A. Receptors C. Control mechanisms

B. Skin capillaries D. Effectors

2. An efficient physiological homeostatic system is the one which;

A. allows positive feedbacks. C. responds to small fluctuations.

B. allows large fluctuations. D. responds to deficiency faster than excess.

STRUCTURED QUESTIONS

Kato Maxmillian 384 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

3. What is meant by negative feedback in homeostasis (02mark)

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Give two characteristics if an efficient homeostasis system (02mark)
........................................................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

4. (i) Outline the general features a physiological homeostatic system must have.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) What are qualities of an efficient homeostatic system?
........................................................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(iii) Graphs below compare the efficiency of a homeostatics systems. The vertical axis shows a
parameter being considered as time goes.

(iv) Identify the graph which represent an efficient and an inefficient homeostatic system:
Efficient
..............................................................................................................................................................
Inefficient
..............................................................................................................................................................
(v) Explain your answer in (b) (iv) above.
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 385 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

5. The figure below shows differences between negative feedback and positive feedback.

(a) Suggest why negative feedback is frequently involved in homeostasis.

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Explain how negative feedback enables the carotid and aortic bodies and medulla to maintain
a constant blood carbon dioxide level.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Explain why mechanism involved in the initiation of an action potential is an example of
positive feedback.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(d) Why are posistve feedback mechanisms so rare in the biological processes of an organism?
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 386 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

12.2 Glucose regulation in the body

1. The main function of Kupffer cells of the liver is to

A eliminate sex hormones C. eliminate haemoglobin

B. form red blood cells D. destroy old red blood cells

2. Which one of the following will result in the formation of gall stones in the liver?

A. Blockage of the bile duct C. High level of cholesterol in the diet

B. Breakdown of haemoglobin in the liver D. Accumulation of bile salts

Kato Maxmillian 387 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

STRUCTURED QUESTIONS

3. The figure below shows results obtained from an experiment to determine the response of
pancreatic cells in a person who ingested only water for 12 hours and then had ahot drink of
glucose solution. The amount of insulin, glucagon and glucose in her blood was determined at
one hour interval.

(a) Explain the significance of the person ingesting only water for the first 12 hours before having
the glucose drink.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Describe the changes in glucose of a person.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Explain the increase in the concentraion of insulin in the first hour of the investigaation.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(d) Suggest how the results will change if the experiment continued for longer than five hours
without the person taking anything.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 388 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

4. The figure below shows a structure of a transverse section of a mammalian liver as observed
through a mocroscope.

(a) Rule accurate guide-lines, an using the intial letters indicated below, label the diagram to
identify the following.
(i) a branch of hepatic vein (HV).
(ii) a branch of hepatic portal vein (HPV).
(iii) a liver sinusoid.(S).
(iv) a site where the storage of glycogen would be present(G).
(v) a portion of connective tissue (Glisson’s capsule) (GT).
(b List four different ways in which the blood composition could be changed as a result of
homeostatic activity in the liver.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Explain why the rate of blood flow in the hepatic vein is four times greater than the rate of
blood flow in the hepatc artery.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 389 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(d) How is the structured of the liver suited for its functions?
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

5. The graph shows change changes in the blood glucose concentration after a meal.

(a) Give an account of the changes in the blood glucose concentration.

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Accont for the changes in the blood glucose concentrations.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

6. An investigation was carried out to determine the response of pancreatic cells to increase in
glucose concentration of blood. A person who had taken only water for 12 hours then took a
glucose solution.Blood samples were taken from the person at one hour interval for five hours and
the concentarion of glucose, insulin, and glucagon were determined in the figure below.

Kato Maxmillian 390 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(a) i) Explain why the person was told not to eat or drink anything otherthan water for 12 hours
before taking the glucose drink. (3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
ii) Describe the response of the pancraetic cells to an increase in glucose concentration.(4 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
iii) Outline the role of insulin when the glucose concentration in blood increases.(4 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) (i) Suggest how the results will change if the investigation continued longer than five hours
without the person taking any food. (4 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 391 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Outline the sequence of events that follow binding of glucagon to its membrane on a liver
cell. (4marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

12.3 Temperature regulation.

1. The main difference between endotherms and ectotherms is that ectotherms

A. Gain their body heat from internal sources
B. Gain less heat than endotherms
C. Gain the body heat from external sources
D. Are lower animals while endotherms are higher animals

Kato Maxmillian 392 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

2. Which one of the following is a chemical mechanism of coping with cold environment in a
mammalian body?

A. Vasoconstriction C. Raising of body hair

B. Shivering D. Insulation by the subcutaneous fat.

3. Which one of the following is the reason for hibernation of a humming bird every night?
A. Its metabolic rate is so high
B. It is too cold at night
C. It feeds on nectar from flowers which close at night
D. Its relatively large surface area would lose too much heat

4. Which one of the following may happen when a mammal is subjected to sever cold?

A. The superficial blood vessels are dilated C. Sweating or panting occurs

B. The hair is lowered D. The rate of metabolism increase

5. Which one of the following adaptations would be most essential in animals living in desert
environments?

A. Possession of large number of sweat glands C. Possession of light fur

B. Use of metabolic water D. Possession of long intestine

6. The temperature mammals such as polar bears have lower lethal temperatures than tropical ones.
This is because of
A. Body colour
B. Large size in temperate mammals
C. Better insulation mechanism in tropical mammal
D. Better insulation mechanisms in temperature mammals.

7. The latent heat of evaporation of sweat is 3.15KJcm−3 . What is the percentage of the energy lost
by sweating from a manual worker who loses 2dm3 per a day of sweat and has a daily energy
intake of 40,000KJ?

A. 6.30. B. 7.88. C. 8.25. D. 15.75

Kato Maxmillian 393 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

8. Heat loss is most efficiently reduced in body extremities of endotherms by having

A. veins and arteries parallel and close to each other.
B. thick fur.
C. thick subcutaneous layer.
D. few sweat glands.

STRUCTURED QUESTIONS

9. The figure below shows a mechanism of temperature regulation in a mammal.

(a) Use the figure above to explain what is meant by negative feedback.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Where are receptors which detect a rise in the temperature of blood.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Describe the part played by the blood vessels in the skin in returning a high body
temeperature to its normal value.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(d) Give one advantage of the body of possessing separate mechanisms to retuen high and low
temeperatures to their normal value.
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 394 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
(e) Explain why it is an advantage for humans to have a constant body temperaure.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

10. Figure 3 shows the relationship between air temperature from summerthrough winter and body
temperature of hibernating and non hibernating endotherms.

(a) Explain the changes in the body temperature when air temperature changes in the; (i)
Hibernating endotherm.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) non-hibernating endotherm.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) What is the importance of hibernation in mammals that live in cold regions.
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 395 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Explain whyit is mainly small animals that hibernate.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

11. (a) Explain why a person with malaria fever undergoes shivering
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Explain the significance of the thermoregulatory ectothermic behavior of a camel
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Mention one advantage and disadvantage of paracetamol or panadol to the patient with
malaria fever
(i) advantage
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) disadvantage
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

12. Fig.7 shows the metabolic rates of the artic fox (curve WX) and the Kangaroo rat (curve YZ) in
relation to the environment temperature.

Kato Maxmillian 396 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(i) What do points X and Z stand for?

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Give two differences in metabolic rates of the Kangaroo rat and the artic fox in relation to
environment temperature.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(iii) What do the differences you have stated in (b)(ii) imply?
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(iv)Explain how the limbs of mammals living in arctic conditions are kept at a lower temperature
than the core temperature, but higher than that of the surrounding.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 397 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

13. The figure below shows the metabolic rate and body temperature of a naked man subjected to a
gradual lowering environmental temperature from 290 C to -1o C.

(a) What do points Y and Z represent in the figure below?

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Explain the effect of lowering environmental temperature in this experiment.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Why should body temepratures increase when malaria parasites invade the body?
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 398 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

14. The figure below shows the variation of metabolic rate with environmental temperature in a
mammal.

(a) What do points B and C represent?.

(i) B:
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) C:
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Explain why the metabolic rate
(i) is constant between points B and C.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) increase from points B to A.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(iii) increase from pont C to D.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Explain how point B would differ between an animal living in cold regions and that living in
warm regions.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 399 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

15. The figure below shows the variation of metabolic rate with environmental temperature in a
mammal.

(a) What does temperature X and Y represent?

(i) X:
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Y:
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) What does the efficiency range mean?
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Explain the variation of metabolic rate with environmental temperature outside the efficiency
range.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(d) The efficiency range is not fixed but differ from animal to animal. Giving a reason, state how
point X would differ between an animal living in a cold environment and that living in a hot
environment.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 400 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

12.4 Excretion

1. Which one of the following is true of ammonia as nitrogenous waste? It

A. Requires little energy for its excretion C. Is excreted in a solid form

B. Requires much water for its excretion D. Is excreted by sea animals.

2. Some animals living arid habitats excrete uric acid because it is

A. Not toxic C. Highly toxic

B. Highly soluble in water D. Insoluble in water

3. The desert frog has solved the problem of osmoregulation by

A. Having unique nocturnal habits C. Having a water proof skin

B. Possessing few glomeruli D. Possessing a long loop of henle

4. Which one of the following is a way of minimizing water loss in a desert animal?

A. Drinking a lot of water C. Feeding on succulent vegetation

B. Possession of a few glomeruli D. Having a short loop of henle.

5. Which one of these plasma constituents is reabsorbed in the distal convoluted tubule?

A. Urea B. Chloride C. Glucose D. Protein

Kato Maxmillian 401 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

6. Blood plasma contains proteins but glomerular filtrate does not. Why does this difference in
composition occur?
A. Blood osmotic pressure is maintained by the pressure of back proteins.
B. Proteins are actively transported from the kidney tubule back into the blood capillaries.
C. Proteins cannot pass through the membranes of the glomerular capillaries
D. There is a high hydrostatic pressure in the blood within the glomerular capillaries

7. Which part of the nephron in a mammal contains the highest concentration of urea?

A. Distal tubule B. Proximal tubule

C. proximal tubule D. collecting tubule

8. The production of hypertonic urine in animals is mainly achieved by the

A. bowman’s capsule. C. proximal convoluted tubule.

B. loop of henle. D. distal tubule.

9. From the ornithine cycle,

A. Carbon dioxide is produced B. Ammonia is produced

C. Urea is produced D. Uric acid is produce

STRUCTURED QUESTIONS

10. (a) With reasons, give examples of animals which produce each of the following excretory
products:
(i) Ammonia
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Uric acid
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 402 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(b) State
(i) Why the pH of the body fluids in a human body is kept constant. (02 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) three ways of keeping the pH in b(i) constant. (03 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

11. Explain the following observations in humans.

(a) Production of large volumes of dilute urine on a cold day.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Urine production almost stops as a result of serious blood loss.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Presence of sugar in urine
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(d) Feeling hungry faster in cold weather
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 403 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

12. (a) What is deamination?

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Outline the ornithine cycle in the formation of urea
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) In addition for deamination name four other functions of the liver
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

13. The diagram below shows part of a nephron of a mammalian kidney.

(a) Identify the part labeled B.

..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) As blood passes through the blood vessels in the part labeled A, pressure is built up. What is
the effect of this increase in pressure?
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 404 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) The table below shows the percentage of various components in the blood plasma in the part
labeled A, the fluid in the part labeled B and in the urine of a human.

(i) Give a reason why there is no protein in the urine.

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Which component of urine shows the greatest percentage increase in concentration compared
to the fluid in B?
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(iii) Give a reason why the component you have named in (ii) above has the greatest increase in
concentration in urine.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(iv) Suggest with a reason the health condition of the person from whom the figures were
obtained?
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 405 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

14. Nephrosis is a kidney condition in which damage to the glomeruli results in large quantities of
protein passin g through the glomeruli filtrate. This protein finally appears in urine.
(a) Suggest why this protein is not reabsorbed into the blood stream in the proximal convoluted
tubule of the nephron.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) As a result of nephrosis, large amounts of tissue fluid accumulate in the body, especially the
ankle and the feet.
(i) Explain why loss of protein from the body results in accumulation of tissue fluid.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Suggest why this tissue fuild accumulates especially in the ankles and the feet.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) (i) Explain how the action in the kidney of the hormone aldosterone controls the sodium
content in blood.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Suggest why little aldosterone is produced by person suffering from nephrosis.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

15. The table below shows the percentage composition of blood plasma and urine for four substances.

Component Blood plasma(%) Urine(%)

Water 90 90.
Plasmaproteins 8 0
Glucose 0.1 0
Urea 0.03 2

Kato Maxmillian 406 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(a) Explain why

(i) there is no plasma protein in urine.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) urea concentration is greater in urine than in blood plasma.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) The relative length of the loop of Henle differs greatly between diffrent species of mammals.
State the type of environment which you might expect to fond species with relatively long loops,
giving reasons for your answer.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(d) The figure below shows the rate of glucose reabsorption in, and excretion froma, a
mammalian kidney in relation to glucose concentration in plasma.

(a) In which part of the nephron is glucose reabsorbed?

..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Explain the glucose of reabsportion curve when the plasma glucose concentration is:
(i) Between 0 and 200mg/100cm−3 .
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 407 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(ii) over 400mg/100cm−3

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Use the graph to explain why glucose may occur in urine of diabetics.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

16. (a) What polymer is formed from the amino acid by condesation reactions?
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) The figure below shows part of the structural formula of an amino acid.

(i) Complete the structural formula of the amino acid.

(ii) With reference to the diagram, explain what is meant by deamination.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(iii) Describe what happens , in the liver, to the products of deamination.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 408 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

17. The figure below shows the events of the ornithine cycle. Study it carefully and answer the
questions that follow.

(a)Name compounds X,Y and Z:

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Identify the site where the following compounds are formed.
(i) Arginine;
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Y;
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) State the significance of the regeneration of ornithine from arginine.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(d) State any three disorders of the liver.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 409 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

12.5 Osmoregulation

1. which one of the following parts of the nephron contributes to the production of hypertonic urine?

A. Bowmans capsule C. Distal convoluted tubule

B. Proximal convoluted tubule D. Loop of henle.

2. The following are adaptations for survival among animals during periods of water shortage
(i) Tolerance to water loss
(ii) Biochemical production of water
(iii) Reduction in water loss
(iv) Evasion of hot environment

Which one of the following is a correct set used by the camel?

A. (i) and (ii) only C. (i), (ii) and (iv)

B. (i), (ii) and (iii) D. (iii) and (iv) only

3. Cartilagenous fish retain urea in the blood inorder to

A. Avoid dehydration
B. Reduce entry of salts into the tissue

Kato Maxmillian 410 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

C. Avoid loss of excess water by excreting it

D. Maintain an internal ionic concentration in balance with the external medium

4. The influx of water in fresh water bony fish is offset by possession of

A. Numerous, large glomeruli and re-absorption of salts from the renal fluid
B. Numerous, small glomeruli and extrusion of salts from the body
C. Few large glomeruli and uptake of salts
D. Many small glomeruli and uptake of salts

5. Which one of the following sets of characteristics is a adaptations in mammals to desert

conditions?
A. Uric acid production and short loop of Henle
B. Long Loop of Henle and urea production
C. Ammonia production and long loops of Henle
D. Short loop of Henle and urea production

6. Vertebrates A and B belong to the same species and are terrestrial. A lives in a dry environment
while B lives in a wet environment. The kidney structure of B would differ from that of A by
having
A. more numerous and smaller glomeruli with longer loop of henle.
B. more numerous and bigger glomeli with shorter loop of henle.
C. fewer and bigger glomeruli with shorter loop of henle.
D. fewer and smaller glomeruli with longer loop of henle.

7. Some of the events that occur in mans body in order to correct an increase in the osmotic
potential of the blood are
1. Increased production of ADH (antidiuretic hormones)
2. Stimulation of osmoreceptors
3. Increased reabsorption of water by the kidney
The correct order in which these occurs is

A. 2, 1, 3 B. 3, 2, 1 C. 1, 2, 3 D. 3, 1, 2

8. An individual with diabetes inspidus feels thirsty most of the time because
A. glucose in urine causes less water to be loss in form of urine.

Kato Maxmillian 411 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

B. there is dehydration due to much water loss.

C. glucose removed from blood stream appears in small quantities in urine.
D. glucose regulation is an endothermic reaction in which heat energy is absorbed.

9. 12. Which one of the following methods is used by marine fish to overcome the problem of
dehydration?
A. Increase in glomerular filtration rate
B. Extensive reabsorption of salts from renal fluids
C. Extrusion of salty by chloride secretory cells
D. Elimination of nitrogenous waste in form of insoluble compounds

10. Which one of the following adaptations would not assist animals living in a desert?
A. Use of metabolic water
B. Possession of a large number of glomeruli
C. Possession of long loop of Henle
D. Production of non-toxic nitrogenous waste

11. In order to survive in the sea, a marine bony fish

A. Loses water by osmosis and absorbs salts
B. Swallows water and absorbs salts
C. Swallows water and extrudes salts
D. Gains water by osmosis and extrudes salts

12. Which one of the following is not characteristic of animals which migrate from fresh water to sea
water?
A. Lack means of osmoregulation
B. Have efficient means of osmoregulation
C. Possess tolerant tissues
D. Employ behavioral means in osmoregulation

13. Where in the host is a parasite lacking sense organs and osmoregulatory devices likely to be
located?

A. On the skin C. in the alimentary canal

B. Under the hair D. liver

Kato Maxmillian 412 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

14. If the osmotic pressure of the external solution is lower than that of the cell, the external solution
is said to be

A. Hypotonic to the cell solution C. Isotonic to the cell solution

B. Hypertonic to the cell solution D. More concentrated than the cell solution

15. The urine that flows out of the collecting duct has its osmotic concentration nearest to that of the

A. Proximal convoluted tubule C. Medulla

B. Distal convoluted tubule D. Cortex

16. The carbon-containing compound resulting from deamination is

A. Ammonia B. Urea C. Uric acid D. An organic acid

17. The significance of direct secretion of waste materials from the epithelial cells of the nephron
tubules into the lumen is to;
A. prevent loss of sugars from the body
B. selectively reabsorb salt into the blood stream.
C. maximize osmotic water reabsorption.
D. minimize water loss from the body, in urine.

18. Which one of the following does not occur during low sodium ion concentration in the body?
A. Increase in concentration of ACTH in blood
B. Increase in concentration of renin enzyme in blood.
C. Decrease in blood pressure inside blood vessels.
D. Increase in the concentration of aldosterone in blood

19. Excessive loss of proteins from blood circulation, via urine, in some patients, results into
excessive accumulation of tissue fluid in the intercellular spaces because low protein level in
blood;
A. increase ultra filtration rate
B. increases diffusion of lymph into the intercellular spaces.
C. enables the osmotic pressure of blood to be lower than the hydrostatic pressure.
D. promotes re-absorption of all amino acids into the blood stream.

Kato Maxmillian 413 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

20. Which one of the following groups of fish have gills which can actively pump salts in and out of
their bodies, depending on the changes in the osmotic pressure of the external environment?

A. Marine elasmobranches C. Fresh water teleosts

B. Euryhaline fish D. Marine teleosts

21. While many fresh water animals posses vacuoles which contract to expel excess water, plants
living in fresh water do not have such vacuoles because
A. plant walls are impermeable to water
B. plant cell sap is of much lower concentration than animal protoplasm
C. water movement into plants is controlled by their roots
D. the water potential inside and outside such plant cells is the same.

22. Which of the following methods is used by the bony fish to regulate its internal environment?
A. actively takes up salts through the gills
B. constantly drinks water.
C. produces isotonic urine in samll quantities.
D. produces dilute urine in large quantities.

23. The blood proteins which filter through the tiny pores of the glomerulus, are reabsorbed from the
lumen of proximal convoluted tubules into the epithelial cells of the tubules by;

A. Active transport B. Pinocytosis C. Diffusion D. phagocytosis

24. In which part of the mammalian kidney is blood likely to to be most viscous as ot flows?
A. in the affarent vessel.
B. In the capillaries at the proximal convoluted tubule.
C. in the efferent vessel.
D. in the capillaries of the distal convoluted tubule.

Kato Maxmillian 414 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

STRUCTURED QUESTIONS

25. Figure 6 shows the effect of changing the osmotic pressure of the external medium (Ope), on the
osmotic pressure of the blood (Opi), of sea animals A and B.

(a) Explain the effect of decreasing the Ope on the Opi of each animal.
(i) Animal A
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Animal B
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Using the information provided, suggest an ecological advantage animal B has over animal A.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 415 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(c) What is the main osmotic problem faced by sea animals whose OPi is less than OPe?
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

26. (a) State three ways by which ions are regulated in mammals
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) The pH of blood and tissue fluid in humans remains constant at about 7.4 inspite of metabolic
activities which produce hydrogen ions. Explain how this constancy is maintained by the kidneys.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

27. The figure below shows the relationship between the osmotic pressure of blood and external
medium of three animals. A, B, and C

(a) Suggest the likely habitat for each animal, giving a reason for each case.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 416 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(b) Explain the osmoregulatory problems ofeach of the following animals.

(i) Fresh water teleosts.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Marine teleosts.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

28. a) State the general features of a homeostatic system.

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
Explain the following:
(i) On a hot day a Kangaroo rat produces a lot of saliva which it then licks over its body.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) A mouse exposed to low environmental temperature lies curled up in a ball and has pale ears
and feet.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Why the mechanism involved in the initiation of an action potential is an example of positive
feedback
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 417 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

29. (a) Explain the role of sodium ions in maintaining high water potential of blood.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Give reasons for the following observations in a human being;
(i) Urination almost stops during excessive bleeding.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Indiviuals passes out Urine that changes yellow if boiled with Benedicts solution.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Give two structural mechanisms employed by fresh water fish to solve the problem of
osmoregulation.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

30. a) Define the term counter current multiplier.

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
b) Outline any four features which favour the loop of Henle to serve as a counter current
multiplier
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 418 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
c) Study the sketch graph below and answer the questions which follow.

i)What does the ratio 1.0 signify?

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
ii) Account for the changes in renal to plasma ratio of the following at the proximal tubule;
Chloride ions
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
Glucose of treated kidney
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 419 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

Glucose of none treated kidney

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
d). What does the difference between the ratio of chloride ions at the proximal tubule and the
distal convoluted tubule signify?
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

31. Explain the changes in the concentration of sodium ions in the renal fluid along the
(a) descending limb of the loop of Henle.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) ascending limb of the loop pf Henle.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) collecting duct.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

32. a) i) What is meant by osmoregulation?

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 420 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

ii) Outline the importance of osmoregulation in unicellular organisms.

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
b) Outline the ways in which the following organisms overcome their osmoregulatory problems.
i) Fresh water bony fish.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
ii) marine bonny fish
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

33. The figure below show the concemtration of solutes in the fluids of diffrent a nephron from a
human kidney. Curve A shaows the concentration in the presence of hormone ADH. Curve B
shows the concentration when no ADH present.

(a) Aithough solutes such as glucose are reabsorbed in the first convoluted tubule, the

Kato Maxmillian 421 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

concentration of these solutes doesnot change as the fluid flows along this part. Explain why?
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) What causes the concentration of the solutes to increase then decrease as the fluid flows along
the loop of Henle.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Explain the difference in concentration of fluids in the collecting duct in curves A and B
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

34. Diuretics are substances which increase urine production by the kidneys.
(a) Complete the flow chart belwo to show how ethanol acts a diuretic.

Kato Maxmillian 422 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(b) (i) Explain why eating large amounts of glucose can lead to lead to an increase in urine
production.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Some diuretics used in medicine inhibit the reabsorption of chloride ions in the loop of Henle.
Explain how this would lead to an increase in urine production.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

35. (a) (i) Define the term osmoconformer.

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Explain osmoregulation in fish occupying both marine and fresh water habitats.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Give two physiological and ecological advantages of the fish in (a) above over the marine
teleost.
Physiological advantages.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
Ecological advantages;
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 423 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

13 RESPONSE AND COORDINATION

13.1 Plant response and growth substances

1. Which one of the following pairs of responses in plants is caused by unequal distribution of
Auxins?

A. Photoperiodism and phototropism C. Nastic movement and geotropism

B. Geotropism and phototropism D. Photoperiodism and abscission

2. In plants, the growth substances that whic interact to cause cell enlargement are

A. ethylene and abscisisv acid. C. gibberellins and auxins.

B. cytokinin and ethylene. D. cytokinins and bascisic acid.

3. When the shoot of the apex of a growing plant is removed , lateral growth is encouraged because
A. auxins are activated in buds
B. growth of lateral buds is stimulated by gibberellins

Kato Maxmillian 424 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

C. more abscisic acid is produced to promote lateral growth

D. cytokinins are activated in the absence of auxins at the apex

4. Ripening in uripe fruits is facilitated when they are enclosed with ripe ones because?
A. IAA is produced by ripe fruits to initiate ripening of others
B. ripe fruits produce ethene which facilitates ripening of others.
C. ripe fruits increase the temperature which enhances ripening.
D. the unripe fruits absorb moisture from ripe fruits which speeds up ripening

5. In plants, ripening of fruits and falling of leaves are respectively caused by

A. Auxins and gibberellin C. Gibberellins and florigen

B. Cytokinin and auxins D. Ethene and abscisic acid

6. Which one of the following substances would be released by a plant under conditions of water
stress?

A. ethene. B. gibberellins. C. indole acetic acid. D. Abscisic acid.

7. When are giberrellins formed in the germinating starchy seed?

A. after water absorption. C. when the radicle emerges.

B. after production of amylase. D. during the production of amylase

8. The cutting of plant apex encourages the growth of many branches because
A. It encourages interaction of auxins and gibberellins
B. Secondary growth increases in stems
C. Auxins transfer downwards along the stem
D. Apical dominance is removed.

9. Promotion of cell division by cytokinins only in the presence of auxins is an interaction known as

A. Synergistic B. Antagonistic C. Summative D. Complementary

10. The ripening of raw tomatoes when mixed with ripe ones occurs because tomatoes produce

Kato Maxmillian 425 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

A. Warmth B. Cytokinins C. Ethene D. Gibberellins

11. Interruption of the period of darkness by a brief red light prevents flowering in a short day plant
because

A. Florigen is produced rapidly C. The concentration of Pfr increases

B. The concentration of Pfr lowers D. Pr is converted to Pfr

12. In short-day plants, which one of the following will induce flowering?
A. Period of light longer than a critical length
B. Period of darkness longer than a critical length
C. Period of light shorter than a critical length
D. Period of darkness shorter than a critical length

13. Which one of the following hormones initiates flowering in long-day plants?

A. Auxins B. Gibberelins C. Abscisin D. Florigen

14. A light flash given in the middle of the night over several days may delay flowering in

A. Longday plants C. Plants requiring both short and long days

B. Day-neutral plants D. Short-day plants

15. If a long plant has a critical night length of 10 hours, which one of the following conditions
would allow flowering in the plants

A. 8 hours light and 16 hours darkness C. 12 hours light and 12 hours darkness
B. 16 hours light and 8 hours darkness D. 10 hours light and 14 hours darkness

Kato Maxmillian 426 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

STRUCTURED QUESTIONS

16. Figure 2 shows the effect of red light and far red light interruption of night period, on flowering
of a plant.

(a) What is the effect of interruption of the night period by each type of light?
(i) Red Light
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Far red light
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Suggest the type of plant that would exhibit responses to light treatments as shown in figure 2.
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) How can the knowledge of the effect of red light and far red light on flowering be utilized in
the commercial growing of flowers?

Kato Maxmillian 427 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

17. (a) Distinguish between photoperiodism and vernalization.

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Three flowering plants of different species D, E and F were subjected to different light and
dark conditions as shown below;

If other environmental and soil factors were constant,

(i) State the photoperiodic groups to which each plant species belong. Give a reason to support
your answer in each case.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Describe how the phytochrome controls flowering response showed in plants D and F.
D
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 428 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
F
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

18. (a) What is meant by apical dominance?

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) State the causes of each of the following
(i) Apical dominance
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Seed dormancy
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) What is the ecological importance of
(i) apical dominance?
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) seed dormancy?
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 429 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

19. (a) Figure 5 shows the results of an experiment to find out the effects of Indole acetic acid (IAA)
and gibberellic acid (GA), on elongation of the stem. Segments from the stem internodes of
young pea seedlings were used in four cultures which were kept in the same identical conditions
except for the treatments outlined below.
Culture 1 Control, no plant growth substances added.
Culture 2 GA only
Culture 3 IAA only
Culture 4 GA and IAA

(a) What is the effect on the elongation of the stem segments of

(i) GA and IAA separately?
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) GA and IAA combined.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) What type of interaction is shown by the two growth substances?

Kato Maxmillian 430 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Over which period of the experiment do the plant growth substances have their greatest effect?
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(d) (i) State two other effects of IAA in plants, other than stem elongation.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) For each effect in d(i), state a commercial application of IAA.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

20. Three healthy unrelated species of flowering plants A,B and C were subjected to a range of
different light and dark treatments.The results are shown in the table below.

(a) State the periodic group to which each species belongs, giving a reason in each case
(i) A :
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) B:
..............................................................................................................................................................
(iii) C:
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Describe how the phytochrome controls flowering response exhibited in species A and B.

Kato Maxmillian 431 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(i) Species A:
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Species B:
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(C) What would be the effect of flashing light during darkness, on each of the following species?
A:
........................................................................................................................................................................................
B:
........................................................................................................................................................................................
C:
........................................................................................................................................................................................

21. (a) What is meant by photoperiodism?

........................................................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................................................................
(b) The figure below shows responses of two flowering plants plants A and B to day length.

Giving a reason from the graphs above, state the plant that is
(i) Long day plant.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 432 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(ii) Short day plant:

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Explain the response of flowering plants between 12hrs and 24hrs in;
i) A:
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
ii) B:
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(d) State why a short-day plant doesnot flower when subjected to a long photoperiod.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 433 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

13.2 Reception of stimuli

1. Mutual inhibition in the compound eye of insects is to

A. increase colour vision
B. increase brightness of light in the eye
C. increase the contrast in light intensities between adjacent omatidia
D. reduce the intensity of light into the eye

2. Arthropods have a lower visual acuity compared to vertebrates because

A. The ommatidia are less sensitive than rods and cones.
B. Compound eyes contain fewer rods and cones
C. The ommatidia are big and only few are packed in an equal area
D. The ommatidia contain photochemical pigments which are less readily bleached

3. The mammalian eye recieves fewer stimuli per unit compared to the insect’s eye because.
A.mammalian eye occupies a smaller space on the head than the inscet eye.
B. mammalian eye has less focusing units than the insect eye.

Kato Maxmillian 434 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

C. time lapse between reception of light, stimulus and recoveryis shorter in the insect eye.
D. mammalian eye has a small field of view.

4. Which one of the following does not contribute to the short reaction times in insects?

A. Large size of omatidia C. Rapid transmission of impulses

B. High flicker fusion frequencies D. Large coverage of head by compound eyes.

5. Loud and low-pitched sound is caused by sound waves of

A. Large amplitude and high frequency C. High frequency and small amplitude
B. Low frequency and large amplitude D. Small quantities and low frequency

6. The diagram in the Fig. 1 show a defect of the eye. What is it and what does it cause?
A. Eyeball is too short for the lens, causing short sightedness
B. Lens is too thick, causing short sight
C. Eyeball is too short for the lens, causing long sightedness
D. Eyeball is too large for the lens, causing astigmatism

7. The insect compound eye receives more stimuli per unit time than the mammalian eye because the
A. Insect occupies a larger part of the head than the mammalian eye
B. Time lapse between reception of light stimulus and recovery is short
C. Insect eye has more focusing units than the mammalian eye.
D. Insect eye has a wide field of view.

8. Cones have better visual acuity than rods because cones

A. Have little retinal convergence C. Connect with a single optic nerve fibre
B. Are more sensitive to light D. Are more concentrated at the fovea.

9. In the mammalian eye, rods have a poorer visual acuity than cones because they are

A. Fewer in number C. Connected to more than one optic nerve

B. Smaller in size D. Less sensitive to light

10. Which of the following takes place as the eye accommodates a distant object?

Kato Maxmillian 435 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

pupil widens, the lens thickens C. pupil widens, the lens flattens.
B. pupil narrows, the lens thickens D. pupil narrows, the lens flatten

11. Which of the following applies to the cones of the retina? They

A. Show visual acuity C. Show much retinal convergence

B. Perceive dim light D. Contain rhodopsin pigment

12. Which type of photoreceptors occurs in the fovea?

A. Rods only B. Cones only C. Rods and cones D. Rhodopsin

13. The importance of mutual inhibition in the mammalian eye is to

A. reduce the frequency of impulse transmission
B. increase contrast between light-dark boundaries
C. reduce sensitivity of the eye
D. increase ability to resolve close stimuli separately

14. Which one of the following is incorrect about generator potential?

A. It is caused by the depolarization of the receptor membrane
B. Its size depends on the intensity of the stimulus.
C. Its size is independent of the intensity of the stimulus.
D. Its size can reduce due to a maintained steady stimulus

15. Which one of the following types of sound waves travels furthest along the basilar membrane?
The sound wave with

A. High frequency and high amplitude C. High frequency and low amplitude
B. High frequency and high amplitude D. Low frequency and low amplitude

16. Which one of the following is not true about the simple eye?

A. Cannot form images C. Has a few light sensitive cells

B. Has a single lens. D. Cannot discriminate between dark and light

Kato Maxmillian 436 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

17. Which part of the vestibular column rseponds to the vertical movement of the head?

A. Vstibular canal. B. saccule. C. utricle. D. semi-circular canal.

STRUCTURED QUESTIONS

18. Explain why

(a) Rods show high sensitivity to light.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Cones show high visual acuity.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) It is difficult to catch a fly.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

19. (a) (i) What is a compound eye?

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
What is function of each of the following parts of a compound eye?
Rhabdom
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
Pigment cells
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 437 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) (i) Give three structural similarities between the compound eye and the mammalian eye.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Give two advantages each has over the other.
Compound eye overmammalian eye.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
Mammalian eye over compound eye.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

20. Figure 5 shows arrangements A and B of sensory cell in a mammalian eye.

(a) What is the effect of each arrangement on the response of the eye?
(i) Effect of arrangement A.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 438 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Effect of arrangements B.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Explain how the effect of each arrangement is brought about.
(i) Effect of arrangement A.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Effect of arrangement B.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Under which light conditions is each arrangement most effective and why?
(i) Arrangement A.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Arrangement B.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

21. Figure 1 is a drawing of a rod cells, from the retina of the human eye.

Kato Maxmillian 439 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(a) Name the points labeled P, Q, R, S, T and U

(b) (i) Indicate by means of an arrow the flow of the impulse built up in the cell on stimulation.
(ii) Mark with an X, the part which contains the light sensitive pigment.
(c) Give the name of the light sensitive pigment.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(d) Briefly outline the process which leads to the building up of an impulse in the sensitive cell
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(e) How is the rod cell specially adapted to increase efficiency in its function?
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 440 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

22. The digram below is if a rod cell of a mammalian eye

(a)Name parts labeled A and B and give one function of each.

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Describe other features of rod cells that enable them to perform their function in the
mammalian eye.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(C) Draw an arrow next to the diagram to show the direction in which light passes through the cell
(d) State two ways in which vision using cones differs from vision using the rods
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 441 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
(e) Explain how light energy falling onto the rod cell in the retina of a mammalian eye is
converted into electical energy.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(f) Explain why an individual is temporarily blinded whwn one moves from bright light into a
dimly lit room.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(g) Explain how the possession different types of cones enables us to see.
(i) Blue light
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) White light
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

23. The figure below shows rod cells and neurons from the retina of an eye.

Kato Maxmillian 442 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(a) Describe how light falling on a rod cell can give an action potential.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Explain how an action potential is produced and a nerve impulse transmitted along an axon.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) With reference to the figure above, explain the folowing properties of a synapse.
(i) Summation:
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Transmission across a synapse will only occur in one direction.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

24. The diagram below represents the retina of the human eye

Kato Maxmillian 443 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(a) Name the parts

A................................................... B .....................................................
C................................................... D .....................................................
E ..................................................... F........................................................................
G ..................................................... H.........................................................................
(b) Account for the
(i) Rods cells produce an indistinct image.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Rod cells are concerned with night vision.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(iii) Cones are capable of colour vision.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(iv) Visual acuteness is greatest at the region of the forvea.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(v) When a person enters a dimly lit room from bright sunlight, the room at first seems dark but
gradually objects become visible.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 444 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

25. The diagram represents a vertical section through the eye of the mammal

(a) Name the structures

A................................................ B................................................
C................................................ D................................................
E................................................ F................................................
(b) Explain what is meant by the term accommodation of the eye.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) How does an eye viewing a near object accommodate to viewing a distant object?
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(d) How is the size of the pupil adjusted as a mammal moves from a dim light to a bright light?
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 445 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

26. With reference to a mammal, explain the role of

(a) the cochlea in the detection and discrimination of volume and pitch.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) the retina in the detection of colour and discrimination of colour.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) The figure below shows the number of receptor cells A and B in the human retina along
horizontal line from the nasal side side of the eye.

Kato Maxmillian 446 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(i) With a reason in each case identify receptor cells A and B.

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Explain why there are no receptor cells at position 5.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 447 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

13.3 Nervous communication

1. Wearing a coarse a tickling sensation but later the sensation disappears. Which one of the
following is not an explanation of this observation?
A. Supply of the transmitter substance gets exhausted
B. Discharge of impulses at the afferent nerves ceases
C. The membrane surrounding the generator region becomes less permeable to sodium ions
D. Generator potential falls below threshold value

2. Which part of the brain is responsible for controlling breathing in mammals?

A. Thalamus B. Pineal body C. Medulla oblongata D. Cerebellum

Kato Maxmillian 448 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

3. Wearing a coarse shirt causes unpleasant sensation at first but later the discomfort disappears
because
A. With continued stimulus, generator potential falls below threshold value
B. The post synaptic surfaces fail to release the transmitter substance
C. Nervous system stops carrying sensory impulses
D. Continued stimulation leads to fusion of generator potentials

4. After an action potential, repolarisation of the membrane begins by

A. entry of sodium ions into the cell. C. entry of potassium ions into the cell.
B. sodium ions diffusing out of the cell. D. ptassium ions diffusing out of the cell.

5. Which one of the following is a correct statement about a neurone membrane during resting
potential?
A. The inside of the neurone membrane is negatively charged
B. The Na+, K+ and Cl− ions are evenly distributed on either side of the membrane
C. The concentration of K+ ions is greater inside the membrane
D. The concentration of K+ ions is greater outside the membrane

6. Which one of the following statements is false about synapse?

A. All synapse use chemicals only. C. Some synapses are not vulnerable to fatigue
B. Some synapses are not susceptible to drugs. D. some synapse occur in form of tubes

7. Myelinated axons of a frog conduct impulses three times faster as those of the same diameter in a
rat because the

A. myelin sheath in axon of frog’s is thinner. C. neurones of a frog have more synapses.
B. rat is endothermic. D. frog lives in water which is cold

8. In which one of these insects is the wing beat frequency at the same rate as the impulse supply?

A. Fruit fly. B. Housefly. C. Moth. D. Bee.

Kato Maxmillian 449 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

9. Which one of the following would occur at the synapse treated with a poison which renders
cholinesterase inactive?
A. conduction of impulses ceases
B. conduction speed of impulses reduces
C. conduction of impulses in the post-synaptic neuron continues.
D. the dircetion of impulses reverses.

10. The following chemical substances mimic the actions of natural neurotransmitters, at the synapse,
except;

A. muscarine B. nicotine C. morphine D. eser

11. The table below shows the speed of impulse conduction along the axons from four different
species of animals.

Which one of the above species is most likely to possess a myelinated nerve fibre?

A. X B. Z C. Y D. W

12. Which of the following is NOT found in the synaptic knob?

A. Acetylcholine B. Norepinephrine
C. Acetylcholinesterase D. Epinephrine

13. Which one of the following describes the state of the membrane during resting potential?

A. Polarized B. Neutral C. Depolarized D. Discharged

Kato Maxmillian 450 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

14. The beginning of the recovery process in an axon is marked by:

A. potassium ions. C. sodium ions leaving the axon.

B. sodium ions entering the axon. D. potassium ions leaving the axon.

15. Which one of the following is correct about the sympathetic nervous system?
A. Nerve endings produce nor-adrenaline
B. Preganglionic fibres are long and post ganglionic fibres are short
C. Nerve endings produce acetylcholine
D. Ganglia are embedded in the walls of the effector organs

16. Which one of the following structures underwent evolutionary development to increase
intelligence in mammals?

A. Corpora striata B. Neopallium C. Hypothalamus D. Corpus callosum

17. Which of the following substances play a vital role in the transmission of an impulse across a
synapse?

A. Adrenaline and noradrenaline C. Noradrenaline and vasopressin

B. Acetylcholine and cholinesterase D. cholinesterase and noradrenaline

18. which one of the following events represent the correct order of events that occur at the synapse
during impulse transmission?
A. Ca2+ ion influx, release of transmitter substance, depolarization
B. Depolarization, release of transmitter substance, Ca2+ ion influx
C. Release of transmitter substance, Ca2+ ion influx, depolarization
D. Release of transmitter substance, depolarization, Ca2+ ion influx.

19. The onset of depolarization of an axon occurs when the axoplasm temporarily becomes

A. More negative B. Less negative C. More positive D. Less positive.

Kato Maxmillian 451 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

20. Which one of the following is true about the state of the axon membrane during the absolute
refractory period? It is

A. Depolarized C. Polarized
B. In excitable D. Excitable with a stimulus stronger than usual

21. The beginning of the recovery process in an axon is marked by

A. Sodium ions leaving the axon C. Sodium ions entering the axon
B. Potassium ions entering the axon D. Potassium ions leaving the axons

22. An impulse crosses a synapse by means of

A. Sodium ions C. Calcium ions

B. Potassium ions D. Neurotransmitter chemical

23. Which one of the following describes the sodium-potassium pump?

A. Active pumping of potassium ions out of the axon and sodium ions into it.
B. Equal concentration of the ions on either side of the axon when it is at rest
C. Inability of the axon to absorb the two ions passively
D. Active pumping of sodium ions out of the axon and potassium ions into it.

24. Which one of the following would occur at the onset of an action potential in a neurone?

A. Potassium ions enter C. Potassium ions leave

B. Sodium ions enter D. Sodium ions enter

25. During an action potential in a neuron,

A. Potassium ions diffuse into the axon
B. Sodium ions diffuse out of the axon
C. Sodium ions diffuse into the axon
D. Both the sodium and potassium ions diffuse into the axon

Kato Maxmillian 452 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

26. Which one of the following statements is true only of sympathetic nervous system?

A. Nerve endings produce nor-adrenaline C. Nerve endings produce acetylcholine

B. Preganglionic fibres are short D. Preganglionic fibres are long

27. Which one of the following occurs when the axon membrane depolarizes?
A. Sodium ions enter the axon and potassium ions leave
B. Both sodium and potassium ions leaves the axon
C. Potassium ions enter the axon and sodium ions leave
D. Both sodium and potassium ions enter the axon

28. A mother, who lacked milk in her breasts at the birth of her baby was diagnosed to have a brain
damage. Which one of the following parts of the brain is most likely to have been affected?

A.Posterior lobe of the pituitary gland C. Anterior lobe of the pituitary gland
B. Pineal body D. Cerebrum

29. Increased depplarisation of the postsynaptic membrane to allow chloride ions in, and potassium
ions out of the cell causes

A. depolarisation of the cell membrane. C. excitation of the membrane.

B. polarisation of the memebrane. D. hyper polarisation of the membrane.

30. Which one of the following is not stimulated by the parasympathetic nerves?

A. Slowing of heart beat C. Flow of saliva and other gut secretions

B. Constriction of iris D. Slowing of gut movements

31. A high concentration of potassium ions outside the neurone

A. Produces a high action potential
B. Has no effect on the amplitude of the action potential
C. Inhibits the release of a transmitter substance
D. Polarizes the neurone

Kato Maxmillian 453 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

32. A person who walks unsteadily may have a defect in the

A. Cerebrum B. Cerebellum C. Medulla oblongata D. Hypothalamus

33. Which one of the following is not a transmitter substance?

A. Acetylcholine B. Cholinesterase C. Atropine D. Noradrenaline

STRUCTURED QUESTIONS

Figure 2 above shows the result of one end of an axon being stimulated with six electrical shocks
of gradually increasing intensity and its response recorded from the other end. Study the figure
and answer the following questions:
(a) Describe the behavior of the axon in the regions labeled A, B and C in relation to the
magnitude of the stimuli given Region A
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
Region B
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
Region C
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 454 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(b) What principle does the behavior of the axon illustrate?

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) What determines the speed at which an impulse is transmitted along an axon?
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(d) What is the advantage to an organism of having its impulse transmitted rapidly?
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

34. In the space below, draw and label the structure of a synapse.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) How does an impulse cross a synapse?
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

35. The figure below shows a human brain seen from right angle.

Kato Maxmillian 455 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(a) Name parts labelled A,B and C.

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Give two functions of part labelled B.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) State any three functions of the celebrospinal fluid.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

36. The figure below shows the variation of a nerve impulse conduction speed with total diameter, of
myelinated and non-myelinated fibres.

(a) Compare the variation of speed of conduction with diameter in two types of fibres. (04 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 456 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(b) Explain the diffrences in the conduction speed of the two fibres (02marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Suggest the significance of transmission speed in nervous communication.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

37. The figure below shows dendrites from neurons A and B forming synapses with neuron C

(a) Explain what would happen if (i) acetylcholine increased the permeability of the post synaptic
membrane to sodium ions.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) X increased the permeability of the post synaptic membrane to chloride ions.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 457 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) State a benefit of neuron C forming a synapse with two neurons A and B.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) State three fuctions of the synapses.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

38. a) What is summation?

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
b) Describe the following types of summation
i) Temporal summation
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
ii) Spatial summation
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
c) State two advantages of nerve transmission across chemical synapse
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
i) Mixed nerves
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 458 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

ii) Facilitation
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
b) Outline any four ways how the synapse can be disrupted by the drugs and poisons.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
c) Mention any four likely effects of synapse disruption by the drugs and poisons.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
d) State three disadvantages of synapse
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

39. The diagram shows the structure of a synapse.

Kato Maxmillian 459 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(a) Describe what would happen in the presynaptic neurone as a result of the arrival of an impulse.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) The graphs below show the changes in membrane potential in the presynaptic neurone and the
postsynaptic neurone as an impulse passes across a synapse.

On the graph for the postsynaptic neurone, indicate by using a letter S the point at which the
sodium channels open, allowing an increased flow of sodium into the neurone.
(ii) On the graph for the postsynaptic neurone, indicate by using a letter P the point at which the
potassium channels open, allowing an increased flow of potassium ions
(iii) Calculate the delay between the arrival of the action potential at the presynaptic neurone and
the production of an action potential in the postsynaptic neurone. Show your working.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 460 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(iv) Explain the reason for this delay.

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

40. (a) Give one function of the synapse in the nervous system.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) When an action potential arrives at the synapse, calcium ions enter the neurone through
presynaptic membranes.
(i) Explain how the calcium ions enter the neurone.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Describe the events which occur as result of the entry of the calcium ions to cause
depolarization of the post synaptic membrane.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(d) Explain the role of cholinesterase at synapses.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 461 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

41. (a) Give the importance of synapses in the nervous sysstem.

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Explain why the;
(i) the production of acetylcholinesterase at the synapse is important during nerve impulse
transmission.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) impermeability of the axon membrane to sodium ions in a part of the neurone helps to
maintain the resting potential in that part.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

42. The figure below shows changes in plarity of an axon as an impulse passes along the axon.

(a) What is the state of the axon membrane between (i) R and S?
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 462 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(ii) S and T?
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Describe the movement of ions across the axon membrane between
(i) R and S.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) S and T.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(iii) T and U.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Why is it difficult to stimulate an axon shortly after it has transmitted an impulse?
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 463 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

43. The graph shows the changes in the permeability of an axon membrane to sodium and potassium
ions during an action potential.

(a) Explain why at the start of the action potential, the potential difference across the membrane
rapidly changes from positive to negative.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Suggest why, during a period of intense nervous activity, metabolic rate of nerve cell
increases.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Predict the effect of on an action potential of lowering the external concentration of sodium
ions. Explain your answer.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 464 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

44. The graph below shows the effect of adding acetylcholine to skeletal muscles and heart muscle.

(i) Describe the effect of acetylcholine on skeletal muscles.

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) State how the effect of acetylcholine on heart muscle differs from its effect on skeletal muscle.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(iii) Suggest how these differences maybe related to the functions of the two types of muscles.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(iV) Suggest why it is important for acetycholine is rapidly hydrolysed after its release.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

13.4 Hormonal communication

Kato Maxmillian 465 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

1. Antidiuretic hormone is produced by the

2. Hormones and enzymes are similar in that both

A. are always secreted directly into the digestive system.
B. alter the rate of physiological processes.
C. are secreted only by endocrine glands
D. convert carbohydrate to amino acids.

3. Hormones achieve their activities within their target cells by any of the following processes
except;
A. nervous transmission across synapse.
B. enzyme activity.
C. exchange of materials across cell membranes.
D. protein synthesis.

Kato Maxmillian 466 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

4. Hormones influence behaviour in the following ways except;

A. affecting growth of nerve connections in thebrain
B. directly affecting nerve cells with in synapses of the central nervous sysytem
C. altering the sensitivity of peripheral receptors
D. inducing RNA changes to quicken the learning process.

5. Amino-acid based hormones are

A. protein only. C. considered as a second messenger.

B. derived from cholestrol. D. lipid deravative.

6. Because steroid hormones are fat soluble, they can

A. synthesise new enzymes.
B. activate DNA synthesis.
C. diffuse through the cell membrane of target cells.
D. act as a first messenger or a second messenger.

7. Cyclic Amp.
A. is produced in response to aminoacid-based proteins
B. appears in cycles.
C. is produced in response to steroid hormones.
D. attaches to DNA to control mRNA transcription

8. A steriod-hormone receptor complex .

A. binds to cyclic Amp. C. binds to DNA in the nucleus.

B. acts through cell-surface receptors. D.binds to the enzyme

STRUCTURED QUESTIONS

9. (a) State four differences and one similarity between nervous and hormonal communication.
(i) Differences
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 467 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(ii) Similarities
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) What is the major role of
(i) Follicle stimulating Hormone (FSH)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Luteinizing Hormone (LH) in a human menstrual cycle.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

10. (a) What is meant by cascade effect of hormonal control?

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) The figure below summaries the way in which adrenaline can control a chemical reaction in a
liver cell.

Kato Maxmillian 468 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(i) Describe the function of cyclic AMP in this process.

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Give an example of a chemical reaction in a liver cell which is controlled by afrenaline by
naming substance X, substance Y and enzyme 2.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Use the diagram to explain
(i) Why adrenaline may affect some cells not others.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) How a single molecule of adrenaline may cause this cell to produce a large amount of
susbtance Y.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

11. (a) What is meant by the term endocrine system?

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Explain why the pancrease is described as both an endocrine and exocrine gland.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 469 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(c) In each case state two likely effects on a mammal of;

(i) Over-production of thyroxine.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Under-production of insulin.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

12. (a) State two functions of synapses.

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Calcium ions enter the presynaptic membrane when action potentials arrive.
(i) Explain how these ions enter the neurones.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Describe the events which follow entry of these ions until the depolarisation of the
postsynaptic membrane.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(iii) Explain the importance of acetylcholinestrase enzyme.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 470 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(c) The functioning of synapses can be affected by the presence drugs as shown in the table below.

Drug Effect at synapse.

Curare Blocks the receptors on the postsynaptic membrane of a motor neurone muscle junction.
Morphine Activates inhibitory receptors in the presynsptic membrane of sensory neurones.

Suggest the consenquences, on the action of the synapse, of

(i) Curare;
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Morphine;
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

13. (a) What are target cells?

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Explain; (i) any two mechanisms by which hormones bring about cellular response in target
cells.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) how a very small amount of the hormone is able to exert a large effect on a target cell.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 471 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

13.5 Behaviour

1. Which one of the following is NOT an advantage gained from innate evolutionary behavior?

A. Longevity of the organism C. Learning by the organism

B. Survivorship of the organism D. Biological fitness of the organism

2. Which one of the following types of behavior is least learnt?

A. Association B. Instinct C. Imprinting D. Insight

3. In birds, hatchlings following the first thing they see is an example of,

A.insight B. association C. habtituation D. imprinting

Kato Maxmillian 472 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

4. The special phenomenon by which young birds recognize their parents is referred to as

A. Trial and error learning B. Insight learning

C. imprinting D. motivation

5. Which one of the following is the simplest form of learning in vertebrates?

A. Imprinting. B. Habituation. C. Insight. D. Associative.

6. Which one of the following is instinctive behavior?

A. Courtship and display ceremonies in birds and insects
B. Avoiding the capture of a distasteful insect by birds
C. Migration by some birds
D. Chicks taking cover when a kite is passing

7. Which one of the following is not a benefit in territorial behavior?

A. Pair bonding C. Increased reproductive success

B. Rights to defend a home range D. Saving energy used to chase away invaders

8. Imprinting can be described as

A. A behavior that involves recognizing a print mark
B. An innate behavior that requires practice
C. Learning that occurs at a critical period development
D. Learning that requires a sigh stimulus.

9. Which one of the following would not be caused by seasonal changes in migratory birds?

A. Hormonal changes C. Reproductive behavior

B. Feeding behavior D. Plumage colouration

10. The type of learning that involves the immediate understanding and responding is

A. Imprinting C. Insight learning

B. Associative learning D. Habituation

Kato Maxmillian 473 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

11. Migration of birds during winter from temeperate regions to the tropics is an example of .

A. habituation. C. imprinting.
B. insight learning D. exploratory learning

12. The type of learning that prevents animals from responding to repeated stimulation is

A. insight. B. conditioning. C. imprinting. D. habituation

13. Insects that communicate at a distance by producing sounds include.

A. ants. B. mosquitoes. C. silkworms D. fire flies.

14. Which body part does a scout bee from side to side when a bee performs a waggle dance¿

A. abdomen. B. labrum. C. thorax. D. antenna.

15. The stinging behaviour of a worker bee is

A. learned from the queen. C. not an altruistic behavior.

B. learned from the drone. D. an innate behaviour.

16. Which one of the following best describes association learning?

A. Preying bird avoiding to eat a bright coloured caterpillar
B. Rat eventually learning to traverse a maze if rewarded
C. Chick following the first moving-object it sees after hatching
D. Chimpanzee using a stick to reach an object

17. Which of the following is stipulated by the round dance in bees?

A. the distance of food collection
B. the direction of food source
C. the amount of food available at the source
D. the number of bees needed to collect the food

18. The chaffinch chick which is isolated from others and reared alone, sings a subsong compared to
the rest of other members. What is the best explanation for such an observation?
A. The chaffinch chick is a hybrid.

Kato Maxmillian 474 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

B. Singing in chaffinch birds is a learned behaviour.

C. Innate behaviour can to a certain degree, be influenced by the environment.
D. The chaffinch chick does not belong to the same species with other birds.

19. What type of learning is exhibited by a predator when it avoids eating a brightly coloured prey.

A. exploratory B. habituation C. associative D. trial and error.

20. which one of the following is not correct about instinctive behavior
A. is a permanent adaptive trait
B. can be developed in animals reared in isolation
C. Allows synchronisation of sexual behaviour
D. Develops independently of the environment

21. Which of the following can interpret motivation?

A. The presence of food induces an individual to salivate.
B. The existence of the male and female dogs together, stimulates them to mate.
C. The calf initially fed, fights less for milk.
D. The existence of sticks and boxes in a cage of the chimpanzee, enables them to get food from
the root of the cage.

22. Which one of the following is not a purpose for courtship behavior among animals?
A. Ensuring that both partners are sexually mature
B. Establishing a pair-bond
C. Ensuring that both partners are ready for moving
D. Establishing territories

23. The learning which involves immediate understanding and correct response

A. insight B. imprint C. associate D. exploratory

24. When same response is given to same stimulus on different occasions, the behavior is said to be

A. Instinctive B. Conditioned C. Imprinted D. Stereotyped

Kato Maxmillian 475 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

25. Which one of the following patterns of behavior in rats would be a result of latent learning?

A. Avoid to eat poisoned food C. Young rats following their mother

B. Associating smell with presence of food D. Being aware of escape routes.

26. Hibernation is associated with.

A. circadian rhythms C. migration.

B. annual biological cycles. D. days becoming longer than nights.

27. An animal establish and defend a territory by using

A. chemical signals. B. vocal signal. C. visual signal. D. all the above

28. A fixed action pattern

A. continues to finish without modification. C. maybe triggered by environmental stimulus.

B. is adaptive. D. motivates an action.

29. Learning to associate a reward with a predictive stimulus, such as a hamburger with the sight of a
neon sign, is an example of

A. classical conditioning. C. impriting.

B. operant conditioning. D. reasoning.

30. Which one of the following is an example of imprinting?

A. a salmon’s ability to recognise chemical cues in water when returning to the stream where it
was born to spawn.
B. a chimpazze stacking boxes to reach a banana
C. an octopus using its arms to unscrew a jar lidand eat the fish inside the jar.
D. a dog salivating in response to a bell.

31. The responses of an organism to stimuli from its environment constitute its

A. behaviour B. adaptation C. conditioning D. instincts

Kato Maxmillian 476 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

STRUCTURED QUESTIONS

32. (a) What is instinctive behavior?

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) State two factors that influence instinctive behavior.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Territorial behavior is common among many animal species. Give
(i) four advantages of this behavior
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) three disadvantages of this behavior
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

33. (a) The figure below shows two types of dances performed by a worker bee.Identify the dance
and briefly describe the the information it conveys.

Kato Maxmillian 477 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Explain why for an altruistic behaviour to be maintained in a population over time, it must be
directed at close relatives.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

34. (a) Give the meaning of the each of the following forms of behavior
(i). Habituation
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii). Imprinting
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(iii). Instinctive behaviour.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) State the benefits of each of the above forms of behaviour to an animal
(i). Habituation
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii). Imprinting
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 478 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(iii). Instinctive behaviour.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

35. a) What is displacement activity?

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) State the ecological importance of each of the following forms behavior.
(i) Territorial behavior
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Courtship behavior
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Give two ways in which animals avoid predation.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

36. (a) Distinguish between Altruistic behavior and Rhythmical behavior, give an example in each
case.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 479 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(b) Figure below shows the behavioral response by a rat and an ant when learning a new maze by
trial and error

(i) What conclusions about learning in rats and ants are evident from the data?
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) State three factors that could affect the learning of a new situation like a maze in animals.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

37. In a series of experiments on ducklings, the effectiveness of impriting was measured at various
times of hatching.In these experiments , the ducklings had the opportunity to follow a model dark.
The figure represents the percentage of darklings at a particular age which followed the model.

Kato Maxmillian 480 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(a) What is meant by imprinting?

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) What conclusion can be drawn from these results?
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) What will happen if the ducklings have no adult to imprint on?
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

38. a) With an example explain what is meant by releasers?

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) State two forms of behavior that are prompted by releasers
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Give three functions of releasers in animal behavior

Kato Maxmillian 481 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(d) Describe three ways how hormones may influence an animals behavior
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

13.6 Effectors

1. Figure 2 represents a longitudinal section through part of a striated muscle fibre.

Kato Maxmillian 482 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

Which one of the following pairs of structures shorten when the muscle fibre contracts?

A. I band and H Zone C. I band and Z line

B. H Zone and A band D. A band and Z line

2. Figure 3 shows an earthworm in a stationary position

For the earthworm to progress in the direction indicated by the arrow, in region X, the earthworm
has to contract its

A. Circular muscles and extend the cheatae C. Circular muscles and retract the cheatae
B. Longitudinal muscles and retract the cheatae D. Longitudinal muscles and extend the cheatae

3. During locomotion, bones of a tetrapod are subjected to the following forces except.

A. shearing. B. Compression. C. tension. D. expansion

4. During locomotion in an earth worm, when longitudinal muscles cintract in a region, the region
becomes,

A. thin and short. C. thick and long.

B. thin and long. D. thick and short.

5. Figure below shows the action of a cilium to cause movement

Which one of the following sets of positions represent passive stroke?

A. 1, 2, 3, 8. B. 6, 7, 8, 9. C. 1, 9, 4, 6. D. 5, 7, 3, 2.

Kato Maxmillian 483 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

6. Which one of the following is the correct shape, in the region of the body of an earth worm where
its circular muscles are contracted?

A. Short and thick B. Long and thin C. Short and thin D. Long and thick

7. The type of locomotion in aquatic organisms where the entire body is thrown into motion is called

A. ostraciform. B. anguilliform. C. carangiform. D. lateral drag.

8. Contraction of longitudinal muscles in insects during flight, results into

A. Flapping of wings C. Holding wings horizontally

B. Moving down of wings D. Moving up of wings

9. Figure 1 represents a tail of a fish in water.

Which arrow represents the force applied against the water by the tail of the fish as the muscles in
the shaded side contract?

10. Figure 2 below shows part of an earthworm in motion

In what state are the circular and longitudinal muscles in the region labeled Y?
A. Circular muscles are contracted and longitudinal muscles relaxed
B. Longitudinal muscles are contracted and circular muscles relaxed
C. Circular muscles and longitudinal muscles are relaxed
D. Circular muscles and longitudinal muscles contracted

Kato Maxmillian 484 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

11. Which one of the following sections of a striated muscle in figure 1 below represents the
myofibril in a contracted state?

12. Which pair of structures counteracts the instability due to rolling in fish?

A. vertical and horizontal fins. C. body flattening and caudal fin.

B. mass of head and vertical fins. D. streamlined body and horizontal fins.

13. Which one of the following describes what happens at the tip of a newly formed amoeboid

A. Gel ectoplasm changes to sol endoplasm C. Sol ectoplasm changes to gel endoplasm
B. Gel endoplasm changes to sol ectoplasm D. Sol endoplasm changes to gel ectoplasm

14. Which one of the following features in a bony fish makes it more efficient in swimming than
cartilagenenous fish?

A. strong bony skeleton. C. swim bladder.

B. highly coordinated neuromuscular activity. D. stream lined body

15. Which one of the following pairs of proteins is found in skeletal muscle?

A. Actin and myosin C. Myosin and fibrinogen

B. Keratin and actin D. Myosin and collagen

16. Which one of the following statements is true for all mammalian muscles? They
A. Contract only when stimulated by a nervous impulse
B. Are either smooth or striated except for the heart muscle
C. Use chemical energy to perform mechanical work
D. Can be moved by the skeleton

STRUCTURED QUESTIONS

Kato Maxmillian 485 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

The diagram shows a motor endplate.

(a) What name is given to the biochemical pathway of a mitochondrion that produces ATP.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Give one function of ATP produced by the mitochondria shown in the diagram below.
(i) Position A;
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Position B;
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Describe one function of calcium ions in the streuctures shown in the diagram above.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

17. The figure below shows a structure a nerve-muscule junction together with part associated
muscle.

Kato Maxmillian 486 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(a) Describe how transmission of an impulse occurs a nerve-muscle junction when an impulse
arrives at the presynaptic membrane.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) i) What causes the banding pattern seen in the muscle fibril?
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
ii) How and why will the banding pattern change when the muscle fibre contracts?
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 487 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

13.7 Locomotion

1. Which one of the following bones form the pentdactyl limb?

A. Radius and ulna C. Tibia and fibula

B. Tarsals and metatarsals D. Carpals and metacarpals

2. A rigid cuticle of an insect allows some movements because

A. it is made of chitin which makes the limbs flexible
B. during moulting, enzymes dissolve the old cuticle as a new one is formed.
C. the overlapping plates of the cuticle are not continuous at the joints
D. the exoskeleton is periodically shed off for the insect to move.

Kato Maxmillian 488 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

3. Which of the following muscles does not require nervous intervention to initiate its contraction?

A. Skeletal B. Smooth C. Cardiac D. autonomic

4. . Which of the following is not true of a contracted muscle

A. M-line shortens B. sarcomere shortens C. H-zone shortens D. light bands shorten

5. The figure below shows a transverse section through a muscle myofibril

Which one of the following regions does the section represent?

A. H - zone. B. A - band. C. I - band. D. M - band

6. Which one of the following movements in fish is counteracted by the vertical horizontal fins?

A. Rolling B. Backward drag C. Pitching D. Yawning

7. During flight in insects, upstroke is brought about by

A. Contraction of direct flight muscles C. Contraction of indirect flight muscles

B. Relaxation of indirect flight muscles D. Sudden upthrust of the body

8. Which one of the following is not a function of the skeleton in insects?

A. Support of body C. Prevention of desiccation

B. Protection of delicate body parts D. Secretion of wax

9. Which of the following forms is an important ingredient of the exoskeleton of insects?

A. Glucose B. Lysine C. Cutin D. Chitin

Kato Maxmillian 489 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

10. The fusion of parts of the vertebral column in birds , aids flight by

A. Restricting flexibility C. Strengthening the skeleton

B. Reducing weight D. Reducing friction.

11. The flagellum and skeletal muscle are structurally similar in that they both have

A. Microtubules C. A pattern of 9 + 2 microtubules

B. Actin and myosin tubules D. Light and dark bands

12. Which one of the following factors least affects the gliding speed of a bird?

A. Weight of the bird C. Shape of the wings

B. Size of the bird D. Length of the wings

13. Which of the following are the points that must be taken into account when considering
locomotion of any animal?

A. support, stability, propulsion C. support, pitching, rolling

B. rolling, stability, drag D. propulsion, pitching , drag

14. Which of these statements is not true of the insects skeleton?

A. Chitin is the main skeletal element C. It grows with the organism

B. It is jointed and hence movable. D. It has muscles attached to it from the inside

15. which one of the following is true of a fully contracted muscle fibre?

A. the H- zone disappears C. the I band widens

B. the filaments shorten D. the sarcomere widens

16. During insect locomotion by walking movement of the fore leg on one side is followed by the
movement of the

A. middle leg on that side C. fore leg on the opposite side

B. hind leg on the opposite side D. hind leg on the same side

Kato Maxmillian 490 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

17. Which one of the following occrs during contraction of a skeletal muscle?

A. I- band becomes shorter. C. Sarcomere remains unchanged.

B. A-band becomes longer. D. H-band becomes wider.

18. Stability in a fish during locomotion is provided by the following fins except?

A. median B. ventral C. pectoral D. dorsal

19. Physical exercise increases skeletal muscle performance by increasing the following except the

A. diameter of individual fibres. C. number of myofibrils

B. The number of individual fibres D. nerve supply

20. The following are properties of skeletal muscle fibres used for maintainance of body posture,
except;
A. lose heat at a high rate
B. have abundant glycogen granules
C. have many mitochondria
D. have poorly developed sarcoplasmic reticulum

21. The role of calcium ions in mascular contraction is to enable

A. tropomysin bind myosin. C. myosin bind on actin.

B. actin bind to myosin. D. tropmysosin bind on actin.

22. Which one of the following structures prevents dislocation of the forearm, during its backward
movement?

A. Deltoid ridge C. Olecranon process

B. sigmoid notch D. Bicipital groove

23. The figure below is a simplified diagram of a tetrapod in a stationary position.

Kato Maxmillian 491 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

Which one of the following would be the correct order of limb movement in the tetrapod if it is to
move in the direction shown.?

A. (ii), (iv), (iii), (i). B. (i), (iv), (ii), (iii). C. (i), (iii), (ii), (iv). D. (iii), (iv), (ii), (i)

24. Movement of an amoeba is basically determined by;

A. the ability of its endoplasm to move forward.
B. the viscosity of its ectoplasm.
C. the ability of its cytoplasm to change its colloidal state.
D. the ability of its endoplasm and ectoplasm to contract

STRUCTURED QUESTIONS

25. (a) Explain briefly how locomotion is achieved in an earthworm.

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Give the disadvantages of the hydrostatic skeleton
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 492 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

14 REPRODUCTION

14.1 Asexual reproduction

1. What is the advantage of fragmentation over conjugation as a means of reproduction in spirogyra?

A. Varied offspring are produced C. Many off springs are produced

B. Fast-growing offspring are produced D. More resistant offsprings are produced.

2. The common method of reproduction in organisms which have a large number of undifferentiated
cells is

A. Conjugation B. Fragmentation C. Sporulation D. Fission

3. A fragment of an earthworm can regenerate into a new worm because earth worms

A. Reproduce asexually C. Are hermaphrodites

B. Possess a high number of undifferentiated D. Have a high rate of cell division
cells
Kato Maxmillian 493 Gingo David
A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

4. Which one of the following statements on reproduction is true?

A. Asexual reproduction always results into identical offspring
B. Gametes are always produced by meiosis
C. Mitosis always produce diploid cells
D. Gametes are always haploid

5. Workers bees and the queen bee are polymorphic forms which differ in their fertility as a result of
A. Feeding on different diets
B. Workers eggs not being fertilized
C. Workers being produced parthenogenetically
D. The queen having diploid cells while the workers have haploid cells

6. Workers bees and the queen bee are polymorphic forms which differ in their fertility as a result of
A. Feeding on different diets
B. Workers eggs not being fertilized
C. Workers being produced parthenogenetically
D. The queen having diploid cells while the workers have haploid cells

7. Which one of the following occurs in haploid parthenogenesis? Eggs are formed by
A. meiosis and develop without being fertilised
B. mitosis and develop without being fertilised
C. meiosis and are fertilised.
D. mitosis and are fertilised.

8. Worker bees are

A. Sterile females developed from fertilized eggs
B. Fertile females developed from unfertilized eggs
C. Sterile males developed from unfertilized eggs
D. Fertile females developed from unfertilized eggs

9. Which one of the following is true of diploid parthenogenesis? The eggs are formed by

A. Meiosis and develop without fertilization C. Meiosis and develop after fertilization
B. Mitosis and develop after fertilization D. Mitosis and develop without fertilization

Kato Maxmillian 494 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

10. Which one of the following is a form of vegetative propagation?

A. spore formation. C. budding.

B. conjugation. D. diploid parthenogenesis.

11. The following can result in variation of offspring except;

A. haploid pathenogenesis. C. fragmentation.

B. conjugation. D. self fertilisation.

12. Bryphytes and pteridophytes cannot fully exploit terrestrial life mainly because they.

A. Lack well developed vascular bundles. C. lack roots

B. Depend on water for fertilisation. D. are covered with a thin cuticle.

13. Which one of the following is true of diploid parthenogenesis?

The eggs are formed by
A. Meiosis and develop without being fertilized
B. Mitosis and develop after fertilization
C. Meiosis and develop after fertilization
D. Mitosis and develop and develop without being fertilized

STRUCTURED QUESTIONS

(a) Briefly explain what is meant by the following terms:

(i) Haploid parthenogenesis
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Diploid parthenogenesis
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 495 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(b) Describe the role of a male gamete in the process of sexual reproduction in flowering plants.
(03 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Give any three reasons why mosses are restricted to live in moist places.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 496 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

14.2 Sexual reproduction in animals

1. Which of one of the following can be concluded from the reproductive process in figure below.
The

A. Process occurs fast C. Offspring are many

B. Offspring are identical D. Offspring are resistant.

2. A human sperm.
A. doesnot have a nucleus.
B. has haploid number of chromosomes located in the middle piece.

Kato Maxmillian 497 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

C. has a small amount of cyoplasm

D. lacks mitochondria.

3. The vas deferens connects the epididymis to the

A. seminal vesicles. C. bulbourethral glands.

B. urethra. D. seminiferous tubules.

4. The prostrate gland is important to the

A. proper functioning of the scrotum. C. completion of meiosis.

B.ejaculation of normal semen. D. maturation of sperms.

5. After sperms move through the vas deferens, they enter the,

A. seminal vessicles. B. urinary bladder. C. urethra. D.epididymis.

6. Asperm tail consists of

A. a nuclear envelope. C. mitochondria.

B. enzymes used to penetrate an egg. D. flagella.

7. Which one of the following cells is formed by mitosis?

A. Ovum C. Primary spermatocyte

B. Secondary spermatocyte D. Secondary oocyte

8. Which one of the following cells is haploid?

A. Primordial germ cell C. Spermatogonium

B. Primary spermatocyte D. Secondary spermatocyte

9. which one of the following is an adaptation in organisms for aquatic conditions?

A. Development of pollen tube. C. internal ferilisation.

B. Shelled eggs D. flagellated sperms

Kato Maxmillian 498 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

10. Which one of the following could result from low levels of progesterone during gestation?

A. Miscarriage B. Parturition C. Menstruation D. Lactation

11. which one of the following occurs in the human female body, following menstruation?
A. corpus leteum develops
B. infertilised egg cell is removed from the body
C. placenta develops
D. proliferation of the uterine wall starts.

12. figure shows the control of production of hormones in the menstrual cycle.

In case of pregnancy, the stage which is maintained is

A. 1. B. 2. C. 3. D. 6

13. Which one of the follwoing phyla has a dominant gametophyte?

A. chlorophyta. C. pteridophyta.
B.spermatophyta. D. bryophyta.

14. High levels of luteinizing hormone in blood leads to the following except?

A. Ovulation C. Formation of the corpus luteum

B. Production of progesterone D. Development of the Graafian follicle.

15. The genetic condition of spore produced in the sporophyte caspsule of the bryophyte is

A. tetraploid. B. haploid. C. polyploid. D. diploid.

Kato Maxmillian 499 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

16. The passage of glucose molecules from maternal circulation to the foetal circulation across the
placenta is by

A. facilitated diffusion. C. active transport.

B. osmosis. D. simple diffusion.

17. Which one of the following is the correct sequence in which hormones are produced in the
menstrual cycle?
A. Progesterone, luteinizing hormone, oestrogen, follicle stimulating hormone
B. Follicle stimulating hormone, progesterone, luteinizing hormone, oestrogen
C. Follicle stimulating hormone, oestrogen, luteinizing hormone, progesterone
D. Luteinizing hormone, oestrogen, follicle stimulating hormone, progesterone.

18. Which one of the following is an effect of the luteinizing hormone?

A. Development of the Graafian follicles C. Stimulation of sperm production

B. ovulation D. Repair of the uterine wall

19. The role of Oestrogen during birth is

A. Causing contraction of the uterine wall
B. Increasing the sensitivity of the uterine muscles to oxytocin
C. Inhibiting the production of progesterone
D. Promoting milk production in the mammary glands

20. Which one of the following structures supplies oxygenated blood to the foetus?

A. Umbilical cord B. Umbilical vein C. Placenta villi D. Umbilical artery

21. Which one of the following is not a function of progesterone?

A. Increasing the sensitivity of uterine muscles
B. Inhibiting release of follicle stimulating hormone
C. Inhibiting release of prolactin
D. Promoting growth of mammary glands

22. The significance of vasularisation of the endometrium before implantation in mammals is to

A. Ensure firm attachment of the foetus onto the uterine wall.

Kato Maxmillian 500 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

B. Prevent menstruation
C. Assist in producing hormones which maintain pregnancy
D. Facilitate food and oxygen supply to the foetus

23. Which of the following structures is haploid?

A. Primary oocyte C. Secondary oocyte

B. Spermatogonium D. Germinal epithelium

24. Prolonged menstrual period may be caused by

A. High levels of progesterone
B. A decrease in production of follicle stimulating hormone
C. High levels of luteinizing hormone
D. A deficiency in Oestrogen

25. In the mammalian menstrual cycle, the decline in the level of progesterone is due to

A. Successful conception C. Degeneration of corpus luteum

B. Formation of corpus luteum D. Maturation of Graafian follicle

26. All the following are stimulated by the luteinizing hormone except A. Proliferation of the uterine
wall
B. Development of the corpus luteum
C. Stimulation of corpus luteum to produce progesterone
D. Ovulation

27. Which one of the following foetal blood vessels carries the most oxygenated blood?

A. Pulmonary artery C. Posterior vena cava

B. Dorsal aorta D. Umbilical vein

28. Which one of the following conditions would most likely result into a miscarriage in humans?
A. High level of progesterone and low level of Oestrogen in the blood
B. High level of Oestrogen and low level of progesterone in the blood
C. Low levels of progesterone and Oestrogen in the blood
D. High levels of progesterone and Oestrogen in the blood

Kato Maxmillian 501 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

29. Which one of the following would not reduce the development of Graafian follicles in
mammalian ovaries?

A. High levels of Oestrogen C. Deficiency in the pituitary

B. High levels of progesterone D. Low levels of luteinizing hormone

30. In most mammals a high sperm count is maintained by

A. Subjecting the animals to high temperatures
B. Maintaining the testis in the abdominal cavity
C. Insulating the testis
D. Having the scrotal sacs outside the abdominal cavity

31. What is the role of the luteinizing hormone in menstrual cycle? Promotes

A. Release of ovum C. Disintegration of the ovum

B. Healing of uterine wall D. Implantation of zygote

32. The hormone controlling ovulation and luteal phase of human menstrual cycle is:

A. oxytocin. C. luteinizing hormone.

B. FSH. D. oestrogen.

33. The following are functions of semen except;

A. destruction of bacteria in the urethral tract.
B. Neutralizing the acidic medium of the vagina.
C. Activation of spermatozoa.
D. Nourishing the sperms

34. Which one of the following is the growing stage in spermatogenesis?

A. Spermatid B. Spermatozoon
C. Spermatogonium D. Primary spermatocyte

Kato Maxmillian 502 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

35. The reproductive stage of plasmodium in the liver is represented by the

A. Zygote B. Gametocyte C. Merozoite D. Sporozoite

36. The figure below shows hormonal interaction that occurs during the menstrual cycle

Hormones X and Y are respectively.

A. luetenising hormone and oestrogen
B. oestrogen and progestrone
C. progestrone and oestrogen
D. luetinising hormone and follicle stimulating hormone

37. Which one of the following is the mother cell from which the ovum is developed?

A. Oogonium C. Primodial germ cell

B. Primary oocyte D. Secondary germ cell

Kato Maxmillian 503 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

STRUCTURED QUESTIONS

38. (a) Study the figure below and label the parts in the spaces provided.

(b) Describe two differences between the seminiferous tubules and the vasdeferens.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Describe the composition of semen.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(d) (i) State any one similarity between an egg and a sperm.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Outline any two differences between the sperm and an egg.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 504 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

39. (a) Give an account of the process of spermatogenesis in man.

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) How are the sertoli cells adapted to their function?
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Describe a major change that would occur in the fetal circulation if blood preesure were
highest in the aorta.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

40. The figure below shows the events of menstrual cycle. Use it to answer the questions that folllow.

(a) Briefely describe what takes place in each figure.

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 505 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Explain why ovulation does not occur during pregnancy.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Describe how the placenta, chorionic villi, and allantois are functionally and structurally
related.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

41. The illustration below shows the action of the female hormones during pregnancy. Study it and
answer questions that follow.

(a) i) Identify the portions of the pituitary gland labelled D and B.

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 506 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

ii) Name the hormone labelled C, in the diagram above.

..............................................................................................................................................................
iii) State the role of hormone labelled C,mentioned in ii) abobe.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Name the hormone G and structure H.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Give two(2) roles of hormone G and one (1) role of structure H.
Hormone G.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
Structure H.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

42. The figure below shows the rise and fall of pituitary and ovarian hormones during the human
cycle.

(a) Name hormones A,B,C, and D.

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 507 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(b) Outline the role of hormones;

(i) B:
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) C:
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Was the lady pregnant at the end of cycle or not? Give a reason for your answer.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(d) Some animals like the rotifers and aphids are able to alternate between sexual and asexual
reproduction. Under what condition might it be advatangeous to reproduce; (i) asexually:
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) sexually:
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(e) Explain what might cause a variation in the length of human menstraual cycle.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(f) Explain why oral contraceptives (pills) are rich in vitamin D.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 508 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

43. The figure below shows sperm formation in a mammalian testis.

(a) Explain why cells A and B are genetically identical.

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Describe two ways in which cell division leads to cells C and D being genetically different.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Briefly describe how the process of gamate formation in an ovary leads to smaller numbers of
larger gametes being produced in a female mammal.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(d) Both testis and the ovary contain largernumber of blood vessels. Otherthan cell division, What
specific function of these organs is associated woth these blood vessels?
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 509 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

44. The figure shows below some of the events which take place in an ovary and oviduct around the
time of fertilisation.

(a) Name the following.

(i) The process labelled A.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) The type of nuclear division taking place at D and E.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(iii) The structure labelled X.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) On the diagram, use letter F to label the region where fertilisation took place.

45. In the process of sperm formation in a mammalain testis, cells divide by meiosis and mitosis.
(a) Explain why mitosis is important in the process of sperm formation.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 510 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(b) The diagram below shows a mature mammalian sperm.

Describe the role played by structure A in the process leading to fertilisation.

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Explain one advantage of internal fertilisation to terrestrial animals.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(d) A contraceptive Norplant ia inserted on the inside of the upper arm. Norplant consists of six
capsules and each capsule contains synthetic progestrone hormone, which thickens the mucus
produced by the cervix if the uterus. The hormone also inhibits the production of luteinising
hormone.(LH)
(i) Suggest how the thickening of mucus produced by the cervix of the uterus might help to
prevent conception.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Describe the role of LH in the menstrual cycle and explain how the inhibiton of LH
production prvents conception.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(iii) Hormone levels are affected by negative feedback mechanism. What is meant by a negative
feedback.
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 511 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(iv) Suggest and explain the advantages and disadvantages of using Norplant as acontraceptive.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

46. The figure below shows changes in the mean diameter of follicles and corpora lutea ovaries of a
mammal over a period of 50 days.

(a) i) Explain the changes in the follicle size which took place between days 5 and 27.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
ii) Describe the role played by these hormones in producing these changes.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Describe two pieces of evidence which suggest that the animal didnot become preganant over
the period of time shown on the graph.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 512 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

47. (a) What is meant the term gonadotrophic hormones as used in the menstrual cycle? (02 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Name two gonadotrophic hormones essential in controlling the menstrual cycle. (02 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) The figure below shows the thickness of the uterine wall throughout the menstraul cycle in an
adult human female.

From the figure above, state with a reason the day when;
(i) ovulation is mostly likely to happen.(2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) fertilisation is most likely to occur.(2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(iii) Corpus leteum begins to break down.(1.5marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 513 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(d) Briefly describe the development of the graffian follicle from oogonium during ovulation. (4
marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

48. The table below shows some of the sex hormones in blood of a cow over a period of time.

(a) State with a reason the length of the oestrous cycle. (2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Explain how a high concentration of luteinising hormone on day 0 causes an increase in
progestrone later.(3 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Suggest with a reason how the level of progestrone would differ if a cow has been pregnant. (3
marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 514 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(d) Progestrone can be detected in milk during pregnancy. Suggest how progestrone gets into
milk. (1mark)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(e) Describe how sex hormones can be used in contraception in controlling infertility in humans.
(2 marks)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

14.3 Sexual reproduction lower organisms and flowering plants.

Kato Maxmillian 515 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

1. In which one of the following structures of a moss does meiosis occur?

A. Gametophyte B. Sporophyte C. Archegonium D. Antheridium

2. Some sporophytes contain a mixture of haploid, diploid and triploid cells at some point. This
condition only occurs in

A. Flowering plants B. Mosses C. Ferns D. Conifers

3. Dioecious plants are rare because

A. They have separate male and female flowers on the same plant
B. There is self-incomptability of gametes
C. The male and female plants rarely mature at the same time
D. Part of each species of dioecious plants does not bear fruits

4. Which of the following is a difference between flowers of dicotyledonous plants and those of
monocotyledonous plants? Flowers of dicotyledonous plant usually

A. Lack sepals C. Bear floral parts in groups of 4s and 5s.

B. Possess superior ovaries D. Possess fused petals

5. During fertilization in plants, the

A. Vegetative nucleus fuses with the pollen nucleus
B. Generative nucleus fuses with the egg nucleus
C. Vegetative nucleus fuses with the egg nucleus
D. Generative nucleus fuses with the antipodal cell nucleus

6. Double fertilization in flowering plants refers to fusion of two male nuclei with

A. antipodal nuclei and polar nuclei C. egg nucleus and antipodal nuclei
B. egg nucleus and polar nuclei D. two egg nuclei

Kato Maxmillian 516 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

7. At which of the following stages does meiosis occur in the life cycle of a fern? During the
formation of the

A. gametes B. gametophyte C. spores D. sporophyte

8. Which one of the following is the diploid stage in the life cycle of a moss?

A. Protonema B. Sporophyte C. Gametophyte D. Antheridium

9. In which of the following plants showing alternation of generations is the sporophyte generation
dominant?

A. Mosses and algae C. Ferns and mosses

B. Algae and ferns D. Ferns and gymnosperms

10. Which one of the following is true during fertilization in higher plants?
A. One of the male nuclei fuses with polar nuclei
B. Two of the cells at the micropyle become non-functional
C. The antipodal cells fuse with one male nucleus
D. All the polar cells are fertilized

11. Which one of the following is true of the products of gametogenesis in flowering plants?

A. The pollen grain is haploid C. The generative nucleus is haploid

B. The synergids are diploid D. The definitive nucleus is haploid

12. Ferns are considered to be more advanced land plants than mosses because sporophytes of ferns

A. are able to produce spores. C. develop rhizoids.

B. have green leaves. D. have well developed vascular systems.

13. The sporophyte generation of flowering plants has a mixture of cellswith different nucleic acid
content because
A. of chromosomal mutation in some cells. B. they produce megaspores and microspores.
C. of double fertilisation
D. the flower produce fruits and seeds.

Kato Maxmillian 517 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

14. A biological advantage of a monoecious condition is that

A. many offspring result from each other.
B. every individual is capable of producing offspring
C. self fertilisation is encouraged.
D. male and female gametes mature at the same time.

STRUCTURED QUESTIONS

15. (a) What is meant by alternation of generations?

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Ferns and mosses show alternation of generations. State the dominant stage in each case.
(i) Ferns
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Mosses
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Give the importance of alternation of generations in the life cycle of an organism.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(d) Outline the limitations that mosses face in growing in terrestrial habitats.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

16. (a) Give one ecological importance of each of the following structures arrangements in plants.
(i) Monoecious
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 518 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(ii) Dioecious
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Explain why
(i) in Dioecious plants, male plants are usually associated with dry soils while female plants are
associated with moist soils
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) nearly all Dioecious plants are wind pollinated
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Give one reason why Dioecious plants are rarer than Monoecious plants.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

17. a) Describe the structural changes of a flowers ovary that result in the development of a fruit.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
b) Why are plantations of banana plants in different parts of the world grown from cuttings all
susceptible to fungal attack?
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
c) Edible banana plants have three sets of chromosomes. Why does this condition result into
sterility?
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 519 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

18. Figure 2 below represents a section through the ovary of a flower

(a) (i) Name structures labeled A, B, C, D, E and F

A
..............................................................................................................................................................
B
..............................................................................................................................................................
C
..............................................................................................................................................................
D
..............................................................................................................................................................
E
..............................................................................................................................................................
F
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) State the functions of each of the parts labeled.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) In the space below draw a fully labeled structure of a mature pollen grain.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 520 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(c) Explain what is meant by double fertilization.

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

19. A moss alternates between two distinct forms in its life cycle; as a gametophyte and sporophyte.
(a) Describe how (i) a gametophyte forms a sporophyte.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) a sporophyte forms a gametophyte.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Explain why mosses are restricted to living in wet environment.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

20. (a) Distinguish between monoecius and dioecious plants.

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Outline the adaptations that promote outbreeding in monoecious plants.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Explain the reproductive adapataion which have promoted survival of angiosperms on land.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 521 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

21. The figure below shows a germinating pollen grain and a mature ovule from a flower of a
papilionaceae. Some nuclei have been labeled.

(a) Describe how pollination usually occurs in the papilionaceae.

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Give the letter of the nucleus which fuses with a male nucleus to form;
(i) the zygote:
........................................................................................................................................................................................
(ii) the endo sperm:
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Describe one mechanism which prevents self-fertilisation in flowering plants.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 522 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

15 DEVELOPMENT

15.1 Growth and development in plants and animals.

1. Dry weight is the best method of growth in an organism because it

A. does not involve destroying the organism
B. is easier to determine
C. neither increases nor decreases
D. is constituted of weight of the protoplasm synthesized.

2. The primary meristematic tissue in plants which gives rise to the cortex is the

A. Ground meristem C. Protoderm

B. Procambium D Protoxylem

Kato Maxmillian 523 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

3. Which one of the following graphs correctly represents the growth rate of a multcellular
organism?

4. Figure 1 shows a longitudinal section of a root apex.

Which main activity takes place in region labeled X?

A. Differentiation C. Cell expansion

B. Meiotic cell division D. Mitotic cell division

5. In a stem of Eucalyptus, phelloderm arises from

A. Cork cambium C. Fascicula cambium

B. Interfascicular cambium D. Cambium ring

6. During germination of a seed, there is an initial negative growth due to.

A. the increase in metabolic rate.
B. imbibed water which does not contribute to the dry mass of the seed.
C. the breaking of the testa as the seed expands.
D. respiration of food reserves.

Kato Maxmillian 524 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

7. Which one of the following statements about woody stems is incorrect?

A. Secondary phloem accumulates to form the wood
B. The stem is organized into a central pith, wood and outer bark
C. Cork cambium produces water proof cork cells that become bark
D. Woody stems contain secondary growth

8. Plant stem primary meristems are

A. Apical meristem, vascular cambium, cork cambium
B. Epidermis, apical meristem, vascular cambium
C. vascular cambium, protoderm and procambium
D. ground meristem, protoderm and procambium

9. Which one of the following is not a role of the larva stage in animal development?

A. dispersal. C. feeding.
B. asexual reproduction. D. sexual reproduction.

10. Which one of the following statements about meristematic cells is true
A. they are found only at growing tips in plants
B. lose their ability to divide after 5 divisions
C. have lignified cell walls
D. they are alive at maturity

11. In a flowering plant, the cork cells develop from the

A. epidermis B. phloem C. phellogen D. phelloderm

12. In the mature woody stem, the sequences of tissues (moving from outside towards the centre) is
A. periderm → phloem → cambium → xylem → pith
B. Periderm → phloem → pith → cambium → xylem
C. periderm → cambium → phloem → xylem → pith
D. phloem → sapwood → cambium → xylem → pith

13. Which of the following does not occur in the region of cell elongation in both the root and stem?
A. osmotic intake of water by the cells
B. loosening of the cell wall

Kato Maxmillian 525 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

C. assimilation of different metabolites by the cells

D. large vacuole formation

14. Which of the following is not a short coming of the use of dry weight as a method of measuring
growth?

A. Respiratory activity C. Differential growth of plant parts

B. Accumulation of inorganic salts D. Loss of plant during drying process

15. Which of the following will not cause seed dormancy?

A. Presence of germination inhibitors C. Permeable seed coat

B. Embryo dormancy D. Embryo dormancy

16. Primary growth in plants is mainly the activity of

A. Lateral meristems C. Primary meristems

B. Apical meristems D. Intercalary meristems

17. The term allometric growth refers to;

A. the growth of the brain before all other organs of the body.
B. The growth of different parts of the body at their own rates compared to that of the whole body.
C. Fluctuations in growth, due to changes in environmental conditions.
D. Variation in form of an organism, as it grows

18. What do you understand by the term ecdysis?

A. the drastic transformation of a larva into an adult
B. the shedding of a hard cuticle, such as insects
C. the secretion of a new cuticle by the epidermis in insects
D. the replacement of an old cuticle with the new one

19. The larva forms and their adults do not come into direct competition because the larva

A. are independent organisms C. have restricted mobility

B. are different in structure and feeding habits D. reproduce asexually.

Kato Maxmillian 526 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

20. An advantage of larval from during development is to:

A. provides protection for the young.
B. reduce competition between the young and the adult.
C. allow rapid growth of the young.
D. allow sufficient time for development.

21. Lignification of plant cells has the effect of:

A. widening the cells and making them move permeable.
B. making the cells more rigid and killing them.
C. making the cells impermeable and lengthening them.
D. strengthening the cells and making them more permeable

22. An advantage of larval form during development is to

A. provide protection for the young
B. reduce competition between the young and the adults
C. allow rapid growth of the young
D. allow sufficient time for development.

23. Which one of the following is not a function of larval forms during animal development?

A. Distribution of the species C. Sexual reproduction

B. Feeding and growth D. Survival of adverse conditions

24. Which one of the following events occurs during telophase of mitosis in the meristematic cells of
a root tip?

A. Cleavage of the cytoplasm C. Replication of the chromosomes

B. Replication of the centrioles D. Formation of the cell plate

25. In a plant, secondary cortex is produced by the

A. Cork cambium C. Apical meristem

B. Vascular cambium D. Intercalary meristem

Kato Maxmillian 527 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

STRUCTURED QUESTIONS

26. Figure 3 below shows the changes in dry weight of a germinating bean.

(a) Explain the changes

(i) In the first seven days
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Between the seventh and twenty first day
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Give the major factors that cause seed dormancy.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

27. a) Define the following terms;

Kato Maxmillian 528 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(i) Growth
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Development
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Explain the growth pattern in arthropods
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

28. The figures below show viability of fescue grass seed at different conditions.

(a) From the figures, state the factors that affect viability of fescue grass
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Describe the effect of each factor in (a) on the viability of seeds.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Explain the effect of each factor in (a) on viability of the seeds.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 529 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................

29. Figure 6 shows results obtained in an investigation on maize seedlings and the dry mass of the
seedlings during germination, for 12 days.

(a) (i) Describe the relationship between the change in concentration of amylase and the dry mass
of the seedlings in the first 2 days.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Explain the relationship described in (a)(i)
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Explain the change
(i) In dry mass of the seedlings during the 7th day.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) In amylase concentration after the 2nd day.
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 530 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

30. Figure 3 shows growth curves of the brain, thymus gland, reproductive organs and the whole
body of a human. The size attained is expressed as percentage of total gain between birth and
maturity (20 years).
(a) Explain the different growth rates of the brain, thymus gland, reproductive organs and the
whole body.

(i) Brain
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Thymus gland
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(iii) Reproductive organs
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 531 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) What type of growth is exhibited in the figure?
..............................................................................................................................................................

31. Graph 2 below shows changes in lipid and sugar content of castor oil seeds during germination in
the dark.

The R.Q of the seedlings was measured at day 5 and the embryo was found to have an R.Q of 1.0
while the remaining cotyledons had an RQ of 0.4 0.5
a) Suggest an explanation for these results.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
b) What would you expect the RQ of the whole seedling to be on day 11? Explain briefly
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
c) Why was the experiment carried out in the dark?
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 532 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(d) Explain the changes in lipid and sugar content and total dry mass during the experimental
period.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(e) On the same graph indicate the shape of the curves if the seeds were to germinate in light.

32. (a) Distinguish between dormancy and hibernation.

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) List down four causes of dormancy.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Explain how dormancy can be advantage to plants.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(d) Suggest three ways by which dormancy may be broken.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

33. The table below shows an experiment carried out on blood sucking bug genus Rhodinus. Study
the information in the table and answer questions that follow.
Experiment Results.
1. Blood sucked by the bug, then head cut off after 2days later Bug survives briefly, no moulting.
2. Blood sucked by bug, then head cut off 7days later Bug survives longer and moults.
3. Brain from a moulted larva transplanted into another larva of same age. Larva moults but doesnot turn to an adult.

Kato Maxmillian 533 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(a) Explain;
(i) the obseved results in experiment 1 and 2.
Experiment 1.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
Experiment 2.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Explain the role of the brain in insect development as observed in experiemnt 3.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Suggest ;
(i) one way the larva can be induced to develop into adult.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Four ecological significance of larvae in life of a species.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

34. (a) Distinguish between activation, dormancy and hibernation.

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) (i) How do the states of activity in (a) above differ from senescence?

Kato Maxmillian 534 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) What is the ecological significance of these states of activity?
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Give an example of an organism that undergoes
(i) Aestivation
..............................................................................................................................................................
(ii) Hibernation
..............................................................................................................................................................
(d) Why do small animals hibernate more than large ones?
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

35. The figure below shows changes in the dry mass of the embryo ,endosperm and total mass of
maize seeds germianting in light conditions

(a) Explain the changes in the relative dry mass of the

(i) endosperm.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 535 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(ii) embryo.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Explain why the total drt mass of the seedlings intially deccreases then later increases.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) Suggest with reasons what would happen to the total dry mass of the seedlings if seeds were
germinated in the dark.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

36. The figure below shows the relationship between the levels of prothoracicotrophic hormone
(PTTH) or brain hormone in the brain and in blood of a silk worm at 300 C and later transfered to
a temperature of 250 C with time of development from larva to adult. Study the figure and use it to
answer the qustions that follow.

Kato Maxmillian 536 Gingo David

A-LEVEL BIOLOGY STUDY GUIDE c VOLUME 1

(a) Compare the levels of PTTH in the brain and blood of silkworm during the study period.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(b) Account for the reletionship between the levels of PTTH in blood and brain of the silkworm
during its development from larva to adult.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
(c) State any one significance of growth and development in organisms.
..............................................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................

Kato Maxmillian 537 Gingo David